2016 Sprinter Owners Manual PDF

Sprinter
Operator's Manual
É9065844908GËÍ
9065844908
Sprinter
Order no. 6462 7546 13 Part no. 906 584 49 08 Edition 07-15 MB
Symbols Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Publication details
G WARNING 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Internet
Warning notes make you aware of dangers Toronto, ON M4G 4C9
which could pose a threat to your health or www.mercedes-benz.ca Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
life, or to the health and life of others. Customer Relations Department: cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
1-800-387-0100
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
H Environmental note
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Environmental notes provide you with infor- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz
Canada Inc. are Daimler companies. http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. Canada only: "Authorized Sprinter Dealer" is
defined as an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Sprinter Dealer. Editorial office
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle. You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operator's
i These symbols indicate useful instructions Manual to the technical documentation team at
or further information that could be helpful to the address on the inside of the front cover.
you. © Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
X This symbol designates an instruc- © Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

tion you must follow. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz
X Several consecutive symbols indi- Canada Inc. are Daimler companies.
cate an instruction with several Not to be reprinted, translated, or otherwise
steps. reproduced, in whole or in part, without written
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you can permission.
find further information on a topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the Vehicle manufacturer
next page.
Display This text indicates a message on the Daimler AG
display.
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Registered trademarks Germany
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.
Vehicle distributor
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
www.mbusa.com
www.mbsprinterusa.com
Customer Assistance Center:
1-877-762-8267
As at 05.03.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read the Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. Please adhere to the information
and warning notes in this Operator's Manual for
your own safety and to ensure a longer operat-
ing duration of the vehicle. Failure to observe
the instructions may lead to damage to the vehi-
cle or personal injury.
Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observe
the instructions is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
The illustrations in this Operator's Manual show
a left-hand-drive vehicle. The location of vehicle
parts and controls for right-hand drive vehicles
differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi-
cles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce
changes in:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnology
Therefore, the descriptions provided may occa-
sionally differ from your own vehicle.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance or Service Booklet
RService and warranty information
REquipment-dependent operating instructions
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. Should you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
We wish you pleasant motoring at all times.
9065844908 É9065844908GËÍ
2 Contents
Index ....................................................... 3 At a glance ........................................... 31
Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 59
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 72
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 79
Climate control .................................... 97
Driving and parking .......................... 118
On-board computer and displays .... 161
Stowing and features ....................... 204
Transporting loads ............................ 212
Maintenance and care ...................... 218
Roadside Assistance ........................ 240
Wheels and tires ............................... 247
Technical data ................................... 275

Index 3
1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 105

Setting the side air vents ............... 106
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 55 Air-conditioning system
12 V socket ........................................ 210 Refrigerant ..................................... 284
see Climate control
A Air-recirculation mode
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes .................. 104
Display message ............................ 181 Switching on/off ........................... 104
Function/notes ................................ 53 Alarm system
Important safety notes .................... 53 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Indicator lamp ................................ 195 All-wheel drive
Access step in the bumper Engaging/disengaging ................... 148
Cleaning ......................................... 237 Important safety notes .................. 147
Activating/deactivating cooling LOW RANGE transmission ratio ..... 148
with air dehumidification ................. 102 Anti-lock Braking System
Activating/deactivating the roof see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
ventilator ........................................... 117 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Adaptive Brake Assist see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function/notes ............................. 143 Anti-theft system
ADAPTIVE ESP® Interior motion sensor ..................... 57
Armrests .............................................. 76
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Ashtray ............................................... 209
Add-on equipment ............................... 27
ASR (acceleration skid control)
Additional indicators
Activating/deactivating ................... 53
Replacing bulbs ............................... 88
Display message ............................ 182
Replacing bulbs (roof) ...................... 91
Function/notes ................................ 53
Additives
Important safety notes .................... 53
Diesel ............................................ 279
Indicator lamp ................................ 195
Engine oil ....................................... 281
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 81
Activating/deactivating ................... 56
ADR (working speed governor) ........ 154
Switching off the alarm .................... 56
Air bags Authorized workshop
Deployment ..................................... 45 see Qualified specialist workshop
Front air bag (driver, front Automatic car wash (care) ............... 233
passenger) ....................................... 44 Automatic climate control
see Climate control
Introduction ..................................... 43
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 80
Side impact air bag .......................... 45
Automatic locking ............................... 64
Window curtain air bag .................... 45
Automatic transmission
Air filter
Accelerator pedal position ............. 126
Indicator lamp ................................ 201
Air pressure Changing gear ............................... 125
Changing gear yourself .................. 125
see Tire pressure
Air vents Driving tips .................................... 126
Emergency running mode .............. 127
Adjusting for the passenger com-
Important safety notes .................. 124
partment ........................................ 106
Kickdown ....................................... 126
Adjusting on the roof ..................... 106
Maneuvering .................................. 126
4 Index
Overview ........................................ 124 Indicator lamp ................................ 195

Problem (malfunction) ................... 127 Basic settings
Releasing the parking lock man- see Settings
ually ............................................... 127 Battery
Selector lever ................................ 124 Isolating switch .............................. 118
Selector lever positions ................. 124 Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 61
Shift ranges ................................... 125 Battery (SmartKey)
Starting the engine ........................ 120 Checking .......................................... 61
Touchshift ...................................... 125 Important safety notes .................... 61
Trailer towing ................................. 126 Replacing ......................................... 61
Transmission oil change ................ 282 Battery (vehicle)
Automatic transmission emer- Care ............................................... 232
gency mode ....................................... 127 Charge indicator lamp ................... 198
AUX port ............................................. 211 Charging ........................................ 232
Auxiliary heater Disconnecting and connecting ....... 229
see Auxiliary warm-air heater Disconnecting and connecting
see Hot-water auxiliary heater (engine compartment) ................... 231
Auxiliary heating Display message ............................ 192
Activating/deactivating heater Important safety notes .................. 227
booster mode ................................ 111 Installing/removing (engine com-
Adjusting ....................................... 173 partment) ....................................... 231
Conditions for switching on ........... 108 Jump starting ................................. 242
Heating time .................................. 107 Location ......................................... 228
Important safety notes .................. 106 Removing and installing ................. 230
Operating with the button (control Removing and installing the floor
panel) ............................................ 108 covering ......................................... 228
Operation with the remote con- Before driving off
trol ................................................. 109 Important safety notes .................. 120
Operation with the timer ................ 114 Belt
Selecting a switch-on time ............. 108 see Seat belts
Setting the switch-on time ............. 109 Bleeding the fuel system .................. 123
see Auxiliary heating Blind Spot Assist
see Auxiliary warm-air heater Activating/deactivating ......... 146, 173
see Hot-water auxiliary heater Notes/function .............................. 144
Auxiliary warm-air heater Trailer towing ................................. 146
Problem (malfunction) ................... 117 Bottle holder
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- see Cup holder
ing) ...................................................... 287 Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
B Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Backup lamps Brake fluid
Replacing bulbs ............................... 89 Checking the level ......................... 223
Backup lamps (Chassis Cab) Display message ............................ 183
Replacing bulbs ............................... 90 Notes ............................................. 283
BAS (Brake Assist System) Warning lamp ................................. 195
Display message ............................ 182
Function/notes ................................ 54
Index 5
Brake force distribution, elec- C

tronic
see EBD (electronic brake force California
distribution) Important notice for retail cus-
Brake lamps tomers and lessees .......................... 22
Replacing bulbs ............................... 89 Car
Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) see Vehicle
Replacing bulbs ............................... 90 Care
Brake linings Access step in the bumper ............ 237
Display message ............................ 182 Car wash ........................................ 233
Indicator lamp ................................ 198 Display ........................................... 237
Brake pads/linings Exterior lights ................................ 236
New ............................................... 136 Interior ........................................... 237
Brake system Notes ............................................. 233
Malfunction .................................... 182 Paint .............................................. 235
Warning lamp ................................. 195 Plastic trim .................................... 238
Brakes Power washer ................................ 234
ABS .................................................. 53 Rear view camera .......................... 236
Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 143 Roof lining ...................................... 238
Applying the parking brake ............ 131 Seat belt ........................................ 238
BAS .................................................. 54 Seat cover ..................................... 238
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 283 Selector lever ................................ 238
Checking brake fluid level .............. 223 Sensors ......................................... 236
Display messages .......................... 182 Sliding door ................................... 237
EBD .................................................. 54 Steering wheel ............................... 238
Important safety notes .................. 135 Step (electrical) ............................. 237
Maintenance .................................. 195 Trim pieces .................................... 238
New brake pads/linings ................ 136 Washing by hand ........................... 234
Parking brake (notes) ..................... 136 Washing the engine ....................... 234
Riding tips ...................................... 135 Wheels ........................................... 235
Breakdown Windows ........................................ 235
Fire extinguisher ............................ 242 Wiper blades .................................. 235
First-aid kit .................................... 241 Cargo compartment
Jump-starting ................................. 242 Activating/deactivating ventila-
Reflective safety jacket .................. 241 tion ................................................ 117
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 240 Cargo compartment floor ................... 28
Warning lamp ................................. 241 Cargo tie-down points and tie
Warning triangle ............................ 241 downs
see Flat tire Important safety notes .................. 214
see Towing away Cargo tie-down rings
Bulb Installing ........................................ 216
see Changing bulbs Permissible tensile load ................. 285
Bulb failure indicator .......................... 79 Carrier system
Ladder rack ................................... 217
CD player/CD changer ...................... 168
Cell phone
see Mobile phone
Center console overview .................... 35
6 Index
Central locking Warning and indicator lamps ......... 203

Automatic locking ............................ 64 see Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes .................... 64 Changing bulbs
Locking/unlocking (buttons) ........... 64 see Replacing bulbs
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 59 Checklist
Locking/unlocking manually ............ 64 Before driving off-road ................... 138
Central locking system Child
see Central locking Restraint system .............................. 48
Changing bulbs Child seat
Additional indicators (roof) .............. 91 Forward-facing restraint system ...... 51
Additional turn signals ..................... 88 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Backup lamp (Chassis Cab) ............. 90 anchors ............................................ 49
Backup lamps .................................. 89 On the front-passenger seat ............ 51
Bi-Xenon bulbs ................................. 86 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 51
Brake lamps ..................................... 89 Top Tether ....................................... 50
Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) .............. 90 Child-proof locks
Cornering lamps .............................. 87 Important safety notes .................... 51
Courtesy lights ................................. 91 Rear door ......................................... 52
Daytime running lamps (halogen Children
headlamps) ...................................... 87 Special seat belt retractor ............... 48
Display message ............................ 185 Chock ................................................. 132
Front interior light ............................ 92 Cigarette lighter ................................ 209
High-beam headlamps ..................... 87 Cleaning
Interior light ..................................... 92 Mirror turn signal ........................... 236
Interior lighting ................................ 92 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 237
License plate lamp ........................... 90 Climate control
License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) .... 90 Air conditioning in the rear com-
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 87 partment ........................................ 101
Overview of lamp types (front Air-conditioning system ................... 99
bulbs) ............................................... 86 Auxiliary heating ............................ 106
Overview of lamp types (rear Checking/cleaning the air filter
bulbs, Cargo Van/Passenger (rear-compartment air condition-
Van) ................................................. 89 ing) ................................................ 225
Overview of lamp types (rear Cooling with air dehumidification .. 102
bulbs, Chassis Cab) ......................... 90 Defrosting the windows ................. 103
Parking lamps .................................. 87 Heating ............................................ 98
Perimeter lamp .......................... 90, 91 Heating in the rear compartment ... 100
Rear fog lamp .................................. 89 Important safety notes .................... 97
Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) ............ 90 Operating the cargo compartment
Rear interior light ............................. 92 air vents ......................................... 117
Standing lamps (rear, Chassis Overview of systems ........................ 97
Cab) ................................................. 90 Problem with the rear window
Standing lamps (rear) ...................... 89 defroster ........................................ 104
Tail lamps ........................................ 89 Problems with the windshield
Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) .................. 90 heating .......................................... 104
Turn signals (front) ........................... 88 Rear-compartment air condition-
Turn signals (rear, Chassis Cab) ....... 90 ing ................................................. 101
Turn signals (rear) ............................ 89 Rear-compartment heating ............ 100
Index 7
Reheat function (air dehumidifica- Cornering lamps

tion) ............................................... 103 Replacing bulbs ............................... 87
Setting the air distribution ............. 102 Cornering light function
Setting the air vents ...................... 105 Function/notes ................................ 82
Setting the airflow ......................... 102 Courtesy lights
Setting the temperature ................ 102 Replacing bulbs ............................... 91
Switching air-recirculation mode Crosswind driving assistance ............ 55
on/off ............................................ 104 Cruise control
Switching on/off ........................... 101 Activating ....................................... 141
Switching the rear window Activation conditions ..................... 140
defroster on/off ............................ 104 Cruise control lever ....................... 140
Switching windshield heating on/ Deactivating ................................... 141
off .................................................. 104 Display message ............................ 190
Cockpit Driving system ............................... 140
Overview .......................................... 31 Function/notes ............................. 140
see Instrument cluster Important safety notes .................. 140
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Problem (malfunction) ................... 142
Activating/deactivating the dis- Resuming the stored speed ........... 141
tance warning function .................. 143 Setting a speed .............................. 141
COMAND display Storing and maintaining current
Cleaning ......................................... 237 speed ............................................. 141
Combination switch ............................ 81 Cup holder ......................................... 208
Communications equipment Center console .............................. 208
Operation ....................................... 211 Cup holder
PND fittings ................................... 211 see Cup holders
Ports .............................................. 211 Cup holders ........................................ 208
Type approval/frequency .............. 275 Curtains (cleaning instructions) ...... 239
Consumption statistics (on-board Customer Assistance Center
computer) .......................................... 174 (CAC) ..................................................... 27
Control panel Customer Relations Department ....... 27
Above the windshield ....................... 36
Center console ................................ 35 D
Climate control ................................ 35
Driver's door .................................... 37 Dashboard
Left and right side of the steering see Cockpit
wheel ............................................... 37 Dashboard lighting
Conversions/equipment .................... 27 see Instrument cluster lighting
Coolant (engine) Data
Adding ........................................... 223 see Technical data
Checking the level ......................... 222 Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 188 Activating/deactivating (vehicles
Displaying the temperature (on- with steering wheel buttons) ......... 171
board computer) ............................ 167 Changing bulbs (halogen head-
Filling capacity ............................... 284 lamps) .............................................. 87
Important safety notes .................. 222 Switching on/off (switch) ................ 79
Cooling Switching on/off (vehicles with-
see Climate control out steering wheel buttons) ........... 164
8 Index
Dealership Display messages

see Qualified specialist workshop Calling up the message memory .... 176
Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Driving systems ............................. 190
DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid ) Engine ............................................ 187
Refilling .......................................... 129 Important safety notes .................. 176
Delayed switch-off ............................ 172 Lights ............................................. 185
Diagnostics connection Safety systems .............................. 181
Operating safety and vehicle SmartKey ....................................... 193
approval ........................................... 26 Tires ............................................... 191
Diesel .................................................. 278 Vehicle ........................................... 192
Diesel engine Distance recorder ............................. 167
Preglow indicator lamp .................. 201 see Odometer
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) see Trip odometer
Display messages (vehicles with Distance warning function
steering wheel buttons) ................. 187 Activating/deactivating ................. 143
Display messages (vehicles with- Function/notes ............................. 142
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 178 Warning lamp ................................. 143
Indicator lamp ................................ 197 Door lock
Level indicator ............................... 162 see Central locking
Notes ............................................. 279 Doors
Storage .......................................... 280 Central locking/unlocking
Tank content .................................. 280 (SmartKey) ....................................... 59
Diesel particle filter Control panel ................................... 37
Display message ............................ 187 Display message ............................ 193
Indicator lamp ................................ 201 Indicator lamp ................................ 203
Short-distance driving .................... 134 Drinking and driving ......................... 133
Digital speedometer Drinks holder
Setting the unit (vehicles with see Bottle holder
steering wheel buttons) ................. 169 Driver's seat
Display see Seats
Display messages .......................... 176 Driver's/front-passenger door
Outside temperature (vehicles Unlocking ......................................... 65
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 167 Driving abroad ................................... 134
Outside temperature display Driving off-road
(vehicles without steering wheel see Off-road driving
buttons) ......................................... 163 Driving on flooded roads .................. 136
Standard display (vehicles with Driving on rough terrain
steering wheel buttons) ................. 167 Checklist before driving off-road .... 138
Standard display (vehicles with- Driving safety systems
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 163 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
see Warning and indicator lamps tem) ................................................. 55
Display message (vehicle with ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 53
steering wheel buttons) Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 143
Service interval display .................. 226 ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 53
Display message (vehicle without BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 54
steering wheel buttons) Distance warning function ............. 142
Service interval display .................. 226 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution) ............................................. 54
Index 9
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Electrical fuses

gram) ............................................... 54 see Fuses
Important safety information ........... 52 Electrical step
Overview .......................................... 52 Cleaning ......................................... 237
Driving systems Display message ............................ 192
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 144 Emergency release .......................... 67
Cruise control ................................ 140 Function ........................................... 67
Display message ............................ 190 Important safety notes .................... 66
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 146 Indicator lamp ................................ 203
PARKTRONIC ................................. 151 Manual retraction ............................ 67
Driving tips Obstacle detection ........................... 67
Automatic transmission ................. 126 Electrical system
Brakes ........................................... 135 Battery main switch ....................... 118
Break-in period .............................. 118 Electronic brake force distribution
Downhill gradient ........................... 135 see EBD (electronic brake force
Drinking and driving ....................... 133 distribution)
Driving abroad ............................... 134 Electronic Stability Program
Driving in winter ............................. 137 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Driving on flooded roads ................ 136 Electronic Traction System
Driving on wet roads ...................... 136 see 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Exhaust check ............................... 134 Emergency exit .................................... 55
Fuel ................................................ 133 Emergency exit window ..................... 55
General .......................................... 133 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Hydroplaning ................................. 136 Activation ......................................... 45
Icy road surfaces ........................... 137 Emissions control
Important safety notes .................. 118 Service and warranty information .... 22
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Engine
ted roads ....................................... 136 ADR (working speed governor) ...... 154
New brake disks ............................ 136 Changing the power output ............. 26
New brake pads/linings ................ 136 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 200
Off-road driving .............................. 137 Cleaning instructions ..................... 234
Overrun cut-off .............................. 133 Engine number ............................... 277
Snow chains .................................. 249 Engine speed setting (working
Speed limitation ............................. 134 mode) ............................................ 155
Towing a trailer .............................. 155 Irregular running ............................ 123
Transport by rail ............................. 135 Jump-starting ................................. 242
Wet road surface ........................... 136 Operating safety .............................. 26
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 149 Starting .......................................... 120
Starting problems .......................... 123
E Switching off .................................. 132
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 246
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Engine electronics
bution)
Notes ............................................. 275
Display message ............................ 183
Problem (malfunction) ................... 123
Function/notes ................................ 54
Engine oil
Indicator lamps .............................. 195
Adding ........................................... 222
Electrical closing assist ...................... 66
Additives ........................................ 281
10 Index
Checking the oil level (on-board Flat tire

computer) ...................................... 220 Changing a wheel/mounting the
Checking the oil level using the spare wheel ................................... 267
dipstick .......................................... 221 General notes ................................ 266
Display message ............................ 190 Fog lamps
Filling capacity ............................... 282 Switching on/off .............................. 80
Information about oil consump- Fogged-up windows
tion ................................................ 282 see Climate control
Mixing ............................................ 281 Folding seat ......................................... 74
Notes about oil grades ................... 280 Frequencies
Oil change ...................................... 282 Mobile phone ................................. 275
Oil level (note) ............................... 220 Two-way radio ................................ 275
Viscosity ........................................ 281 Front fog lamps
Warning lamp ................................. 198 Switching on/off .............................. 80
Engine speed setting (working Front interior light
mode) ................................................. 154 Replacing bulbs ............................... 92
Engine, jump-starting ....................... 242 Front windshield
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- see Windshield
gram) Fuel
Display message ............................ 184 Additives (diesel) ........................... 279
Important safety information ........... 54 Consumption information .............. 279
Indicator lamp ................................ 197 Consumption statistics .................. 174
Warning lamp ................................. 194 Diesel at very low outside temper-
Exhaust check ................................... 134 atures ............................................ 278
Exhaust gas aftertreatment Display message ............................ 189
DEF level indicator ......................... 162 Driving tips .................................... 133
DEF reducing agent ....................... 279 Fuel gauge ..................................... 162
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 279 Problem (malfunction) ................... 129
Display messages (vehicles with Quality (diesel) ............................... 278
steering wheel buttons) ................. 187 Refueling ........................................ 127
Display messages (vehicles with- Showing the range (on-board
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 178 computer with steering wheel but-
Indicator lamp ....................... 197, 201 tons) .............................................. 174
Malfunction .................................... 188 Showing the range (vehicles with
Refilling DEF .................................. 129 steering wheel buttons) ................. 174
Exterior lighting Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 278
see Lights Fuel filter with water separator
Exterior mirrors draining ......................................... 224
Adjusting ......................................... 78 Indicator lamp ................................ 202
Important safety notes .................... 78 Fuel gauge ......................................... 162
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 205 Fuel tank
F Fuel tank content
Reserve, display message .............. 189
Fire extinguisher ............................... 242 Fuses .................................................. 246
First-aid kit ......................................... 241
Index 11
G Immobilizer .......................................... 56
Indicator lamp
Gasoline
see Warning and indicator lamps
Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 200 Indicators
General driving tips
see Turn signals
Driving short distances .................. 134 Insect protection on the radiator ...... 28
Genuine parts ...................................... 28 Installing a wheel
Glove box ........................................... 204 Installing the adapter (spare
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini- wheel) ............................................ 269
tion) .................................................... 264 Instrument cluster
Fuel gage ....................................... 162
H Important safety notes .................. 161
Handbrake Instrument cluster lighting ............. 162
see Parking brake Outside temperature display .......... 162
Hazard warning lamps ........................ 82 Overview .......................................... 32
Head restraints Speedometer ................................. 162
Adjusting ......................................... 76 Tachometer ................................... 162
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 76 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 33
Headlamps Instrument cluster lighting .............. 162
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 224 Instrument lighting
Cleaning system (function) .............. 82 see Instrument cluster lighting
Fogging up ....................................... 83 Interior lighting ................................... 84
see Automatic headlamp mode Front ................................................ 84
Headliner (cleaning instructions) .... 238 Motion detectors ............................. 85
Heating Notes on replacing bulbs ................. 92
see Climate control Overview .......................................... 84
High-beam headlamps Replacing bulbs ............................... 92
Highbeam Assist .............................. 83 Switching the rear compartment
Replacing bulbs ............................... 87 lighting on centrally ......................... 84
Switching on/off .............................. 81 Interior motion sensor
Highbeam Assist Arming ............................................. 57
Function/notes ................................ 83 Deactivating ..................................... 58
Switching Highbeam Assist on/ Function ........................................... 57
off .................................................. 171 Switching off .................................... 57
Hood
Closing ........................................... 219 J
Display message ............................ 192 Jack
Important safety notes .................. 218 Jacking points ................................ 268
Indicator lamp ................................ 203 Preparation .................................... 268
Opening ......................................... 218 Storage location ............................ 240
Hot-water auxiliary heater Using ............................................. 268
Problem (malfunction) ................... 113 Jump-starting ..................................... 242
Hydroplaning ..................................... 136
K
I
Key
Ignition lock Position in the ignition lock ............ 119
see Key positions
12 Index
Key positions ..................................... 119 Setting the exterior lighting

Kickdown ........................................... 126 delayed switch-off (vehicles with
steering wheel buttons) ................. 172
L Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 79
Lamps Turn signals ..................................... 81
see Warning and indicator lamps see Changing a bulb
Lane Keeping Assist see Interior lighting
Activating/deactivating ................. 147 Limited Warranty ................................ 22
Function/notes ............................. 146 Load distribution ............................... 214
Language
Load securing aids
Display (vehicles with steering
Carrier systems ............................. 216
wheel buttons) ............................... 170 Loading guidelines
Lashing points and tie downs
Permissible tensile load ................. 285 Loading rails
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Installing cargo tie-down rings ....... 216
anchors ................................................ 49
Maximum tensile strength ............. 285
License plate lamp Loads
Replacing bulbs ............................... 90 Securing ........................................ 214
License plate lamp (Chassis Cab)
Transporting .................................. 212
Replacing bulbs ............................... 90 Locator lighting
Light sensor ......................................... 80 Setting (vehicles with steering
Lighting wheel buttons) ............................... 172
see Lights Locking
Lights see Central locking
Activating/deactivating daytime Locking and unlocking manually ....... 64
running lamps (on-board com- Locking centrally
puter with steering wheel but- see Central locking
tons) .............................................. 171 LOW RANGE ....................................... 148
Activating/deactivating surround
LOW RANGE transmission ratio ....... 148
lighting (vehicles with steering
Low-beam headlamps
wheel buttons) ............................... 172
Display message ............................ 185
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 80
Driving abroad ............................... 135
Bulb failure indicator ........................ 79
Replacing bulbs ............................... 87
Cornering light function ................... 82
Switching on/off .............................. 79
Driving abroad ............................... 135
Lumbar support ................................... 73
Fog lamps ........................................ 80
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 82
Headlamp range .............................. 81 M
High beam flasher ............................ 81 M+S tires ............................................ 249
High-beam headlamps ..................... 81 Maintenance ...................................... 225
Highbeam Assist .............................. 83 Malfunctions
Important safety notes .................... 79 Message memory (on-board com-
Light switch ..................................... 79 puter) ............................................. 176
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 79 Maximum speed
Parking lamps .................................. 79 Speed limitation ............................. 134
Rear fog lamp .................................. 80
Index 13
Menu (vehicles with steering Odometer

wheel buttons) Display (vehicles with steering
Audio ............................................. 167 wheel buttons) ............................... 167
Operation ....................................... 166 Display (vehicles without steering
Settings ......................................... 168 wheel buttons) ............................... 163
Telephone ...................................... 175 Off-road driving
Message Checklist after driving off-road ...... 139
see Display message Important safety notes .................. 137
Message memory (on-board com- Rules for driving off-road ............... 139
puter) .................................................. 176 Oil
Mirrors see Engine oil
Exterior mirrors ................................ 78 On-board computer
Rear-view mirror .............................. 78 Checking the oil level ..................... 220
Mobile navigation devices ................ 211 Display message ............................ 176
Mobile phone ..................................... 211 Lighting submenu .......................... 171
Important safety notes .................. 210 On-board computer (vehicles with
Pre-installation ............................... 210 steering wheel buttons)
Type approval/frequency .............. 275 Audio menu ................................... 167
Mounting wheels Display message ............................ 164
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 271 Menu overview .............................. 166
Mounting a new wheel ................... 270 Operating ....................................... 164
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 267 Operation menu ............................. 166
Raising the vehicle ......................... 268 Settings menu ............................... 168
Removing a wheel .......................... 269 Standard display ............................ 167
Removing and mounting the spare Telephone menu ............................ 175
wheel ............................................. 273 Trip computer menu ...................... 174
Securing the vehicle against roll- On-board computer (vehicles with-
ing away ........................................ 267 out steering wheel buttons)
Display message ............................ 176
N General notes ................................ 163
Setting the clock ............................ 164
Navigation Standard display ............................ 163
Fittings for PND mobile navigation Operating Instructions
devices .......................................... 211 Before the first journey .................... 22
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Limited Warranty ............................. 22
cle ....................................................... 118 Operating safety
Limited Warranty ............................. 22
O Operating safety and vehicle
Occupant safety approval
Children in the vehicle ..................... 47 Attachments and bodies .................. 27
Important safety notes .................... 39 Changing the engine power out-
Introduction to the restraint sys- put ................................................... 26
tem .................................................. 39 Correct use ...................................... 24
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 52 Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 39 Equipment and conversions ............. 27
Information about body/equip-
ment mounting directives ................ 27
14 Index
Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 25 Passenger compartment air-condi-

Qualified specialist workshop .......... 26 tioning system
Registering your vehicle ................... 27 see Climate control
Operating system Passenger compartment heating
see On-board computer see Climate control
Operator's Manual Perimeter lamp
General notes .................................. 22 Replacing bulbs ............................... 90
Vehicle equipment ........................... 22 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 52
Outline lamp Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
Replacing bulbs ............................... 91 tions) .................................................. 238
Outside temperature display ........... 162 Power assistance for the steering
Overhead control panel ...................... 36 Display message ............................ 192
Overrevving range ............................. 162 Warning lamp ................................. 203
Overrun cutoff ................................... 133 Power supply
Battery isolating switch ................. 118
P Switching off .................................. 119
Switching on .................................. 119
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 235 Power take-off
Paper holder ...................................... 207 Engine speed setting ..................... 154
Parking ............................................... 130 Power washers .................................. 234
Important safety notes .................. 130 Power windows
Parking brake ................................ 131 see Side windows
Wheel chock .................................. 132 Preparing for a journey
see PARKTRONIC Checks in the vehicle ..................... 120
Parking aid Visual check of the vehicle exte-
see PARKTRONIC rior ................................................. 120
Parking assistance Protection of the environment
see PARKTRONIC General notes .................................. 24
Parking brake Pulling away ...................................... 121
Display message ............................ 184
Notes/function .............................. 131 Q
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs ............................... 87 QR code
PARKTRONIC Rescue card ..................................... 29
Deactivating/activating ................. 153 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
Driving system ............................... 151
Function/notes ............................. 151 R
Radiator cover ..................................... 28
Radio
Range of the sensors ..................... 151
Changing stations (vehicles with
Roll-back warning .......................... 153
Trailer towing ................................. 153
see separate operating instructions
Warning display ............................. 152
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
Partition sliding door
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Opening/closing .............................. 70
Index 15
Rain and light sensor Important safety notes (Diesel

Setting the sensitivity (vehicles Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 129
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 173 Refilling procedure (Diesel
Windshield wiper .............................. 93 Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 129
Range (vehicles with steering Refrigerant ......................................... 284
wheel buttons) .................................. 174 Refueling
Rear bench seat Fuel filler flap ................................. 128
Installing/removing (Passenger Fuel gauge ..................................... 162
Van) ................................................. 75 Important safety notes (fuel) ......... 127
Stowage compartment (crewcab) .. 207 Refueling procedure (fuel) ............. 128
Rear compartment see Fuel
Activating/deactivating climate Releasing the parking lock man-
control ........................................... 101 ually (automatic transmission) ........ 127
Setting the air vents ...................... 106 Remote control
Rear door Changing the operating duration
Child-proof locks .............................. 52 (auxiliary heating) .......................... 110
Important safety notes .................... 68 Replacing the battery (auxiliary
Opening/closing .............................. 68 heating ) ........................................ 111
Opening/closing from inside ........... 69 Switching on/off (auxiliary heat-
Rear fog lamp ing) ................................................ 110
Replacing bulbs ............................... 89 Synchronizing (auxiliary heating) ... 110
Switching on/off .............................. 80 Replacing bulbs
Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) Important safety notes .................... 86
Replacing bulbs ............................... 90 Replacing the battery (auxiliary
Rear interior light heating remote control) .................... 111
Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 Replacing the fuel filter .................... 202
Rear lamps Reporting safety defects .................... 27
see Lights Rescue card ......................................... 29
Rear rack Restraint system
Notes ............................................. 216 Introduction ..................................... 39
Rear view camera Warning lamp (function) .......... 39, 198
Cleaning instructions ..................... 236 Reverse warning feature .................. 122
Important safety notes .................. 154 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23
Switching on .................................. 154 Roof carrier
Rear window defroster Maximum payload .......................... 286
Problem (malfunction) ................... 104 Notes ............................................. 216
Switching on/off ........................... 104 Roof load (roof carrier) ..................... 286
Rear window wiper ............................. 94
Switching on/off .............................. 94 S
Rear-compartment air-condition-
ing system Safety
see Climate control Children in the vehicle ..................... 47
Rear-compartment heating Operating safety .............................. 25
see Climate control Safety system
Rear-view mirror see Driving safety systems
Anti-glare mode ............................... 78 Seat belts
Refilling Adjusting the height ......................... 42
DEF filler neck ............................... 129 Cleaning ......................................... 238
16 Index
Correct usage .................................. 41 Setting the air distribution ............... 102

Display message ............................ 184 Setting the airflow ............................ 102
Fastening ......................................... 42 Setting the clock
Important safety guidelines ............. 40 Vehicles with steering wheel but-
Introduction ..................................... 40 tons ............................................... 171
Releasing ......................................... 42 Vehicles without steering wheel
Warning lamp ................................. 203 buttons .......................................... 164
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Settings
Seat heating ......................................... 76 Resetting all (vehicles with steer-
Seats ing wheel buttons) ......................... 168
Adjusting lumbar support ................ 73 Resetting submenus (vehicles
Adjusting the front-passenger with steering wheel buttons) ......... 168
seat .................................................. 73 Short journeys (diesel particle fil-
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 76 ter) ...................................................... 134
Armrest ............................................ 76 Side impact air bag ............................. 45
Cleaning the cover ......................... 238 Side windows
Correct driver's seat position ........... 72 Cleaning ......................................... 235
Folding seat ..................................... 74 Hinged side windows ....................... 70
Important safety notes .................... 72 Important safety information ........... 70
Rear bench seat ............................... 75 Opening/closing .............................. 71
Seat heating .................................... 76 Overview .......................................... 70
Setting the driver's seat ................... 73 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 71
Swivel seat ....................................... 73 Resetting ......................................... 71
Twin front-passenger seat ................ 74 Sliding door
Securing loads Cleaning ......................................... 237
Important safety notes .................. 214 Closing assist ................................... 66
Selector lever Important safety notes .................... 65
Cleaning ......................................... 238 Opening/closing .............................. 65
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 236 Opening/closing from the inside ..... 66
Service center Opening/closing from the out-
see Qualified specialist workshop side .................................................. 66
Service interval display SmartKey
Calling up the service due date ...... 226 Changing the battery ....................... 61
Exceeding a service due date ........ 226 Changing the locking system set-
Notes ............................................. 226 tings ............................................... 173
Service due date (automatic dis- Checking the battery ....................... 61
play) ............................................... 226 Display message ............................ 193
Service products Door central locking/unlocking ....... 59
Brake fluid ..................................... 283 Important safety notes .................... 59
Coolant (engine) ............................ 283 Loss ................................................. 63
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 279 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 63
Engine oil ....................................... 280 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 119
Fuel ................................................ 277 Snow chains ...................................... 249
Important safety notes .................. 277 Sockets .............................................. 210
Power steering fluid ....................... 283 Spare wheel
Refrigerant ..................................... 284 General notes ................................ 273
Transmission oil ............................. 282 Important safety notes .................. 272
Washer fluid ................................... 284
Index 17
Removing/mounting ...................... 273 Stowage space under the rear

Special seat belt retractor .................. 48 bench seat ..................................... 207
Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Stowage space under the twin co-
Speed, controlling driver's seat ................................... 206
see Cruise control Summer tires ..................................... 249
Speedometer Switch unit
Digital (vehicles with steering see Control panel
wheel buttons) ............................... 170 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 56
Digital (vehicles without steering Switching the heater booster func-
wheel buttons) ............................... 163 tion on/off ......................................... 111
Selecting display unit (vehicles Switching the surround lighting
with steering- wheel buttons) ........ 170 on/off (on-board computer) ............. 172
see Instrument cluster Swivel seat ........................................... 73
Standing lamps
Replacing bulbs ............................... 87 T
Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 89
Standing lamps (Chassis Cab) Tachometer ........................................ 162
Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 90 Tail lamps
Start-off assist Changing ......................................... 90
Display message ............................ 182 Replacing bulbs ............................... 89
Starting (engine) ................................ 120 see Lights
Station Tail lamps (Chassis Cab)
see Radio Replacing bulbs ............................... 90
Steering wheel Tank content
Adjusting ......................................... 77 Fuel gauge ..................................... 162
Button overview ............................... 35 Range (vehicles with steering
Cleaning ......................................... 238 wheel buttons) ............................... 174
Step Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 200
see Electrical step Technical data
Stickers Capacities ...................................... 277
General safety notes ........................ 24 Cargo tie-down points .................... 285
Stowage spaces Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 285
see Stowage spaces and stowage Loading rails .................................. 285
compartments Roof carrier .................................... 286
Stowage spaces and stowage com- Tires/wheels ......................... 257, 272
partments Trailer tow hitch ............................. 286
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 205 Vehicle data ................................... 285
Glove box ....................................... 204 Telephone .................................. 210, 211
Important safety notes .................. 204 Telephone (on-board computer)
Paper holder .................................. 207 Accepting an incoming call ............ 175
Stowage compartment above the Display messages .......................... 193
windshield ..................................... 206 Numbers from the phone book ...... 175
Stowage compartment in the cen- Operating ....................................... 175
ter console ..................................... 206 Redialing ........................................ 176
Stowage compartment in the Rejecting or ending a call .............. 175
dashboard ...................................... 205 Temperature
Stowage space above the head- Outside temperature ...................... 162
liner ............................................... 206 Setting (climate control) ................ 102
18 Index
Setting the unit (vehicles with Tires

steering wheel buttons) ................. 169 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 265
Theft deterrent systems Average weight of the vehicle
Immobilizer ...................................... 56 occupants (definition) .................... 264
Tow-away alarm ............................... 57 Bar (definition) ............................... 264
Tightening torques for wheel nuts/ Changing a wheel .......................... 266
wheel bolts ........................................ 271 Characteristics .............................. 264
Time Checking ........................................ 248
Setting the time (vehicles with Curb weight (definition) ................. 265
steering wheel buttons) ................. 171 Definition of terms ......................... 264
Setting the time (vehicles without Direction of rotation ...................... 267
steering wheel buttons) ................. 164 Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Timer pants (definition) ............................ 266
Activating ....................................... 115 DOT (Department of Transporta-
Auxiliary heating ............................ 114 tion) (definition) ............................. 264
Important safety notes .................. 114 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Overview ........................................ 114 (TIN) ............................................... 263
Setting the heating level (auxiliary GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
heating) ......................................... 116 (definition) ..................................... 264
Setting the preselection time GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-
(auxiliary heating) .......................... 115 nition) ............................................ 264
Setting weekday, time and oper- GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
ating duration (auxiliary heating) ... 115 inition) ........................................... 264
Switching immediate heating GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
mode on/off (auxiliary heating) ..... 115 ing) (definition) .............................. 265
Tire pressure Important safety notes .................. 247
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 253 Increased vehicle weight due to
Checking manually ........................ 253 optional equipment (definition) ...... 264
Display messages (vehicles with Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 265
steering wheel buttons) ................. 191 Labeling (overview) ........................ 261
Display messages (vehicles with- Load bearing index (definition) ...... 266
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 178 Load index ..................................... 263
Maximum ....................................... 252 Load index (definition) ................... 265
Notes ............................................. 251 M+S tires ....................................... 249
Recommended ............................... 250 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
Setting the unit (vehicles with tion) ............................................... 265
steering wheel buttons) ................. 170 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Tire label ........................................ 251 (definition) ..................................... 265
Tire pressure loss warning system .. 255 Maximum permissible tire pres-
Tire pressure monitor sure (definition) ............................. 265
Checking the tire pressure elec- Maximum tire load ......................... 263
tronically ........................................ 254 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 265
Display message ............................ 191 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Function/notes ............................. 253 nition) ............................................ 265
Indicator lamp ................................ 202 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Restarting ...................................... 255 inition) ........................................... 265
Warning lamp ................................. 255 Replacing ....................................... 266
Tire pressure table ............................ 257 Service life ..................................... 248
Index 19
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 265 Trailer loads ................................... 287

Snow chains .................................. 249 Towing away
Speed rating (definition) ................ 264 Important safety guidelines ........... 243
Storing ........................................... 267 In the event of malfunctions .......... 244
Structure and characteristics With both axles on the ground ....... 245
(definition) ..................................... 264 Trailer
Summer tires ................................. 249 Brake force booster malfunction ... 195
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Trailer coupling
(definition) ..................................... 265 see Towing a trailer
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 265 Trailer loads and drawbar nose-
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 265 weights ............................................... 159
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 264 Trailer towing
Tire size (data) ....................... 257, 272 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 146
Tire size designation, load-bearing PARKTRONIC ................................. 153
capacity, speed rating .................... 261 Permissible trailer loads and
Tire tread ....................................... 248 drawbar noseweights ..................... 159
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 265 Transmission
Total load limit (definition) ............. 266 see Automatic transmission
Traction (definition) ....................... 266 Transmission oil ................................ 282
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar Transport
noseweight) (definition) ................. 266 Loading guidelines ......................... 212
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Vehicle ........................................... 246
Standards (definition) .................... 264 Transport by rail ................................ 135
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 266 Transportation
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 264 Rail ................................................ 135
Top Tether ............................................ 50 Transporting
Touchshift (automatic transmis- Load distribution ............................ 214
sion) .................................................... 125 Securing a load .............................. 214
Tow-away alarm Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Arming/deactivating ........................ 57 tions) .................................................. 238
Deactivating ..................................... 57 Trip computer (on-board com-
Operation ......................................... 57 puter) .................................................. 174
Tow-starting Trip meter
Emergency engine starting ............ 246 see Trip odometer
Important safety notes .................. 243 Trip odometer
Towing Display (vehicles with steering
If the vehicle is stuck ..................... 245 wheel buttons) ............................... 167
Installing/removing the towing Display (vehicles without steering
eye ................................................. 244 wheel buttons) ............................... 163
With a raised front or rear axle ...... 245 Resetting ....................................... 162
Towing a trailer see Trip computer (on-board computer)
Axle load, permissible .................... 287 Turn signals
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 237 Replacing bulbs (front) ..................... 88
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 157 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 89
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 159 Switching on/off .............................. 81
Driving tips .................................... 155 Turn signals (Chassis Cab)
Important safety notes .................. 155 Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 90
Notes on retrofitting ...................... 286
20 Index
Twin front-passenger seat Vents

Stowage compartment .................. 206 see Air vents
Two-way radios Voltage supply
Type approval/frequency .............. 275 Fuses ............................................. 246
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-
nition) ................................................. 266 W
Warning
U
Stickers ........................................... 24
Unlocking Warning and indicator lamp
From inside the vehicle (central Diesel particle filter ....................... 201
unlocking button) ............................. 64 Power assistance for the steering .. 203
USB port ............................................. 211 Warning and indicator lamps
Brakes ........................................... 195
V Check Engine ................................. 200
Coolant .......................................... 199
Vehicle Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 197
Data acquisition ............................... 29 Electrical step ................................ 203
Display message ............................ 192
ESP® .............................................. 194
Electronics ..................................... 275
ESP® function ................................ 197
Equipment ....................................... 22
Overview .......................................... 33
Individual settings (vehicles with
Seat belt ........................................ 203
Warning lamp .................................... 241
Limited Warranty ............................. 22
Loading .......................................... 258 Warning triangle ................................ 241
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 59 Warning- and indicator lamps
Lowering ........................................ 271 ABS ................................................ 195
Maintenance .................................... 23 Air filter .......................................... 201
Operating safety .............................. 25 ASR ................................................ 194
Parking for a long period ................ 132 BAS ................................................ 195
Pulling away ................................... 121 Battery charge ............................... 198
Raising ........................................... 268 Brake wear .................................... 198
Registration ..................................... 27 Bulbs .............................................. 203
Reporting problems ......................... 27 Doors ............................................. 203
Securing from rolling away ............ 130 Engine oil level ............................... 198
Towing away .................................. 243 Preglow .......................................... 201
Transporting .................................. 246 Reserve fuel ................................... 200
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 59 Tire pressure monitor .................... 202
Vehicle battery Water separator ............................. 202
see Battery (vehicle) Windshield washer fluid ................. 202
Vehicle bodies ..................................... 27 Warranty .............................................. 22
Body/equipment mounting direc- Washer fluid
tives for trucks ................................. 27 Adding ........................................... 224
Vehicle data ....................................... 285 Capacities ...................................... 285
Vehicle identification number .......... 276 Display message ............................ 193
Indicator lamp ................................ 202
Vehicle identification plate .............. 276
Notes ............................................. 284
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 240
Wiping with ...................................... 93
Index 21
Wheels Winter tires

Changing a wheel .......................... 266 M+S tires ....................................... 249
Checking ........................................ 248 Setting a limit speed ...................... 134
Cleaning ......................................... 235 Wiper blades
Important safety notes .................. 247 Cleaning ......................................... 235
Installing the adapter (spare Replacing ......................................... 94
wheel) ............................................ 269 Workshop
Interchanging/changing ................ 266 see Qualified specialist workshop
Mounting a new wheel ................... 270
Mounting a wheel .......................... 267
Removing a wheel .......................... 269
Removing and mounting the spare
wheel ............................................. 273
Snow chains .................................. 249
Storing ........................................... 267
Tightening torque ........................... 271
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 272
Window curtain air bag ....................... 45
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Cleaning ......................................... 235
Defrosting ...................................... 103
Windshield heating
Switching on/off ........................... 104
Windshield washer fluid
Adding ........................................... 224
Indicator lamp ................................ 202
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96
Rain and light sensor ....................... 93
Rear window wiper .......................... 94
Replacing the wiper blades .............. 94
Setting the sensitivity (vehicles
with steering wheel buttons and
rain/light sensor) ........................... 173
Switching on/off .............................. 93
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid ................................................. 93
Winter diesel ..................................... 278
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 137
Snow chains .................................. 249
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 249
Radiator cover ................................. 28
22 Introduction
Operator's Manual Service and vehicle operation

Before the first journey Warranty
These instructions, the Maintenance or Service The Limited Warranty for your vehicle is in
Booklet and the additional equipment-specific accordance with the warranty terms in the Ser-
instructions are integral parts of the vehicle. vice and Warranty Information booklet.
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all Your authorized Sprinter dealer will replace and
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass on all repair all factory-installed parts in accordance
documents to the new owner. with the terms of the following warranties:
Before you first drive off, read these documents RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehi-
RExhaust System Warranty
cle.
REmission Systems Warranty
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,
follow the instructions and warning notices in RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
these Operating Instructions. Failure to observe setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
the instructions may lead to damage to the vehi- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
cle or personal injury. ranty
Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observe RState Warranty Enforcement Laws ("Lemon
the instructions is not covered by the New Vehi- Laws")
cle Limited Warranty. Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
Warranties. You can obtain these from any
Limited warranty authorized Sprinter dealer.
! Follow the instructions in this Operator's i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Manual about the proper operation of your Information booklet, contact an authorized
vehicle as well as about possible vehicle dam- Sprinter dealer for a replacement. The new
age. Damage to your vehicle that arises from Service and Warranty Information booklet will
culpable contravention of these instructions be posted to you.
is not covered by the Limited Warranty of the
distributor named on the inside of the front
cover. Customer information for California
In California you are entitled to demand that
your vehicle be exchanged or that the purchase
Vehicle equipment or leasing price be refunded if Mercedes-Benz
The Operating Instructions describe all models USA, LLC and/or authorized workshops or ser-
and standard and optional equipment of your vice centers are not able, after several justifiable
vehicle that were available at the time of going repairs, to rectify major damage to or malfunc-
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- tions of the vehicle as covered by the contrac-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped tual warranty provisions. Customers who pur-
with all of the described functions. This also chase or lease a vehicle can have the vehicle
applies to systems and functions relevant to repaired within a period of 18 months after
safety. The equipment in your vehicle may there- delivery or after a mileage of up to 29,000 km
fore differ from that shown in the descriptions (equals approx. 18,000 miles), whichever
and illustrations. comes first, if:
The original purchase contract documentation (1) the same serious defect or damage which
for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys- could lead to fatal or serious injuries to the
tems in your vehicle. occupants of the vehicle during driving has
If you have questions about equipment and been repaired at least twice and Mercedes-
operation, consult any authorized Sprinter Benz, LLC has been informed in writing of
Dealer. the necessity of such a repair.
(2) the same defect or damage, although less
serious than described in (1), has been
Introduction 23
repaired at least four times and Mercedes- 1-800-387-0100. This enables us, if necessary,
Benz has been informed of the necessity of to contact you at any time.
such a repair in writing. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all the
(3) the vehicle cannot be operated for more literature in the vehicle so that it is available for
than 30 calendar days due to repairs result- the next owner.
ing from the same or other major defects or If your vehicle was purchased as a used vehicle,
damage. please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used
Please send written notification to: Car" from the Service and Warranty Information
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC booklet or phone the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) on hotline number
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
One Mercedes Drive Customer Service (Canada) on
Montreal, N 07645-0350 1-800-387-0100.
Maintenance Operating the vehicle outside of the

USA and Canada
The Service and Warranty Information booklet
describes all the necessary maintenance work When traveling abroad with your vehicle,
which should be performed at regular intervals. observe the following points:
Always bring the Service and Warranty Informa- RService facilities or replacement parts may
tion booklet with you when taking the vehicle to not be available immediately.
an authorized Sprinter dealer. Your customer RUnleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
service advisor enters each service into the Ser-
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
vice and Warranty Information booklet for you.
can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
Roadside Assistance engine damage.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available in
gram provides you with technical assistance in Europe through our European Delivery Program.
the case of a breakdown. Your toll-free calls to Please consult an authorized Sprinter dealer for
the Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered further information, or write to one of the fol-
by our staff around the clock. 365 days a year. lowing addresses:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) In the USA
(USA) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) European Delivery Department
Further information can be found in the One Mercedes Drive
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance-Program Montreal, N 07645-0350
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section of the Service and Warranty Information In Canada
booklet (Canada). Both are located in your vehi- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
cle document wallet. European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Change of address or owner
Please use the " Notice of Change of Address"
form in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet to inform us of a change of address, or
simply phone the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) on hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) on
24 Introduction
Proper use Do not store or transport any substances in

the vehicle interior which are hazardous to
Observe the following information when oper- health or react aggressively.
ating your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc- These instructions must also be observed for
tions vehicles where the cargo compartment is not
Rthe technical data in these Operating Instruc-
fully separated from the driver's cab.
tions Partition with door/window: always keep the
Rtraffic laws and regulations
door/window in the partition closed during
transport.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Examples of substances that are hazardous to
There are various warning stickers affixed to the health and/or react aggressively:
vehicle. If you remove warning stickers, you and
RSolvents
others may fail to recognize the dangers. Leave
the warning stickers in their original position. RFuel
ROil and grease
G WARNING
RCleaning agents
Modifications to electronic components, their RAcids
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems Protection of the environment
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten- Economic and environmentally aware
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of driving
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
tronic components or their software. You hensive environmental protection.
should have all work to electrical and elec- The objectives are for the natural resources
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified that form the basis of our existence on this
specialist workshop. planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
The general operating permit for your vehicle and humanity into account.
could be rendered invalid if you carry out mod- You too can help to protect the environment
ifications to electronic components, their soft-
ware as well as wiring. by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
G WARNING Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
Gases and fluids from substances that con- transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
stitute a health hazard or react aggressively by these factors:
can escape even from securely closed con-
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
tainers. When transporting such substances
Ryour personal driving style
in the vehicle interior, your ability to concen-
trate or your health could be affected during You can influence both factors. You should
the journey. Malfunctions, short circuits or bear the following in mind:
electrical component system failures may
also result. There is a risk of an accident and
fire.
Introduction 25
Operating conditions: Operating safety and vehicle approval

Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- Important safety notes
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures G WARNING
are correct. If you do not have the prescribed service/
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. maintenance work or any required repairs
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
to environmental protection. You should
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
qualified specialist workshop. Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
Personal driving style: which may require special handling and regard
for the environment. The guidelines must be
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when observed during disposal.
starting the engine. In California, you can find more information on
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle the Internet at www.dtsc.ca.gov.
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
Notes on operating the vehicle
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
braking. Rthe vehicle makes contact with the ground,
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear e.g. on a high curb or a loose road surface
Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. a
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
curb or a pothole
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Ra heavy object hits the underbody or chassis
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- component
tion. In these or similar situations, the vehicle body/
frame, the underbody, chassis components,
wheels or tires could be damaged even if this is
Environmental issues and recommen- not visible from the outside. Components that
have been damaged in this way can unexpect-
dations edly fail or no longer be able to assimilate the
When prompted by this Operator's Manual to loads occurring in the event of an accident. If the
dispose of materials, please try to regenerate underbody paneling is damaged, flammable
and recycle these materials. Observe all rele- material, such as leaves, grass or twigs, could
vant environmental guidelines and regulations collect between the underbody and underbody
when disposing of materials. This helps to pro- paneling. These materials could ignite if they
tect the environment. remain in contact with hot components of the
exhaust system for an extended period.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
Z
26 Introduction
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In tics connection in the vehicle.
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a Changing the engine power output
qualified specialist workshop.
! Increases in engine power can:
Have the vehicle checked and repaired immedi- Rchange the emission values
ately at a qualified specialist workshop. If you Rcause malfunctions
become aware when continuing the journey that
Rcause consequential damage
driving safety has been effected, stop as soon as
possible in accordance with the traffic condi- The operating reliability of the engine is not
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified special- guaranteed in all cases.
ist workshop. Any tampering with the engine management
system in order to increase the engine power
output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle
Declaration of conformity Limited Warranty and other warranty entitle-
ments.
Radio-based vehicle components If you sell the vehicle, inform the purchaser
about the changes to the engine power output of
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- the vehicle. If you do not inform the buyer, this
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is may constitute a punishable offense under
subject to the following two conditions: 1) These national legislation.
devices may not cause harmful interference. 2.
This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications Qualified specialist workshops
not expressly approved by the party responsible An authorized Sprinter Dealer is a qualified spe-
for compliance could void the user’s authority to cialist workshop.
operate the equipment."
A qualified specialist workshop has the neces-
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica-
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt tions to correctly carry out the work required on
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- the vehicle.
lowing two conditions: 1) These devices may not
cause interference, and 2) these devices must This is especially the case for work relevant to
accept any interference received, including safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance or
interference that may cause undesired opera- Service Booklet.
tion of the device". The following work should always be carried out
at qualified specialist workshop:
Rwork relevant to safety
Diagnostics connection Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Rmodifications as well as installations and
qualified specialist workshop. alterations
Rwork on electronic components
G WARNING
For this reason, we recommend an authorized
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics Sprinter Dealer.
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
! Only have work carried out on the engine
electronics and its associated parts, such as
the operating safety of the vehicle could be control units, sensors, actuating components
affected. There is a risk of an accident. and connector leads, at a qualified specialist
workshop. Vehicle components may other-
Introduction 27
wise wear more quickly and the vehicle's NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
operating permit may be invalidated. DC 20590.
You can find more information on vehicle safety
at:
Problems with your vehicle http://www.safercar.gov
If you experience problems with your vehicle,
particularly problems which could jeopardize
vehicle safety, consult an authorized Sprinter Registering your vehicle
dealer to have the problems diagnosed and rec- Mercedes-Benz may ask its authorized Sprinter
tified. If the problem is not resolved to your sat- dealers to carry out technical inspections on
isfaction, consult an authorized Sprinter dealer certain vehicles. This is always the case if the
again or write to one of the following addresses. quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a
In the USA result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can
Customer Assistance Center only inform you about vehicle checks if it has
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC your registration data.
One Mercedes Drive Your registration data is not stored if:
Montreal, N 07645-0350 Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at an
In Canada authorized Sprinter Dealer
Customer Relations Department Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at an
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. authorized Sprinter Dealer

98 Vanderhoof Avenue It is advisable to register your vehicle with an
authorized Sprinter Dealer. Inform an author-
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 ized Sprinter dealer as soon as possible about
any change of address or vehicle ownership.
Reporting malfunctions relevant to

safety Attachments, bodies, equipment and
USA only: conversions
The following text is published as required of all Information about body/equipment
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the mounting directives
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of ! For safety reasons, have add-on equipment
1966". manufactured and installed according to the
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Sprinter body/equipment mounting direc-
which could cause a crash or could cause injury tives in force. These body/equipment mount-
or death, you should immediately inform the ing directives ensure that the chassis and the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration body form one unit and that maximum oper-
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz ating and road safety is achieved.
USA, LL. We recommend for safety reasons that:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
Ryou carry out no other modifications to the
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order vehicle.
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Ryou obtain the agreement of the distributor
cannot become involved in individual problems named on the inside of the front cover for
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz any deviations from the approved body/
USA, LL. equipment mounting directives.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Approval from certified inspection agencies
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or official approvals cannot rule out risks to
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// your safety.
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, Please observe the information concerning
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (Y page 28).
Z
28 Introduction
Further information can be obtained at any Notes on the radiator

authorized Sprinter Dealer.
Even seemingly small changes to the vehicle,
G WARNING such as attaching a radiator trim for winter driv-
The function of systems or components can ing, is not permitted. Do not cover up the radi-
ator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protection
be affected by conversions or modifications
covers or anything similar.
to the vehicle. They might not function prop-
Otherwise, the values of the diagnostic system
erly anymore and/or jeopardize the opera- may be affected. Some of these values are
tional safety of the vehicle. There is an legally prescribed and must always be correct.
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Conversions or modifications should always Information on the cargo compartment
be carried out at qualified specialist work- floor
shop.
! The wooden or plastic cargo area floor fitted
If you intend to make modifications to your vehi- at the factory is an integral component of the
cle, we strongly recommend that you contact vehicle structure. The vehicle body could be
the distributor named on the inside of the front damaged if you have the load area floor
cover. There you will receive all the necessary removed. This then affects the securing of
information and a charge may be levied. loads and the maximum loading capacity of
the lashing points is no longer guaranteed.
You alone accept the responsibility if body man-
ufacturers or dealers make modifications that Therefore, do not have the load area floor
affect the final certification of the engine, the removed.
vehicle or the equipment. This also applies to
the identification and documentation of modifi-
cations to the affected vehicle components. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
You are responsible for certification and confir-
mation that: ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rall the applicable standards and regulations ces, as well as control units and sensors for
that are affected by the vehicle modification these restraint systems, may be installed in
are met the following areas of your vehicle:
Rthe modified vehicle fulfills the vehicle safety Rdoors
standards and emissions laws and regula- Rdoor pillars
tions Rdoor sills
Rthe modifications or installation of accesso-
Rseats
ries does not affect the safety of the vehicle
Rcockpit
We are not responsible for the final certification,
Rinstrument cluster
product liability or warranty claims which result
from the modifications. This applies to: Rcenter console
Rthe modified components, assemblies or sys- Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
Rany resulting noncompliance with any of the
efficiency of the restraint systems.
emissions laws and regulations or the motor
vehicle safety standards Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
Rany consequences arising from the changes
that make the vehicle less safe or even render H Environmental note
it defective
We supply reconditioned assemblies and
We do not assume responsibility as the final- parts which are of the same quality as new
stage manufacturer or for the consequential
product liability. parts. The same New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty applies as for new parts.
Introduction 29
The operating safety of the vehicle could be These data memories temporarily or perma-
jeopardized if you use parts, tires and wheels as nently store technical information about:
well as accessories relevant to safety which Rthe vehicle's operating state
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
Revents
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
systems, e.g. the brake system. Only use genu- Rfaults
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- In general, this technical information docu-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that ments the state of a component, a module, a
have been specifically approved for your vehi- system or the surroundings.
cle. These include, for example:
We test genuine Sprinter parts, as well as con- Roperating conditions of system components,
version parts and accessories that have been e.g. fluid levels
specifically approved for the type of vehicle, for:
Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
Rreliability individual components, e.g. number of wheel
Rsafety revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
Rsuitability ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes- position
Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore, Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
we accept no responsibility for the use of such components, e.g. lights, brakes
parts in Sprinter vehicles, even if they have been Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
officially approved or independently approved special driving situations, e.g. airbag deploy-
by a testing center. ment, intervention of stability control sys-
In some countries, certain parts are only offi- tems
cially approved for installation or modification if Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
they comply with legal requirements. All genu- This data is of an exclusively technical nature
ine Sprinter parts satisfy these requirements. and can be used to:
Make sure that all parts are suitable for your
Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults and
vehicle.
defects
Always specify the vehicle identification number
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
(VIN) and engine number when ordering genuine
Sprinter parts (Y page 276). dent
Roptimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
QR code for rescue card movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
The QR Code stickers are affixed to the B-pillar mation can be read from the event data memory
on the driver's and front-passenger side. and fault data memory.
In the event of an accident the rescue services Services include, for example:
use the QR Code to quickly find the rescue card Rrepair services
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con- Rservice processes
tains the most important information on your Rwarranty events
vehicle, e.g. the electric cable routes, in a com-
pact form. Rquality assurance
Further information can be found under http:// The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com. vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more
information there, if required.
Data stored in the vehicle After a fault has been rectified, the information
is deleted from the fault memory or is continu-
Data Recording ally overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
A wide range of electronic components in your ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
vehicle contain data memories.
Z
30 Introduction
tion with other information (if necessary, after tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
consultation with an authorized expert), could under normal driving conditions and no personal
be traced to a person. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-
Examples include: tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement could combine the EDR data
Raccident reports
with the type of personally identifying data rou-
Rdamage to the vehicle tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
Rwitness statements Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
Further additional functions that have been con- to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow special equipment is required. In addition to the
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
cle as well. The additional functions include, for the special equipment, such as law enforce-
example, vehicle location in case of an emer- ment, can read the information by accessing the
gency. vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or data from the EDR is commercially available,
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- disclaims any and all liability arising from the
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be extraction of this information by unauthorized
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- Mercedes-Benz personnel.
tem. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
For additional information please refer to the without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
Terms and Conditions. lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
Event Data Recorders connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
This vehicle is equipped with an event data as required by law.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is Warning: The EDR is a component of the
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit- Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under- may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. tem Module and other systems.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
such data as: 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
RHow various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
Cockpit 31
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Door control panel 37 G PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 151
; Light switch 79
H Opens/closes the right-hand
= Combination switch side window 71
• turn signals 81
• high-beam headlamps 81 I Stowage compartment (jack
and vehicle tool kit) 240
• windshield wipers 93
• rear window wiper 94 J Glove box 204
? Cruise control lever 140 K Center console 35
A Steering wheel without or L Selector lever (automatic
with buttons 35 transmission) 124
B Instrument cluster 32 M Ignition lock 119
C Stowage compartment N Further control panels 37
• 3.5 mm audio jack 211 O Steering wheel buttons 35
• USB port 211
P Engages/releases the park-
D Timer for the auxiliary warming brake 136
air heater (auxiliary heating) 114
Q Horn
E • Stowage compartment
with interior light 84 R Opens the hood 218
• Overhead control panel 36 S Steering wheel buttons 35
F Rear-view mirror 78
32 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

: Speedometer 162 B Reset button 9 32
; Tachometer 162 C Menu button 4
= f, g Brightens/dims the • changes standard display 163
instrument cluster lighting 162 • selects menus 164
? Fuel gage with fuel filler flap D Service button Ë

location indicator 162 Checks the engine oil level 220
A Display
Vehicles without steering
wheel buttons 163
Vehicles with steering wheel
buttons 164
Instrument cluster 33
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

: Speedometer with warn- b Brake fluid level too low 195
ing and indicator lamps EBD malfunctioning 195
d ESP® warning lamp 194 Trailer brake force booster
malfunction 195
ASR warning lamp 194
4 Engine oil level warning 198
% Coolant level too low 199
; Check Engine indicator lamp 200
? Coolant temperature too
high 199 % Preglow 120
6 Restraint systems malfunc- Preglow system malfunction 201
tion 39 ; Indicator and warning
Ä Indicator lamp, distance lamps
warning 143 G Left-hand turn signal 81
· Warning lamp, distance ! ABS malfunction 195
warning 143
h Tire pressure loss or the tire
Ã Warning and indicator lamps, pressure monitor is malfunc-
Lane Keeping Assist 147 tioning (USA only) 202
Tire pressure loss (Canada
only) 255

¦ Fluid level too low in wind- : Water in the fuel 202
shield washer/headlamp
At a glance
cleaning system 202 m Fuel filter dirty 202
å DEF supply low or contami- # Battery charging malfunction 198

nated/diluted 162 b Bulb defective 203
Exhaust gas aftertreatment
malfunction 197 = Tachometer with warning
and indicator lamps
Ä Indicator lamp, distance
warning 143 c Parking brake applied 136
· Warning lamp, distance L Low-beam headlamps on 79
warning 143
K Working speed governor
Ã Warning and indicator lamps, (ADR) on 154
Lane Keeping Assist 147
Ð Power steering assistance
1 Door or hood open 203 malfunction 203
Electrically operated step K High-beam headlamps on
malfunction 203 (vehicle without steering
# Brake pads/linings worn 198 wheel buttons) 81
+ LOW RANGE active 148 å DEF supply low or contami-

nated/diluted 162
K High-beam headlamps on Exhaust gas aftertreatment
(vehicle with steering wheel malfunction 197
buttons) 81
| Reserve fuel 200
J Right-hand turn signal 81 Fuel filler cap open 200
: ASR malfunction 53 \ Diesel particle filter malfunc-
BAS malfunction 195 tion 201
h ESP® malfunction 194 h ESP® malfunction 194
È Dirt accumulation in air filter 201 7 Fasten seat belts 203
6 Reserve fuel 162
Fuel filler cap open 200
i Corresponding messages may also be

shown in the display (Y page 176).
Center console 35
Steering wheel buttons Center console
At a glance
Function Page
: Display 164
On-board computer opera-
tion
; Selects a submenu or adjusts Function Page
the volume 164
: Stowage compartment 205
W Up/increases the vol-
ume ; Audio 10 or Audio 15 (see the
X Down/reduces the vol- separate operating instruc-
ume tions)
Using the telephone 175 = Air-conditioning control
6 Accepts a call/starts panel 97
dialing Paper holder1 207
~ Ends a call/rejects an
incoming call ? Center console control
panel
= Scrolls from one menu to
another 164 c Switches the left/right-hand
V Forwards seat heating on/off 76
U Back z Switches the windshield
Scrolls within a menu 164 heating on/off 104
9 Forwards | Switches the rear window
: Back defroster on/off 104
f Activates/deactivates
PARKTRONIC 153
£ Switches the hazard warning
lamps on/off 82
1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

36 Overhead control panel
Function Page Overhead control panel

à Activates/deactivates ASR 53
At a glance
Ã Central locking, interior/rear

Ä compartment 64
æ Activates/deactivates the
distance warning function 143
j Activates/deactivates Lane
Keeping Assist 147
k Activates/deactivates Blind
Spot Assist 144
A • Stowage compartment or Function Page
• CD changer; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions, : Microphone for the mobile
or phone 210
B Cup holder with: 208 ; Switches the right-hand

reading lamp on/off 84
• Ashtray 209
• Cigarette lighter 209 = Switches the automatic inte-
rior lighting on/off 84
C 12 V socket 210
? • Eyeglasses compartment
or 205
• Anti-Theft Alarm system
(ATA) 56
A Switches the interior lighting
on/off 84
B Switches the left-hand read-
ing lamp on/off 84
Further control panels 37
Door control panel Further control panels

Control panel between the light
At a glance
switch and the steering wheel
Function Page
: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 78
; Selects an exterior mirror 78 Function Page
= Opens/closes the left-hand y Switches the auxiliary heat-

side window 71 ing on/off 108
? Opens/closes the right-hand ± Switches the heater booster

side window 71 function on/off 111
E Sets the working speed
F 154
E Switches the working speed
governor (ADR) on/off 154
´ Ventilates the cargo com-
· partment 117
38 Further control panels
Control panel between the steering

wheel and the ignition lock
At a glance
Function Page
l Switches the central rear
k compartment lighting on/off 84
; Engages/disengages all-
wheel drive 148
m Activates/deactivates LOW
RANGE transmission ratio 148
Occupant safety 39
Useful information an accident are deployed. Seat belts and air

bags generally do not protect against objects
penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
This Operator's Manual describes all models as
well as standard and optional equipment of your Information on restraint system operation can
vehicle that were available at the time of going be found under "Triggering of Emergency Ten-
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- sioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 45).
Safety
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped See “Children in the vehicle” for information on
with all of the described functions. This also children traveling with you as well as vehicle
applies to systems and functions relevant to restraint systems (Y page 47).
safety.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops (Y page 26). Important safety notes
G WARNING
Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system, may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
Restraint system introduction restraint system may then not perform its
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even
Furthermore, the restraint system may also fatal injury.
reduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants when an accident occurs. Never modify parts of the restraint system.
The restraint system includes: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
RSeat belt system
RAir bags If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to
RChild restraint system
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
RChild seat securing systems
tact an authorized Sprinter dealership for
details. USA only: contact our Customer
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only offer Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267 for
the intended level of protection if all vehicle details.
occupants:
Rare correctly wearing their seat belts.
(Y page 41) Restraint system warning lamp
Radjust their seat and head restraint properly
The functions of the restraint system are
(Y page 72). checked after the ignition is switched on and at
The driver is also responsible for ensuring that regular intervals while the engine is running.
the steering wheel has been correctly posi- Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
tioned. Observe the information relating to the good time.
correct driver's seat position (Y page 72). The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the
Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly if instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
deployed (Y page 43). switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
An air bag supplements a correctly fastened onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air nents of the restraint system are in operational
bag increases the level of protection for vehicle readiness.
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if the protection already provided by a cor-
rectly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bags
are not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bags
that would increase the degree of protection
afforded to the vehicle occupants in the event of
Z
40 Occupant safety
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the seat
system warning lamp: belts in an accident, pulling them close against
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched the occupant's body. They do not, however, pull
on vehicle occupants back towards the backrest.
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds Emergency Tensioning Devices do not correct
an incorrect seat position or incorrectly worn
Rgoes out but then lights up again while the
Safety
seat belts.
engine is running, for example
When triggered, the seat belt force limiter
G WARNING reduces the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
system components may be triggered unin- The seat belt force limiters are synchronized
with the front air bags, which absorb part of the
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in deceleration force. This makes it possible to
the event of an accident with a high rate of reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- are subjected during an accident.
gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- The Emergency Tensioning Device of the co-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or driver's seat is triggered independently of the
even fatal injury. lock status of the seat belt.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as Important safety notes
soon as possible. The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Seat belts Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Introduction
Rall Canadian provinces
A correctly fastened seat belt is the most effec- Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
tive means of restraining the movement of vehi- occupants should correctly fasten their seat
cle occupants in the event of an accident or the belts before starting the journey.
vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with G WARNING
parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown from If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
keep the vehicle occupants in the best position
in relation to the air bag. incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
The seat belt system consists of:
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
RSeat belts
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front
even fatal injury.
seat belts
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are
If the vehicle is equipped with a front air bag,
the seat belt system also includes a seat belt seated properly with a correctly fastened seat
force limiter for the corresponding seat. belt.
On vehicles with a front-passenger bench
seat, only the seat belt of the outer front- G WARNING
passenger seat has a seat belt force limiter. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
If the vehicle does not have a driver's air bag, the of protection if you have not moved the back-
seat belt system does not include an Emergency rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
Tensioning Device or a seat belt force limiter.
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly from
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt
strap cannot be pulled out further. abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
Occupant safety 41
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
injury. e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
Adjust the seat properly before beginning sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
is in an almost vertical position and that the increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Safety
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
across the center of your shoulder. sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
G WARNING undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- immediately at a qualified specialist work-
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat shop.
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-
your vehicle by the sales organization named on
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for the inside cover.
example, in an accident, during braking or an
abrupt change of direction. This poses an Proper use of the seat belts
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat
For this reason, always secure persons under
belt (Y page 40).
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint
All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat belt
systems. correctly before setting off. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly
If a child younger than twelve years old and for the entire journey.
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle: When fastening the seat belt, make sure that:
RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this vehicle. The child buckle that belongs to the seat.
restraint system must be appropriate to the RThe seat belt is tightened across your body.
age, weight and size of the child Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
Ralways observe the instructions and safety coat.
notes in the "Children in the vehicle" section RThe seat belt is not twisted.
of this Operator's Manual (Y page 47) in Only then can the forces produced in the
addition to the child restraint system manu- event of an accident be evenly distributed
facturer's installation instructions across the belt.
G WARNING RThe shoulder section of the belt must always
be routed across the center of the shoulder.
The seat belts may not perform their intended
The shoulder section of the belt should not
protective function if: come into contact with your neck and must
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely not be routed under the arm. Where possible,
dirty, bleach or dyed adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos-
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
sible over your lap.
extremely dirty
The lap belt must always pass across your hip
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt joints and never across your stomach or
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- abdomen. Pregnant women must take partic-
fied ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can be
pushed down across the hip joints and pulled
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
tight using the shoulder section.
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
Z
42 Occupant safety
RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed X Adjust the seat (Y page 72).
or fragile objects. The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-
If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g. tical position.
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these items X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet =
in a more suitable location. and engage belt tongue ; into belt
ROnly one person should use each seat belt at buckle :.
Safety
any one time. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder

On no account should babies or children section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle across your body.
occupant. During an accident, they could be
crushed between the occupant and seat belt.
RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if the
seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’s
occupants.
Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g.
cushions, between the occupant and the seat.
Seat belts are solely intended for the protection
and restraint of the vehicle occupants. To
secure objects, luggage or loads, always
observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 212).
Fastening and adjusting seat belts The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the shoul-
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 41). X To raise: slide belt outlet = upwards.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release ? and slide
the belt outlet = downwards.
X Let go of belt outlet release ? in the desired
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 48).
Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
Basic illustration This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Occupant safety 43
lamps in the instrument cluster"

(Y page 203).
Air bags
Safety
Introduction
The air bag installation location is identified by
the label SRS/AIR BAG or AIR BAG.
An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
seat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub-
stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
various air bag systems work independently of
each other (Y page 45).
There is, however, no system available today
Basic illustration that can completely rule out injury or death.
X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
firmly and guide it back towards belt outlet caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
=. which the air bag must be deployed.
Belt warning for drivers and front pas- Important safety notes
sengers
G WARNING
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu- the air bag cannot protect as intended and
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be could even cause additional injury when
a warning tone. deployed. This poses an increased risk of
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has injury or even fatal injury.
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn- To avoid hazardous situations, always make
ing lamp lights up for 6 seconds after each time sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
the ignition is switched on. After the engine has
been started, it goes out once the driver has Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
fastened the seat belt. including pregnant women
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
engine is started, an additional warning tone will est possible distance to the air bags
sound. This warning tone stops after a maximum
Rfollow the following instructions
of six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is
fastened. Always make sure that there are no objects
If the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
and the driver's seat belt is not fastened, a pants.
warning tone sounds again. The warning tone
sounds for 60 seconds or until the driver's seat RCorrectly adjust the seats before driving off.
belt is fastened. Always make sure the seat backrests are
If the driver unfastens the seat belt while the positioned as close to the vertical as possible.
vehicle is in motion, the belt warning automati- The center of the head restraints should sup-
cally reactivates. port the back of the head at about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger seat as
i Further information on the 7 seat belt far back as possible. The driver's seat position
warning lamp; see "Warning and indicator
Z
44 Occupant safety
must be such that the vehicle can be driven area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win-
safely. dows.
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering Rthere are no heavy, sharp or fragile objects in
wheel rim. This allows the air bag to deploy the pockets of items of clothing. Such items
fully. should be suitably stowed elsewhere.
RAlways sit with your back against the seat
G WARNING
Safety
backrest when driving. Do not lean forward,

on the door or against the side window. Oth- If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
erwise, you are in the air bag deployment such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
area. function correctly. There is an increased risk
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of injury.
of the seat. Do not, for example, place your
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
feet on the dashboard. Otherwise, your feet
are in the air bag deployment area. to it.
RSuitable restraint systems must always be
used for persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height. G WARNING
The seat belt cannot be worn correctly by Sensors to control the air bags are located in
persons who do not reach this height. the doors. Modifications or work not per-
If children are also traveling in the vehicle, formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
please take note of the following points. ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
RAlways secure children younger than twelve function of the sensors being impaired. The air
years of age and under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in bags might therefore not function properly
suitable child restraint systems. anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
RChild restraint systems should preferably be
protect vehicle occupants as they are
installed on the rear seats.
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
RIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
injury.
restraint system, always do so on a suitable
rear seat. The front-passenger front air bag Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
cannot be deactivated. Always have work on the doors or door pan-
RBe sure to observe the instructions and safety eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
notes on "Children in the vehicle" shop.
(Y page 47) and "Child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat" (Y page 51) in
addition to the child restraint system manu- Front air bags
facturer's installation instructions.
Objects in the passenger compartment
could prevent an air bag from functioning
properly. To prevent risks due to the required
air bag speed after deployment, ensure the fol-
lowing before starting the journey:
Rthere are no persons, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
the grab handles or coat hooks. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are ing wheel. Front-passenger air bag ; deploys in
attached to the vehicle within the deployment front of and above the glove box and the center
console.
Occupant safety 45
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- Window curtain air bags
tional head and thorax protection on the front
seats.
Side impact air bags

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, some
Safety
front seats are equipped with a side impact air
bag; see the AIR BAG label on the outer side of
the seat backrest.
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even
prevent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. The air bags may then fail to Window curtain air bags : are installed in the
protect the vehicle occupants as intended. side of the roof frame above the front doors.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly When deployed, the window curtain air bag
even fatal. offers additional head protection. However, it
does not protect the chest or arms.
Only use seat cushions that are approved for
In the event of a side impact, the window curtain
your vehicle by the distributor named on the air bag is deployed on the side on which the
inside cover page. impact occurs.
If the system determines that it can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the seat
belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed
in other accident situations (Y page 45).
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Side impact air bags : deploy next to the outer The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
bolster of the seat backrest. been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
additional thorax protection. However, it does deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
not protect the: cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Rhead
Rneck G WARNING
Rarms A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
In the event of a side impact, the side impact air tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact tection in an accident. There is an increased
occurs. risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of any

passengers to have deployed air bags replaced
Z
46 Occupant safety
and to have any malfunctioning air bags An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags triggered if:
continue to perform their protective function for Rthe ignition is switched on
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
Rthe components of the restraint system are
G WARNING operational. You can find further information
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices under "Restraint system warning lamp"
Safety
(Y page 39)
that have been deployed are no longer opera-
Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle on
tional and are unable to perform their inten- the respective front seat
ded protective function. This poses an
The Emergency Tensioning Device of the co-
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. driver's seat is triggered independently of the
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- lock status of the seat belt.
sioning Devices which have been triggered If the restraint system control unit detects a high
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist accident severity, additional components of the
workshop. restraint system are deployed independently of
one another in certain frontal collision situa-
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags tions:
are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small RFront air bags
amount of powder may also be released. The RWindow curtain air bag on side of collision
6 restraint system warning lamp will light up.
The deployment thresholds for the Emergency
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- Tensioning Devices and air bags are calculated
ing. The powder released is generally not haz- on the basis of the vehicle deceleration or accel-
ardous to health, it could however cause short- eration occurring at various points in the vehi-
term breathing difficulties in people with asthma cle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The
or other respiratory problems. If it is safe to do air bag must be deployed on time, at the start of
so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or the collision.
open a window in order to prevent breathing
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
difficulties.
and the direction of the force are essentially
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning determined by:
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard Rdistribution of the force during the impact
for the environment. Check with your local gov- Rcollision angle
ernment’s disposal guidelines. California resi- Rdeformation characteristics of the vehicle
dents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ Rcharacteristics of the object with which the
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
Method of operation after the collision has occurred do not play a
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, nor
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint do they provide an indication of air bag deploy-
system control unit evaluates important physi- ment.
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration, such as: The vehicle may be considerably deformed with-
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
RDuration only relatively easily deformable parts have
RDirection been hit and a high rate of deceleration has not
RIntensity been reached. Conversely, an air bag may be
Based on the evaluation of this data, the deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- minor deformation. This is the case if, for exam-
gency Tensioning Devices in the event of a fron- ple, very rigid vehicle parts such as the longitu-
tal or rear-end collision. dinal body members are hit in an accident and
the rate of deceleration is sufficient.
Children in the vehicle 47
If the restraint system control unit detects a side G WARNING

impact situation, the applicable components of
the restraint system are deployed independ- If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
ently of each other. If the system determines a cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
need for additional protection for the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake.
occupants, the Emergency Tensioning Devices
are also deployed. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
Safety
RSide impact air bag on the side on which the
parking position P.
impact occurs, independently of the Emer- Rstart the engine.
gency Tensioning Device and of the use of the In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
seat belt ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of the col-
an accident and injury.
lision, regardless of seat belt use and whether
front-passenger seat is occupied When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The various air bag systems work independ-
ently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
G WARNING
by the severity of the accident detected, If persons, particularly children are subjected
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
eration, and the apparent type of accident: cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Rfrontal collision fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
Rside impact vehicle.
G WARNING
Children in the vehicle If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
Accident statistics show that children secured particularly on the metal parts of the child
in the rear seats are safer than children secured restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, we
strongly advise that you install a child restraint If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
system on a rear seat. Children are generally you, always ensure that the child restraint
better protected there. system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
If a child younger than twelve years old and tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the restraint system has been exposed to direct
vehicle: sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint child in it. Never leave children unattended in
system suitable for this vehicle. The child the vehicle.
restraint system must be appropriate to the
age, weight and size of the child Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
notes in this section in addition to the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to
restraint system manufacturer's installation children.
instructions Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 41).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
Z
48 Children in the vehicle
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened Child restraint system

without a booster seat.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Special seat belt retractor Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Safety
G WARNING Rthe District of Columbia

If the seat belt is released while driving, the Rall Canadian provinces
child restraint system will no longer be Further information about the correct child
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- restraint system is available from any authorized
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a Sprinter dealer.
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
G WARNING
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
sudden changes of direction. There is an
child restraint system properly.
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's Make sure that you observe the child restraint
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt system manufacturer's installation instruc-
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot that the base of the child restraint system is
slacken once the child seat is secured.
always resting completely on the seat cush-
Installing a child restraint system: ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
X Make sure you observe the child restraint or behind the child restraint system. Only use
system manufacturer's installation instruc- child restraint systems with the original cover
tions. designed for them. Only replace damaged
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
covers with genuine covers.
let.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
G WARNING
Activating the special seat belt retractor: If the child restraint system is installed incor-
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
reel retract it again. the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
While the seat belt is retracting, you should sudden change in direction. The child
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is enabled. restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
X Push the child restraint system down so that
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor: erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc- tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
tions.
You will find further information on stowing
X Press the release button of the seat belt
objects, luggage and loads securely under
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back "Loading guidelines" (Y page 212).
towards the belt sash guide.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-

Child restraint systems or their securing sys- ing system
tems which have been damaged or subjected
G WARNING
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
Safety
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
fatal. integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
Replace child restraint systems which have
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
before you install a child restraint system systems with which the child is also secured
again. with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
Securing systems for child restraint systems belt, if available.
include:
Rthe
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
seat belt system lation and operating instructions for the child
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings restraint system used.
RTop Tether anchorage points Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
i If it is absolutely necessary to install a child type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
be sure to observe the notes on "Child rings
restraint systems on the front-passenger ! When installing the child restraint system,
seat" (Y page 51). make sure that the seat belt for the middle
All child restraint systems must meet the fol- seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
lowing standards: otherwise be damaged.
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer
of compliance with these standards can be
found on the instruction label on the child
restraint system. You will also find the state-
ment in the instruction manual provided with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
Z
50 Children in the vehicle
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for Top Tether anchorage points

specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings : for a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system are installed between the seat
cushion and the seat backrest:
Safety
Ron the outer left and right seat on rear bench

seats with 3 seats
Ron the outer left seat on rear bench seats with
2 seats
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions. Example: rear bench seat with 3 seats
Top Tether anchorages ; are on the bench seat
legs on the rear side of the respective rear bench
Top Tether seat.
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the
risk of injury even further. If the child restraint
system has a Top Tether belt, this should be
used at all times.

G WARNING
If the Top Tether belt has been incorrectly X Slide head restraint : upwards.
secured, e.g. to an eyelet in the cargo com- X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
partment, the child restraint system is not system with Top Tether. Make sure you
correctly kept in place. It therefore cannot observe the child restraint system manufac-
perform its intended protective function in the turer's installation instructions.
event of an accident. There is an increased X Route the Top Tether belt ? under head
risk of injury. restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
Only secure the Top Tether hook to the Top X Hook Top Tether hook = into Top Tether
Tether anchorage intended for this purpose. anchorage ;.
Make sure that:
Rthe Top Tether hook = is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ;, as shown
RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted
X Tighten Top Tether belt ?. Make sure you
observe the child restraint system manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
X If necessary, push the head restraint back
down slightly (Y page 76). Make sure that
you do not interfere with the correct routing of
Top Tether belt ?.
Child restraint system on the front- Override features/Child-proof locks

passenger seat
General notes
G WARNING
Accident statistics show that children secured
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
Safety
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, could:
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
the child restraint system on a rear seat. or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
Rearward-facing child restraint system
traffic
The front-passenger front air bag cannot be Roperate vehicle equipment and become
deactivated. Always install a rearward-facing trapped
child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Always observe the child restraint system man- There is a risk of an accident and injury.
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- Always activate the child-proof locks and
tions. override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Forward-facing child restraint system the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward- leave children unattended in the vehicle.
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always move the front- Child-proof locks for rear doors (Y page 52).
passenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
G WARNING
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Rrelease the parking brake.
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not be Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust parking position P.
the head restraint position accordingly. Always
Rstart the engine.
make sure that the shoulder belt strap is cor-
rectly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
shoulder belt guide on the child restraint sys- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- an accident and injury.
wards and downwards from the vehicle belt out-
let. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet When leaving the vehicle, always take the
and the front-passenger seat accordingly. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Always observe the child restraint system man- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions. G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Z
52 Driving safety systems
dren may burn themselves on these parts, As a result, they could:

particularly on the metal parts of the child Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. trapped, for example
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
you, always ensure that the child restraint endangering other road users
Safety
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-

Unsecured animals could also be flung around
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
restraint system has been exposed to direct
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
and injury.
the vehicle.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
Child-proof locks for the rear door
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.
Driving safety systems

Overview
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RASR (Acceleration Skid Control)
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
Rear door
: Child safety bolt REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution)
2 Door secured – then make sure that the RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
child-proof locks are working properly.
3 Door released
The child-proof lock on the doors enable you to Important safety notes
secure each door individually. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
A door with an activated child-proof lock cannot inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
be opened from the inside. If the vehicle is ther reduce the risk of accident nor override the
unlocked, the door can be opened from the out- laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
side. merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time
Pets in the vehicle and for staying in your lane. Always adapt your
driving style to the prevailing road and weather
conditions and maintain a sufficient, safe dis-
G WARNING tance from other road users. Drive carefully.
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured Please note that the driving safety systems
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or described only work optimally when:
switches, for example. Rthere is adequate contact between the tires
and the road surface
Ryou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary, when the road conditions
are wintry.
Driving safety systems 53
Pay particular attention to the information ASR (acceleration skid control)

regarding tires, tire tread and winter operation
under "Wheels and tires" (Y page 247). General notes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Observe the important safety guidelines for the
Safety
driving safety system (Y page 52).
Important safety notes ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident
Observe the important safety guidelines for the nor suspend the laws of physics if the driver
driving safety system (Y page 52). does not pay attention when pulling away or
accelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt
G WARNING your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when weather conditions.
braking. The steerability and braking charac- If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- in a vehicle with this option, ASR will be deacti-
vated for the duration of the activation/deacti-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac- vation process.
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASR
ding and accidents. is malfunctioning, the : indicator lamp lights
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- up while the engine is running and the engine
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. power may be reduced (Y page 195).
ASR significantly improves traction, i.e. the
If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems will also transmission of power from the tires to the road
fail, including driving safety systems. Observe surface, and thus increases the vehicle's driving
the information relating to the ! warning stability. If the driving wheels start to spin, ASR
lamp (Y page 195). brakes individual drive wheels and limits the
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that engine torque. ASR thus significantly assists you
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This when pulling away and accelerating, especially
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when on wet or slippery roads.
braking. If traction on the road surface is not sufficient,
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph even ASR will not allow you to pull away without
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. difficulty. The type of tires and total weight of the
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you vehicle as well as the gradient of the road also
only brake gently. play a crucial role.
The yellow ! warning lamp in the instrument If ASR intervenes, the d warning lamp in the
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched instrument cluster flashes.
on. The lamp goes out when the engine starts
running. Activating/deactivating ASR
Braking G WARNING
If deactivated, ASR will not attempt to stabi-
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsating in the brake pedal. lize the vehicle during pulling away and accel-
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication eration. There is an increased risk of skidding
of hazardous road conditions and functions as a and of an accident.
reminder to take extra care while driving. Only deactivate ASR in the situations descri-
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the bed in the following.
brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
uation is over. ! If you deactivate ASR, ESP® will still inter-
X To make a full brake application: depress vene to stabilize the vehicle. Frequent braking
the brake pedal with full force. automatically triggered by ESP® can damage
the brake system.
Z
54 Driving safety systems
For this reason, deactivate ASR only briefly In an emergency braking situation, depress
and when absolutely necessary. the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if the

BAS driving safety system is malfunctioning,
Safety
the : warning lamp lights up while the

engine is running (Y page 195).
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake quickly, BAS automat-
ically increases the brake pressure, thereby
reducing the stopping distance.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
When ESP® is intervening and the d warning
lamp in the instrument cluster is flashing, leave
ASR on. In this case, only depress the acceler- EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
ator pedal as far as required when pulling away. tion)
X Press the à button.
If ASR is deactivated, the d warning lamp G WARNING
in the instrument cluster lights up. If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
ASR is automatically activated when the engine lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
is started. risk of skidding and an accident.
It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in the
You should therefore adapt your driving style
following situations:
to the different handling characteristics. Have
Rwhen using snow chains
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
Rin deep snow
cialist workshop.
Ron sand or gravel
If you deactivate ASR: EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
Rengine torque is not limited and the drive
to the rear wheels. This enables EBD to improve
handling during braking.
wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels
will then achieve a cutting effect for better Observe the information on warning and indica-
traction. tor lamps (Y page 195).
Rtraction control remains active through brake
intervention. If a drive wheel attains its tire
traction limit because one side of the road is ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
slippery, for example, that wheel is braked.
The traction is then increased in this situation. Important safety notes
Ractive brake intervention by ESP® to increase
driving stability remains active. The d G WARNING
warning lamp in the instrument cluster If ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provide
flashes when ESP® is intervening. any vehicle stabilization. There is an increased
risk of skidding or of an accident.
Exercise caution when continuing to drive.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist
G WARNING workshop.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
! Do not run the vehicle on a roller dynamom-
in an emergency braking situation is eter (e.g. for performance tests). If you must
increased. There is a risk of an accident. operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer,
Emergency exit 55
please consult a qualified specialist workshop Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon as
in advance. You could otherwise damage the the driving conditions return to normal.
drive train or the brake system. Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind
If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive gusts that can impair the road holding of your
in a vehicle with this option, ESP® will be deac- vehicle when driving straight ahead. Crosswind
tivated for the duration of the activation/deac- Assist intervenes depending on the direction
Safety
tivation process. and strength of the crosswind.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, the h indicator A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep
lamp lights up while the engine is running and the vehicle on track.
the engine power may be reduced Information appears in the instrument cluster In
(Y page 194). the event that Crosswind Assist intervenes
noticeably.
i Only use wheels with the recommended tire On vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. the d indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes.
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) On vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
d indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
! A function or performance test should only flashes and the message Crosswind Assist
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. Active appears in the multifunction display.
Before you operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speed
workshop. You could otherwise damage the of 50 mph (80 km/h) when the vehicle is driving
drive train or the brake system. straight ahead or cornering gently.
4ETS is only active when all-wheel drive is acti-
vated (Y page 148).
Emergency exit
4ETS ensures permanent drive for all four
wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the Emergency exit window
vehicle's traction.
If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction: G WARNING
RWhen pulling away, make use of the traction The emergency exit window cannot be locked
control integrated in ESP®. Depress the in place. You risk injury if you exit the vehicle
accelerator pedal as far as necessary. through the emergency exit window.
RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off the RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped,
accelerator pedal. both when closing and when opening the
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter emergency exit window.
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains
(Y page 249). This is the only way to get the full RThe opened emergency exit window must
benefit from the all-wheel drive system. be held in place by another person.
Pay attention to traffic conditions.
Crosswind Assist
G WARNING
Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deac-
tivated or disabled because of a malfunction. If the emergency exit window is unlocked
Crosswind Assist does not react: while driving, it could open and slam shut and
Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations, e.g.
consequently fall down. There is a risk of an
as a result of uneven surfaces or potholes accident and injury.
Rif the vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or Before starting off, make sure that the emer-
ice or when aquaplaning gency exit window is locked and the locking
Rto large and sudden steering movements by pins are undamaged.
the driver
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance
when opening the emergency exit window.
Z
56 Theft deterrent locking system
Hold the open window in position. You could or heavy objects on or in front of the seats
otherwise damage the emergency exit win- next to the emergency exit window.
dow. RThe window handles must not be used as
hooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bags or
items of clothing.
RWhen exiting the vehicle through the emer-
Safety
gency exit window, pay attention to the vehi-

cle height and the local conditions. Particu-
larly children and smaller adults may require
assistance when exiting the vehicle.
Theft deterrent locking system

Immobilizer
The emergency exit window is intended for use X To activate: remove the key from the ignition
in an emergency only and must not be opened lock.
unless the vehicle is stationary. The emergency
X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 in
exit window is the first window behind the driv-
er's seat on the driver's side. It is marked by the the ignition lock.
"Emergency Exit" label. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
X To open: position both handles : vertically. being started without the correct key.
This will break locking pins ;. Always take the key with you and lock the vehi-
The window is unlocked. cle when leaving the vehicle. If you leave the key
X Swing the window outward by the handles in the vehicle, anyone can start the engine.
and hold it in this position. Make sure there is i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
sufficient clearance when doing so. you start the engine.
X To close: close the window. In the event that the engine cannot be started
X Position both handles : horizontally. Make when the starter battery is fully charged, the
sure that the locks = are inside in front of the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an author-
window frame. ized Sprinter dealer or call 1-877-762-8267
The window is locked. (in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X Replace locking pins ; at the latest before
starting on a new journey.
You can obtain information on this at any ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
X To arm: close all doors.
In an emergency, or after an accident, the vehi-
cle occupants can exit the vehicle through the X Lock the vehicle with the key.
emergency exit window. The indicator lamp in the central locking but-
ton (Y page 64) flashes.
Observe the following notes to make sure that
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the key.
the emergency exit window can be used safely in
the event of an emergency: The indicator lamp in the central locking but-
ton (Y page 64) goes out.
RBefore beginning a journey, inform the vehicle
occupants of the emergency exit window and i Cargo Van and Passenger Van only:
explain how to use it. Make sure to explicitly Unless you open a door within 40 seconds
point out the risks described here. after unlocking the vehicle:
ROnly vehicle occupants who know how to use Rthe vehicle will be locked again
the emergency exit window are permitted to Rthe anti-theft alarm system will be armed
sit next to it. again
RAccess to the emergency exit window must
remain unobstructed. Do not place any large
Theft deterrent locking system 57
If the alarm system is armed, a visual and audi- X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
ble alarm is triggered by the following: X Press button :.
RUnlocking the vehicle from inside When the button is released, indicator
ROpening a door lamp ; in the button lights up for about
5 seconds.
ROpening the hood
X Lock the vehicle.
Safety
i The alarm is not switched off, even if you The tow-away alarm is disarmed.
immediately close the open door that has trig- The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you
gered it, for example. lock the vehicle again.
X To stop the alarm: press the % button on Disarm the tow-away alarm when locking your
the remote control. vehicle and:
or Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, on a
X Insert the key into the ignition lock. ferry or car transporter, for example
The alarm stops. Rparking on a moving surface, as split-level
garage
This will prevent false alarms.
Tow-away alarm
Operation Interior motion sensor
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
inclination of the vehicle changes when the tow- Operation
away alarm is armed. This can be the case if the If the armed interior motion sensor detects
vehicle is raised on one side, for example. motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acous-
tic alarm is triggered. This can happen if some-
Arming and disarming one reaches into the vehicle interior, for exam-
ple.
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed
approximately 20 seconds after you lock the
vehicle. Switching on
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva- X Close the side windows.
ted when you unlock the vehicle. X Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or
coat hangers) are hanging on the rear-view
Disarming mirror or on the grab handles on the head-
liner.
X Lock the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is armed after
approximately 40 seconds.
Switching off
X Unlock vehicle.
The interior motion sensor automatically
switches off.
Z
58 Theft deterrent locking system
Deactivating
Safety
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
When the button is released, indicator
lamp ; of the button lights up for about
5 seconds.
X Lock the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
The interior motion sensor remains deactivated
until you lock the vehicle again.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor when
locking your vehicle:
Rwith people or animals remaining inside
Rwith the side windows remaining open
Rwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-
porter, for example
Key 59
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
This Operator's Manual describes all models as SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
well as standard and optional equipment of your tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
vehicle that were available at the time of going
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped risk of an accident.
with all of the described functions. This also Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
applies to systems and functions relevant to SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
Opening and closing

safety. inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
workshops (Y page 26). Do not keep the key with remote control:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another key with remote control
Key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
Important safety notes Rin metallic objects, e.g. metal cases
This can affect the key's functionality.
G WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the Key functions of the remote control
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a General notes
risk of injury. The vehicle is equipped with either 2 or 4 remote
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- controls with a folding key, or 4 mechanical
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- keys. In this Operator's Manual, both the
mechanical keys and the keys with remote con-
erly people or people in need of special assis- trol are referred to as keys. The remote control
tance. Do not activate the double lock when key has a range of up to 32 ft (10 m). Use the
people are in the vehicle. remote control of the key only when in immedi-
ate proximity of the vehicle. This prevents theft.
G WARNING Remote controls that are not included in the
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- scope of delivery for the vehicle must be pro-
grammed before use. Further information can
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
be obtained at any authorized Sprinter Dealer.
Rrelease the parking brake. The key's remote control locks/unlocks the
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park driver's door and/or the following centrally if
position P or shift manual transmission into the factory settings have not been changed:
neutral. Rthe driver's and the front-passenger door
Rthe sliding doors
Rstart the engine.
Rthe rear doors
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of i If the driver's or front-passenger door is not
an accident and injury. closed, the corresponding door is not locked.
If a sliding door or a rear door is not closed
When leaving the vehicle, always take the properly, none of the rear doors are locked.
If there is a key is in the ignition lock, the remote
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
control is inoperative. When locking or unlock-
ing the vehicle with the remote control, always
pay attention to the indicator lamp signaling.
Also check the locking knobs of the doors.
Z
60 Key
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the X To lock centrally: press the & button.
remote control The indicator lamps flash three times when
the theft deterrent locking system has been
armed and all doors have been closed.
X Check the locking knobs on all the doors.
The locking knobs must all be in the lowered
position.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the

Opening and closing
mechanical key or the folding key

The anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggered if
you unlock and open the driver's door or the rear
door with the mechanical key or the folding key.
Remote control with an integrated folding key The alarm can be disabled in the following two
ways:
: 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the
rear door X Press the % or & button on the remote
; % To unlock the driver's door only or control.
unlock the vehicle centrally Or
= & To lock the vehicle centrally X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
? Key release button
A Battery check lamp
X To unlock the driver's door: press the %
button.
The turn signals flash once. The theft deter-
rent locking system is deactivated.
X To unlock the sliding doors and the rear
door: press the 5 button.
The turn signals flash once.
X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver's
door.
X Press the % button again within 2 sec-
Driver's door
onds.
The turn signals flash once.
i If the surround lighting has been switched
on using the on-board computer
(Y page 172), it goes on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
If you do not open a Cargo Van or Passenger
Van within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
again.
Rear door
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
Key 61
X To unlock the driver's or rear door: press for the environment. Check with your local gov-
the key release button on the remote control. ernment’s disposal guidelines. California resi-
The key folds out. dents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
X Insert the key fully into the door lock and turn HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
it to position 2. We recommend that you have batteries
The door is unlocked. changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors except the
driver's door and, if necessary the rear door, Checking the batteries
from inside. To do this, press down the door
Opening and closing

locking buttons. XPress the % or & button for longer than
X Press the key release button on the remote two seconds.
control. If battery indicator lamp (Y page 59) lights up
The key folds out. briefly, the batteries in the remote control still
have sufficient charge. Otherwise, change the
X Insert the key fully into the driver's door lock
batteries immediately.
and turn it to position 1.
The driver's door is locked. i If the remote control is checked within the
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
Rlock or
Remote control battery
Runlock the vehicle
Changing batteries
G WARNING
You need a CR 2025 2 3 V cell battery, which can
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in shop.
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal When changing the batteries, do not press any
injury. of the buttons on the remote control.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment. X Press release button ;.
Dispose of batteries in an The key folds out.
X Remove battery compartment cover : in the
environmentally friendly
direction of the arrow.
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The key batteries contain perchlorate material,

which may require special handling and regard
Z
62
Opening and closing Key
X Remove the batteries from the battery tray.

X Insert the new batteries into the battery tray
with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a
lint-free cloth to do so.
X Align battery compartment cover : and push
it on until it audibly engages.
X Check the function of all the remote control
buttons on the vehicle.
Key 63
Problems with the key/remote control

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
It is no longer possible to The doors are not closed properly.
lock the vehicle using X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.
the remote control.
The turn signals do not The central locking system has malfunctioned.
flash when the vehicle is X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 59).
Opening and closing

locked.
X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible at a
It is no longer possible to The key battery is weak or discharged.
lock or unlock the vehi- X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle from very close
cle using the remote range and press the % or & button.
control.
If this does not work:
X Replace the key battery (Y page 61).
or
X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 59).
The remote control is faulty.

X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 59).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The key cannot be The steering lock has jammed mechanically.

turned in the ignition X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn the
lock. steering wheel from side to side while doing so.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the key. X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting, and
try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 232).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 242).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.
Z
64 Central locking
Central locking Locking and unlocking manually

G WARNING
Activate the child-proof door locks if children
are traveling in the vehicle. The children could
otherwise open the doors while the vehicle is
in motion, injuring themselves and others.
Opening and closing
G WARNING
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
Central locking buttons
restraint system. Children could otherwise
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. Use the central locking buttons to centrally
They could be severely or even fatally injured lock/unlock either the entire vehicle or just the
sliding doors and rear doors from the inside.
by prolonged exposure to intense heat or
X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: press
cold.
the upper Ã central locking button when
If children open a door, they could: the doors are closed.
Rinjure other people When the entire vehicle is locked, the indica-
tor lamp in the Ã central locking button
Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure lights up.
themselves or be injured by a passing vehi- i If the key has been removed or is in position
cle 0 in the ignition lock, the indicator lamp in the
Rseverely injure themselves by falling down, Ã central locking button remains lit for
in particular due to the vehicle height 5 seconds.
Always take the key with you when leaving the X To lock/unlock the sliding doors and rear
vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short doors: press the lower section of the Ä
time. central locking button when the doors are
closed.
You can open a locked front door from the inside When the sliding doors and rear doors are
at any time. You can open a locked sliding door locked, the indicator lamp in the upper Ã
or rear door from the inside if it has been previ- central locking button lights up.
ously unlocked from inside.
Automatic locking
General notes
The vehicle locks automatically as standard
once a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has been
reached. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, the doors may be locked automatically
once the ignition is switched on. Information on
the functions of the automatic locking mecha-
nism of your vehicle can be obtained from any
If the automatic locking when driving function is
activated, there is a risk of being locked out
when the vehicle is pushed or towed.
Sliding door 65
For this reason, deactivate the automatic lock-

ing when driving function:
Rbefore pushing the vehicle
Rbefore towing the vehicle
If activated, automatic locking is deactivated
when the vehicle is unlocked or locked using the
central locking button.
Automatic locking is reactivated after the igni-
tion is switched off or a door is opened with the
Opening and closing

vehicle stationary.
Activating automatic locking when driv- You can open the driver's or front-passenger
ing door from the inside at any time, even if it is
locked.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
X Pull door handle :.
lock when the doors are closed.
Locking knob ; pops up.
X For the entire vehicle: press the upper Ã
central locking button until the indicator lamp The door opens.
in the button flashes four times.
X For the sliding doors and rear doors only:
press the Ä lower central locking button Sliding door
until the indicator lamp in the Ã upper
button flashes four times. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Deactivating automatic locking when
If the open sliding door is not engaged, it could
driving
move on its own if the vehicle is on a slope.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition This could trap you or other persons. There is
lock when the doors are closed. a risk of injury.
X For the entire vehicle: press the Ã upper
Always make sure that the open sliding door is
central locking button until the indicator lamp engaged.
in the button flashes twice.
X For the sliding doors and rear doors only:
! Only open the doors when road and traffic
press the Ä lower central locking button conditions permit. Make sure that there is
until the indicator lamp in the Ã upper sufficient clearance when opening the doors.
button flashes twice. Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle or
other vehicles.
The sliding door of your vehicle can be equipped
Driver's door and front-passenger with an electrical access step. Observe the
door notes on the electrical step when opening and
closing the sliding door (Y page 66).
! Only open the doors when road and traffic
conditions permit. Make sure that there is
sufficient clearance when opening the doors.
Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle or
other vehicles.
Z
66 Electrical step
Opening/closing from the outside The door does not have to be opened fully
when getting into or out of the vehicle. The
intermediate detent does not fully engage the
sliding door.
X To unlock: pull locking knob = upwards.
Only this sliding door unlocks. The other
doors remain locked.
X To open: press button :.
X Slide the sliding door by handle ; back to the
Opening and closing
stop.
X Check the sliding door detent.
The sliding door must be engaged.
X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-
The sliding door is equipped with an active wards by door handle ; until it engages.
retainer, which engages the door at the end stop X To lock: press locking knob = down.
when opened. Only the sliding door is locked. All other doors
i You can also lock the sliding door in place that were previously unlocked remain
around halfway when opening and closing. unlocked.
The door does not have to be opened fully
when getting into or out of the vehicle. The
intermediate detent does not fully engage the Electrical closing assist
sliding door.
X To open: pull door handle :.
If your vehicle is equipped with electrical closing
assist, you will require less force to close the
The sliding door opens.
sliding door.
X Push back the sliding door using door han-
dle : until it engages.
X Check the sliding door detent.
Electrical step
X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-
wards by handle : until it closes. Important safety notes
! Always observe the ground clearance of the
vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehicles with
Opening/closing from the inside a step, ground clearance is further restricted.
Obstacles can damage the vehicle.
If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe-
cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, have
another person direct you.
If you do not use the grab handle and the step,
you could injure yourself when getting in and out
of the vehicle.
In order to reduce risks:
Rdraw the passengers' attention to the electri-
cal step. Wait until the electrical step is fully
extended.
Rdo not jump out of the vehicle.
Interior door handle on the sliding door
Ronly use the grab handle and step. Only they
The sliding door is equipped with an active are designed for such a load.
retainer, which engages the door at the end stop
Rkeep grab handles, access steps and entry
when opened.
sills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow and
i You can also lock the sliding door in place ice.
around halfway when opening and closing.
Electrical step 67
Operation and obstacle detection Before passengers get out of the vehicle, let
them know that electrical step : might not be
extended.
Emergency release
! Driving with the step extended may result in
it being damaged.
Opening and closing

If the electrical step does not retract auto-
matically, you will have to push it in and lock it
into place manually before continuing your
journey.
Electrical step
The sliding door of your vehicle can be equipped
with an electrical step.
X When getting in and out of the vehicle, use the
grab handles and electrical step :.
Electrical step : automatically extends when
the sliding door is opened and retracts when it is
closed.
Electrical step : is equipped with an obstruc-
tion detection device on the front side. If the
step comes into contact with an obstacle while
it is extending, it stops. X Pull R-clips ; on both rods : on the under-
side of the step out of their respective pins.
After you have removed the obstacle, you must
X Remove washers = and detach both rods :.
first close the sliding door and open it once
again so that the step can extend completely.
i If the electrical step obstructs loading, you
can prevent the step from extending when
opening the sliding door via obstacle detec-
tion. The electrical step can then remain
retracted and a forklift or other lifting equip-
ment can be moved nearer to the cargo com-
partment.
Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons: if
the 1 indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter lights up and a warning tone sounds, elec-
trical step : is malfunctioning (Y page 203).
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if the
X Fold rods : into the housing in the step.
Electrical Step message is shown in the dis- X Push the step into its housing.
play and a warning tone sounds, electrical
step : is malfunctioning (Y page 192).
If electrical step : is malfunctioning, the step
may only partially extend/retract or may not
extend/retract at all. If a malfunction does
occur, you will have to retract and lock electrical
step : manually before continuing the journey
(Y page 67).
Z
68 Rear doors
! Make sure that there is sufficient clearance

when opening the rear doors. You could oth-
erwise damage the vehicle and objects in
close range of the rear doors.
You can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°,
180° and 270°. Always make sure that the open
rear door is correctly engaged in the detent.
Opening and closing
Opening/closing from the outside

Opening the right-hand rear door
i When securing the step for the first time,
you must pierce a film with the R-clips.
X Insert R-clips ; into the step as far as they
will go through the holes on both sides of the
housing.
The step is secured in its housing.
Rear doors
G WARNING
X Pull handle :.
If you open a rear door, you could: X Swing the rear door to the side until it
Rendanger other people or road users engages.
Rbe caught by oncoming traffic
This is particularly the case if you open the Opening the left-hand rear door
rear door more than 90°. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Only open the rear doors when traffic condi-
tions permit. Always make sure that the rear
doors are properly locked.
G WARNING
If you open the rear doors to 90° (detent posi-
tion), the rear lamps are no longer visible.
The vehicle is no longer sufficiently visible
from the rear and will only be recognized as an
X Make sure that the right-hand rear door is
obstacle at a late stage by other road users. open and engaged.
This could lead to an accident. X Pull release handle : in the direction of the
Therefore, in such a situation, ensure that the arrow.
vehicle is visible from the rear according to X Swing the rear door to the side until it
the respective national regulations, e.g. with a engages.
warning triangle.
Rear doors 69
Opening the rear doors to an angle of Closing the rear doors from the outside
180° or 270° X Pull the rear door away from magnetic door
retainer.
X Close the left-hand rear door firmly from the
outside.
X Close the right-hand rear door firmly from the
outside.
Opening and closing

Opening/closing from the inside
Door retainer (example: right rear door)

X Open the rear door to about 45°.
X Pull and hold door retainer : in the direction
of the arrow.
X Open the rear door more than 90°, so that the
door retainer cannot engage.
X Release the door retainer and open the door
to an angle of 180° or 270°.
Release the lever on the inside of the right rear door
A white section on latch ; indicates that the
rear door is unlocked.
i You can only open the locked rear doors
from the inside if the child-proof locks have
not been activated.
X To unlock: slide latch ; to the left.
You will see a white marking.
Only the rear door unlocks. All other doors
that were previously locked remain locked.
X To open: pull opening lever : and open the
Magnetic door retainer unlocked rear door.
XWith the rear door opened to an angle of X Swing the rear door to the side until it
270°, push it against magnetic door engages.
retainer ; on the side wall. X To close: make sure that the left-hand rear
When the magnet on the rear door is in con- door is closed.
tact with magnetic door retainer ;, the rear X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handle to
door is held in this position. close it.
i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors: X To lock: slide latch ; to the right.
If door retainer : malfunctions while loading, The white section is no longer visible.
you can swivel it 180° against the spring force Only the rear door is locked. All other doors
and onto the door and engage it. The door that were previously unlocked remain
retainer remains in this position and will not unlocked.
swivel back to its original position.
Before closing the door, release door
retainer : from the detent and return it to its
original position.
Z
70 Side windows
Partition sliding door Opening/closing the partition sliding

door from the cargo compartment
G WARNING
If the open partition sliding door is not
engaged, it could move automatically while
the vehicle is in motion. This could trap you or
other persons. There is a risk of an accident
Opening and closing
and injury.
Close the partition sliding door before every
journey and make sure that it is engaged.
X To unlock: press the catch in the direction of

Opening/closing the partition sliding arrow =.
door from the cab The sliding door is unlocked.
X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direc-
tion of arrow :.
X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-
tion of arrow ; until it engages.
Side windows
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
X To open: turn the key counter-clockwise =. could become trapped between the side win-
The sliding door is unlocked.
dow and the door frame as the side window
X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direc-
moves. There is a risk of injury.
tion of arrow ;.
X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc- Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
tion of arrow : until it engages. dow during the opening procedure. If some-
The sliding door can be locked using the key. body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Side windows 71
G WARNING Resetting the side windows

If children operate the side windows they You must reset the side windows if there has
could become trapped, particularly if they are been a malfunction or an interruption in the volt-
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. age supply.
Activate the override feature for the rear side X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always X Pull the two power window switches and hold
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi- for approximately 1 second after closing the
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the side window.
Opening and closing

vehicle.
G WARNING Problems with the side windows

If persons, particularly children are subjected If you cannot completely open or close a side
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or window:
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even If there are no objects or leaves in the window
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the guide that prevent the sliding sunroof from clos-
vehicle. ing, there has been a malfunction or the on-
board voltage has been interrupted.
X Reset the side window (Y page 71).
Opening/closing the side window
Control panel (example: driver's door)

: Power window, left
; Power window, right
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press or pull button : or ; until the corre-
sponding side window has reached the
desired position.
If you press the switch beyond the pressure
point and then release it, the window opens
automatically. To stop the movement, press or
pull the switch again.
Z
72 Seats
Useful information rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could
This Operator's Manual describes all models as slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
well as standard and optional equipment of your abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
vehicle that were available at the time of going poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
to print. Country-specific variations are possi-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped injury.
with all of the described functions. This also Adjust the seat properly before beginning
applies to systems and functions relevant to your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
safety. is in an almost vertical position and that the
Read the information on qualified specialist shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
workshops (Y page 26).
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
across the center of your shoulder.
G WARNING
Seats
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
Important safety notes ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
G WARNING injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do event of an accident or when braking.
the following while driving: Always drive with the head restraints instal-
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, led. Before driving off, make sure for every
steering wheel or mirrors vehicle occupant that the center of the head
Rfasten the seat belt restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt you can wear the seat belt correctly.
before starting the engine. Observe the following points:
RPosition the backrest in an almost vertical
G WARNING position so that you are sitting virtually
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could upright. Do not drive with the backrest
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in reclined too far back.
RYour arms should be slightly bent when you
motion. This could cause you to lose control of
are holding the steering wheel.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
RAvoid seat positions that prevent the seat belt
Always make sure that the driver's seat is from being routed correctly. The shoulder
engaged before starting the engine. section of the belt must be routed over the
middle of your shoulder and be pulled tight
G WARNING against your upper body. The lap belt must
always pass across your lap as low down as
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
possible, i.e. over your hip joints.
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
RAdjust the head restraint so that it supports
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. the back of the head at eye level.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one RThe distance from the pedals should be such
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. that you can depress them fully.
If you swap over the head restraints for the front
G WARNING and rear seats, you will not be able to adjust the
The seat belt does not offer the intended level height and angle of the head restraints to the
correct position.
of protection if you have not moved the back-
Seats 73
Use the head restraint pad to adjust the head X To adjust the seat height: press or pull
restraint so that it is as close as possible to the lever ? repeatedly until you have reached
back of your head. the desired seat height.
Before the journey, make sure the head X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheel A
restraints have been correctly set for each of the towards the front.
vehicle's passengers (Y page 76). The front of the seat cushion is lowered.
X Turn handwheel A towards the rear.
The front of the seat cushion is raised.
Driver's and front-passenger seat i The lumbar support allows you to use the
backrest to increase the support provided to
the lumbar spine.
When the lumbar support is correctly adjus-

ted, it reduces strain on your back while driv-
ing.
X To adjust the lumbar support: turn hand-
wheel ; upwards.
This increases the support provided to the
lumbar region.
X Turn handwheel ; downwards.
This reduces the support provided to the lum-
bar region.
The seat suspension must be adapted to your
body weight. Adjust the seat suspension only
while the seat is unoccupied.
X To adjust the seat suspension: take your
weight off the seat.
: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Using handwheel B, set your body weight
; Lumbar support adjustment (40 to 120 kg) for optimum seat suspension.
= Seat backrest adjustment The seat suspension will become more rigid
? Seat height adjustment the higher you set the weight. It will then not
A Seat cushion angle adjustment move as far.
B Seat suspension adjustment
i Depending on the seat model, some adjust-
ments may not be available. Swiveling front seats
You can find information on rotating the front G WARNING
seats under "Swiveling front seats"
(Y page 73). If the driver's and front-passenger seats are
not engaged facing the direction of travel
X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
pull lever : up. while driving, the restraint systems may not
X Slide the seat forwards or back.
be able to provide the intended protection.
X Release lever :.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
X Slide the seat forwards or back until you hear
it engage. Engage the driver's and front-passenger seats
X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel = so they are facing the direction of travel
towards the front. before starting the engine.
The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi-
tion. ! When rotating the seats, make sure that
X Turn handwheel = towards the rear. there is sufficient space to do so.
The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.
Z
74 Seats
Move the seat forward or back first. This will Twin front-passenger seat
help to avoid contact with other parts of the
interior.
Push the handbrake lever down to the stop.
The parking brake or handbrake lever could
otherwise be damaged.
X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seat

cushion out of front anchorage :.
X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and out
of rear anchorage ;.
Seat release (example: front-passenger seat) X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.
The driver's seat and front-passenger seat can i You can stow various articles in the space
be rotated by 50° and 180°. under the twin front-passenger seat.
The seats engage when facing in the direction of X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down
travel as well as when facing in the opposite the seat cushion by the rear edge.
direction and also engage at an angle of 50° to X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-
the door. rest into rear anchorage ;.
X Make sure that the parking brake has been X Push down on the seat cushion at the front
engaged and that the handbrake lever has until it engages in front anchorage :.
been pushed down to the stop (Y page 131).
X Adjust the steering wheel to provide the nec-
essary space to rotate and adjust the driver's Folding seat
seat (Y page 77).
X Before rotating, push the front-passenger G WARNING
seat forwards (Y page 73). If the key is inserted in the partition sliding
X To rotate the seat: push lever : on the rear door, it may come into contact with the per-
of the seat towards the center of the vehicle son on the folding seat. There is a risk of
and rotate the seat slightly inwards.
injury.
The rotation device is released.
X Release lever :. Always remove the key from the partition slid-
X Turn the seat about 50° towards the outside ing door before a person sits on the folding
or inside to the desired position. seat.
Seats 75

Folding seat (example with partition sliding door) Locking mechanism lever on the feet of the bench
seat
X Remove key : from the partition sliding
door. X To remove the rear bench seat: swing all
X Pull grip ; of the catch in the direction of the levers : of the bench seat completely
arrow and fold seat cushion = up or down. upwards.
X Release grip ; of seat cushion = in the cor-
The bench seat moves back into the seat
responding end position. mounting recesses on the vehicle floor.
X Lift the bench seat upwards out of the seat
X Move the seat cushion = until it engages.
Grip ; of the catch must lie completely on mounting recesses.
the seat frame.
Rear bench seat (Passenger Van)

G WARNING
If the rear bench seat is not installed as descri-
bed or an unsuitable rear bench seat is instal-
led, the seat belts may not provide protection
injury.
Install the rear bench seat as described. Only i Do not exceed the maximum permissible
use rear bench seats that are approved for number of seats for models registered as
your vehicle by the distributor named on the passenger vehicles.
inside cover page. X To install the rear bench seat: observe the
prescribed installation position of the bench
! For safety reasons, the four-seat rear bench seat.
must only be removed or installed at a quali- Install the two-seat bench seat only on the
fied specialist workshop. driver's side.
Keep the seat bench mounting recesses in the X Check mounting shells ; on the vehicle
vehicle floor free from dirt and foreign objects. floor.
X Position the bench seat in the direction of
travel in corresponding mounting shells ;.
X Slide the bench seat forwards until you hear
the locking mechanisms engage.
X Check levers : on the anchorages of the
bench seat.
All levers : must be flush to the vehicle floor.
Z
76 Seats
Head restraints X To insert: insert the head restraint so that the

rod with the detents is on the left when viewed
G WARNING in the direction of travel.
If head restraints are not installed and adjus- X Press and hold release button :.
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection X Push the head restraint down until it engages.
injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking. Armrests
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at

about eye level.
Do not change over the head restraints for the

front and rear seats. Otherwise, it will not be
possible to correctly adjust the height and angle
of the head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as
possible to your head.
X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrest
upwards by more than 45° ;.
The armrest is released.
X Fold armrest = forwards to the stop.
X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to the
desired position.
X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, fold the
armrest upwards : by more than 90°.
Seat heating
Head restraint (example: luxury head restraint on G WARNING
the front-passenger seat)
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
: Release button
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
; Head restraint height
become very hot. The health of persons with
= Head restraint angle (luxury head restraints
only) limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
desired position.
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
X To lower: press release button : and slide
the head restraint down to the desired posi- Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
tion. repeatedly.
X To adjust the angle: hold the front part of the
luxury head restraint by the lower edge and ! When you leave your seat, do not place any-
tilt it to the desired position. thing on the seat and switch off the seat heat-
ing. Do not switch the seat heating on when
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the the seat is not occupied, e.g. when driving
stop. without a front passenger. The seat heating
X Press release button : and pull out the head may otherwise overheat, causing damage to
restraint. the seat.
Steering wheel 77
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.

The three red indicator lamps in the c button Before starting off, make sure the steering
show the activated heating level 1 to 3. wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
The system automatically switches down from wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
level 3 to level 2 after approximately
five minutes. G WARNING
The system automatically switches down from Children could injure themselves if they
level 2 to level 1 after approximately adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
ten minutes. injury.
At level 1, the seat heating remains in continu-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ous operation.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press the c button repeat- The steering wheel can still be adjusted if the
edly until the desired heating level has been key has been removed.
set.
X To switch off: press the c button repeat-
edly until all indicator lamps go out.
If the indicator lamps of the current heating level
in the c button flash, the seat heating has
switched off automatically. In this case, too
many electrical consumers are switched on or
the battery charge is not sufficient. The seat
heating will automatically switch back to the
current heating level when enough on-board
voltage is available again.
Steering wheel
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving: : Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment
; Steering column height
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
= Lever
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Z
78 Mirrors
X To set the steering wheel: swing lever = Adjusting manually

down until it engages.
The steering wheel is unlocked. X Before starting off, manually adjust the exte-
X Move the steering wheel to the desired posi-
rior mirrors in such a way that you can get a
good overview of road and traffic conditions.
tion.
X Pull lever = up to the stop.
The steering wheel is locked again. Adjusting electrically
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
Adjustment buttons and switches for setting the

mirrors
X Before pulling away, turn the key to position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 119).
X Press switch ; to position 1 for the left-hand
X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever : in exterior mirror or to position 2 for the right-
the direction of the arrow. hand exterior mirror.
X Press adjustment button : at the top, bot-
tom, right or left.
Exterior mirrors Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way that
you can get a good overview of road and traf-
Important safety notes fic conditions.
G WARNING i The exterior mirrors are automatically

heated at low outside temperatures.
The additional mirrors in the exterior mirrors
reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in
the mirrors are closer than they appear. You
could misjudge the distance from road users
driving behind you when changing lanes, for
instance. There is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore always determine the
actual distance from road users driving
behind you, e.g.:
Rby looking over your shoulder
Rby looking in the main mirror in the exterior
mirror.
Exterior lighting 79
Useful information Light switch
This Operator's Manual describes all models as Operation

well as standard and optional equipment of your
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the described functions. This also
applies to systems and functions relevant to
safety.
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers

1 Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime
Important safety notes running lamps
For reasons of safety, we recommend that you 2 $ Lights off
drive with the lights switched on even during the 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
daytime. There may be differences in operation instrument lighting
due to legal requirements and voluntary recom- 4 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
mendations in some countries. 5 N Fog lamps
6 R Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
Bulb failure indicator vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
The bulb failure indicator is only an aid. You are X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
responsible for the proper functioning of the or
vehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-functioning
X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press the
vehicle lighting puts the operating safety of the
vehicle at risk. light switch in to the stop.
For this reason, check the condition and func- The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and the
tion of your vehicle's lighting system and, if nec- high-beam flasher are operated using the com-
essary, that of the trailer before each journey. bination switch (Y page 81).
The bulb failure indicator monitors all of the
exterior lighting lamps, except the perimeter Low-beam headlamps
lamp and the trailer lighting. If a bulb fails, either
the b(Y page 33) indicator lamp lights up, or X To switch on: turn the key to position 2 in the
you will see a corresponding message in the ignition lock or start the engine.
display (Y page 185). X Turn the light switch to position L.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument
i Depending on the equipment, the bulb fail- cluster lights up.
ure indicator can fail for all lamps with the
exception of the turn signal lamps.
Daytime running lamps
You can activate/deactivate the daytime run-
ning lamps function using the on-board com-
puter.
This is not possible in countries where daytime
running lamps are a legal requirement.
80 Exterior lighting
The daytime running lamps function must be X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
activated using the on-board computer: turn the light switch to Ã.
Rvehicles with steering wheel buttons Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the park-
(Y page 171) ing lamps switch on or off automatically
depending on the ambient light.
Rvehicles without steering wheel buttons
(Y page 164) When the engine is running: if you activate the
"daytime running lamps" function using the
X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
on-board computer, the daytime running
$ position. lamps are switched on. The parking lamps and
The low-beam headlamps, parking lamps and low-beam headlamps also switch on or off
license plate lamp are switched on when the automatically, depending on the ambient
engine is running. The L indicator lamp in light.
the instrument cluster lights up.
When the low-beam headlamps are switched
i USA only: on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument
If you turn the light switch to the T or L cluster lights up.
position, the parking lamps or low-beam

headlamps switch on. If you turn the light
switch to the Ã position, the daytime run- Fog lamps/rear fog lamp
ning lamps remain switched on.
G WARNING
i Canada only: If you suspect that driving conditions will be
If you turn the light switch to the L posi- foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
tion, the low-beam headlamps are switched start your journey. Your vehicle may other-
on. If you turn the light switch to the T or
Ã position, the daytime running lamps wise not be visible and you could endanger
remain switched on. yourself and others.
Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
G WARNING only switch from position Ã to L with
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
beam headlamps may not be switched on Switching from Ã to L will briefly
automatically if there is fog, snow or other switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driv-
causes of poor visibility due to the weather ing in low ambient lighting conditions may
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an result in an accident.
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the igni-
L. tion lock or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or T.
Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid. i If your vehicle is only equipped with one rear
You are responsible for the vehicle lighting at all fog lamp, you must turn the light switch to
times. L.
Depending on ambient light, the rain and light
sensor automatically switches on the parking i When the light switch is set to Ã you
lamps, low-beam headlamps and the license cannot switch on the front and rear foglamps.
plate lamp. This excludes weather-related X To switch on the front fog lamps: pull the
impairments to visibility, such as snow, fog or light switch out to the first locking point.
spray. The green N indicator lamp on the light
If there is fog, snow or spray, turn the light switch lights up.
switch quickly from Ã to L. You could
otherwise briefly interrupt operation of the
headlamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: pull the light High-beam headlamps and high-beam
switch out to the second locking point. flasher
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch lights up.
X To switch off the front and rear foglamps:
push in the light switch to the stop.
The R and N indicator lamp on the light
switch go out.
Combination switch
Turn signal lamps

: High-beam headlamps
; High-beam flasher
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
switch on the low-beam headlamps
(Y page 79).
X Press combination switch : forwards.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
i In the Ã position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark and
: To indicate a right turn the engine is running.
; To indicate a left turn X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its nor-
X To indicate: press the combination switch in mal position.
desired direction : or ; until it engages. The K indicator lamp in the instrument
The combination switch automatically returns cluster goes out.
to its original position after large steering
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: turn
movements.
the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
X Pull the combination switch briefly in direc-
switch briefly in desired direction : or ;.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three tion of arrow ;.
times.
Headlamp range adjustment
Z
82 Exterior lighting
The headlamp range control is used to adapt the You should therefore ensure in this and simi-
downward angle of the headlamp beams in lar situations that the vehicle is visible from
accordance with the load on your vehicle. The
cone of light from the headlamps changes if the rear in accordance with the relevant
seats are occupied or if the cargo compartment national regulations, by using the warning tri-
is being loaded or unloaded. This can impair vis- angle, for instance.
ibility and cause glare to oncoming traffic.
You can only adjust the headlamp range while
the engine is running.
X Turn headlamp range control : to the cor-
responding position. The road ahead should
be lit up for 40 m to 100 m and the low-beam
headlamps should not cause glare to oncom-
ing traffic.
Select position g if the vehicle is unladen.
Cornering lamps
Hazard warning lamp switch
The cornering lamps improve the illumination of
the road over a wide angle in the direction you X To switch on/off: press the £ hazard
are turning, enabling better visibility in tight warning lamp switch.
bends, for example. If you have indicated a turn while the hazard
The cornering light function switches on warning lamps are switched on, only the turn
automatically, if: signal lamps on the side of the vehicle selected
Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than will light up.
25 mph (40 km/h) and you switch on a turn The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-
signal or turn the steering wheel. cally if:
Ryou are traveling at a speeds of between Ran air bag is deployed.
25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and Ryou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a
turn the steering wheel. halt from a speed of more than 45 mph
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short (70 km/h).
time, but is automatically switched off after no If the hazard warning lamps have been switched
more than 3 minutes. on automatically, press the £ hazard warn-
i If reverse gear is engaged the lamp on the ing lamp switch to switch them off.
opposite side of the vehicle switches on i The hazard warning lamps work even when
instead. the ignition is switched off.
Hazard warning lamps Headlamp cleaning system

G WARNING The headlamps are cleaned automatically with a
The rear exterior light will be covered if you: high-pressure water jet if the "Wipe with washer
fluid" function is activated (Y page 93) while
Ropen the rear doors by 90° the low-beam headlamps are on and the engine
Ropen the rear dropside. is running.
The vehicle will then be difficult for other road You can find information on refilling washer fluid
in the "Maintenance and care" section
users to see or will not be seen by them at all, (Y page 224).
particularly if it is dark or visibility is poor.
Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating Highbeam

Assist
General notes
X To activate: switch on the Highbeam Assist
You can use this function to set the headlamps function using the on-board computer
to change between low beam and high beam (Y page 171).
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
with their lights on, either approaching from the
X Press the combination switch beyond the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lamps from high beam to low beam. (Y page 81).
Highbeam Assist is active.
Once the system no longer detects any other
vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam head- The _ or indicator lamp in the
lamps. multifunction display lights up when it is dark
The system's optical sensor is located behind and the light sensor activates the low-beam

the windshield near the overhead control panel. headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
Important safety notes imately 22 mph (35 km/h) and no other road
users have been detected:
G WARNING The high-beam headlamps are switched on
Highbeam Assist does not recognize road automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
users: instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians imately 19 mph (30 km/h), other road users
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists are recognized or the roads are adequately lit:
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
In very rare cases, Highbeam Assist may fail to instrument cluster goes out. The _ or
recognize other road users who have lights, or
may recognize them too late. In this or similar indicator lamp in the multifunction
situations, the automatic high-beam head- display remains lit.
lamps will not be deactivated or will be acti- X To deactivate: move the combination switch
vated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position.
dent.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions The _ or indicator lamp in the
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in multifunction display goes out.
good time.
Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, Headlamps fogged up on the inside
weather or traffic conditions. Highbeam Assist
is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there
the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vis- is high atmospheric humidity.
ibility and traffic conditions. X Switch on the low-beam headlamps and drive
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be off.
restricted if there is: The level of moisture diminishes, depending
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or on the length of the journey and the weather
snow conditions (humidity and temperature).
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering If the level of moisture does not diminish:
the sensors X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Z
84 Interior lighting
Interior lighting Automatic control

Switching the dashboard lighting on/ The interior light comes on if you:
off Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the driver's or the front-passenger door
Overview Rremove the key from the ignition lock
The interior light switches off again automati-
cally.
If a door is left open, the interior lighting
switches off after approximately 20 minutes.
Switching the rear compartment

lighting on/off centrally (Passenger
Van)
Standard interior light

1 Interior light switched on
2 Interior light switched off
3 Automatic control system switched on
Rear compartment lighting switch

: To switch on the rear compartment lighting
; Automatic control
= To switch off the rear compartment lighting
You can switch the rear compartment lighting
on/off centrally on Passenger Vans that are
Interior lights in the overhead control panel equipped with convenience control.
: Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off There may also be a switch on the rear com-
; Switches the right-hand reading lamp partment lights that allows you to switch them
on/off on/off separately. If you switch off rear com-
= Right-hand reading lamp partment lighting =, the rear compartment
? Interior light light is switched off, regardless of the position of
its own switch.
A Switches the automatic control system on/
off If you move the rear compartment lighting
switch to center position ;, the automatic con-
B Switches the interior light on/off
trol system is switched on. When you open a
C Left-hand reading lamp door or unlock the vehicle, the rear compart-
If you manually switch on the interior lighting or ment lighting then goes on automatically. Once
reading lamps on the overhead control panel, the doors are closed, it switches off automati-
they switch off automatically after 20 minutes. cally after 20 minutes.
Interior lighting 85
Switching the rear/cargo compart- Motion detector

ment lamp on/off
G WARNING
The motion detector sends the invisible infra-
red radiation emitted by LEDs (light emitting
diodes).
These LEDs are classified as class 1M lasers
and can damage the retina if you:
Rlook directly into the unfiltered laser beam
of the motion detector for an extended
period
Rlook directly into the laser beam of the
motion detector using optical instruments,

Interior light with switch (example: Cargo Van)
e.g. eyeglasses or a magnifying glass.
1 Automatic control
2 To switch off the interior lighting
There is a risk of injury.
3 To switch on the interior lighting Never look directly into the motion detector.
The load compartment lighting is also switched

on by the motion detector in the load compart-
ment on panel vans equipped with this feature.
If the motion detector detects a movement in
the cargo compartment when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, the cargo compartment lighting
switches on for approximately two minutes.
The cargo compartment lighting can be
switched on by the motion detector within
four seconds if:
Rthe rear interior light switch (Y page 84) is set
Interior light with switch (example: Passenger Van to automatic control.
with rear-compartment air conditioning) Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is
1 To switch on the interior lighting applied and the brake pedal is not being
2 To switch off the interior lighting depressed
3 Automatic control or
Rthe selector lever is in position P on vehicles
For Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans without
convenience control, the switch for the interior with automatic transmission and the brake
lighting is on the rear interior light in the cargo pedal is not being depressed and
compartment/vehicle interior. Rthe vehicle has not been locked from the out-
If you move the switch to automatic control, the side using the key
rear/cargo compartment lamps go on when you The motion detector switches off automatically
open a door or unlock the vehicle. They switch if no change is detected in the vehicle for several
off automatically after 20 minutes, or when you hours, e.g. if a door is opened, if the ignition key
close the doors. is turned, etc. This prevents the battery from
becoming discharged.
Z
86 Changing bulbs
Changing bulbs ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type and
with the prescribed voltage
Important safety notes RProtect the bulbs from moisture when in use.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
G DANGER qualified specialist workshop.
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get RHave the LEDs and bulbs of the following
an electric shock if you remove the cover of lamps changed at a qualified specialist work-
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- shop:
tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. - the additional turn signals in the exterior
Never touch the parts or the electrical con- mirrors

- the high-mounted brake lamp
tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on
- LED daytime running lamps (Bi-Xenon
the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
headlamps)
cialist workshop.
- Bi-Xenon lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps)
- front fog lamps

G WARNING
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot sult a qualified specialist workshop.
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury. Front bulbs
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb. Overview of bulb replacement – bulb
types
! Make sure the bulbs are always securely The following bulbs can be replaced. Bulb types
installed. can be found in the legend.
If your vehicle is equipped with Bi-Xenon bulbs,
you can recognize this by the following: the cone
of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the
top to the bottom and back again when you start
the engine. For this to be observed, the low-
beam headlamps must be switched on before
starting the engine.
The bulbs and lamps are an essential compo-
nent of vehicle safety. You must therefore make
sure that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
RAlways switch off the vehicle's lighting sys-
tem before changing a bulb.
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
This will prevent a short circuit. : Turn signal: PY21W
RDo not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
; Daytime running lamps: W21W
your bare hands. Always use a clean, lint-free
= Low-beam headlamps: H7 55W
cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when
installing. ? High-beam headlamps: H7 55W
Even minor contamination can burn into the A Parking lamps/standing lamps: W5W
glass surface and reduce the service life of the
bulbs.
RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped or
that has scratches on its glass tube.
The bulb could explode.
ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps which have
been designed for this purpose.
Changing bulbs 87
Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps Example (halogen headlamps)

: Turn-signal: NAK 3457 ; Low-beam headlamp bulb holder
; Cornering light function: H7 55W = Bulb holder for high-beam headlamp

Vehicles with additional turn signals in the ? Bulb holder for parking lamp/standing lamp
exterior mirrors (halogen headlamps)
Additional turn signal lamp: HPC 16WY X Turn the corresponding bulb holder with
bulb ;, = or ? counter-clockwise and pull
Low-beam headlamps and high-beam it out of the lamp.
headlamps/cornering lamp X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb in such a way that its base
fits into the recess of the bulb holder.
X Insert the bulb holder with the bulb into the
lamp and turn it clockwise to tighten.
The bulb holder engages audibly.
X Place housing cover : into the opening and
turn in the opposite direction of the arrow.
X Close the hood.
Cornering light function/daytime run-

ning lamps
Example (halogen headlamps)
X Switch off the lighting system.
X Open the hood (Y page 218).
X Turn housing cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove.
Z
88 Changing bulbs
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder : and

screw it in clockwise.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn it
clockwise to tighten.
X Close the hood.
Additional turn signal lamp (all-wheel-

drive vehicles)
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: turn bulb holder with

bulb ; counter-clockwise and remove it.
Halogen headlamps: press the spring
catches of the bulb holder together and

remove the bulb holder with bulb ;.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: insert the bulb holder
with bulb ; into the lamp and turn clockwise.
Additional turn signals (example: Cargo Van and
Halogen headlamps: insert the bulb holder Passenger Van)
with bulb ; into the lamp.
The bulb holder with bulb ; engages audibly. The additional turn signals are mounted on the
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to the
side of the vehicle's front wings.
stop. X Switch off the lighting system.
The cap audibly engages. X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
X Close the hood (Y page 219). X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from the
Turn signal lamps bulb holder.
X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder and
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :.

X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb
holder :.
Changing bulbs 89
Rear bulbs (Cargo Van/Passenger Tail lamps

Van)
Overview of bulb types

X Open the rear door.
X Undo screws : and unclip the lamp lens in
the direction of the arrow.
X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.
Lights Bulb type

: High-mounted brake LED
lamp
; Brake lamp/tail lamp P21W/5W
= Turn signal lamps PY 21 W
? Tail lamps/standing R5W
lamps
A License plate lamp W5W
B Rear fog lamps (driver's P21W
side)
C Backup lamps P21W ; Retaining lugs
= Brake lamps
? Turn signal lamps
A Standing lamp/tail lamp
B Backup lamps
C Rear fog lamp
Z
90 Changing bulbs
X Release retaining lugs ; and take the bulb Rear bulbs (Cab Chassis)
holder out of the tail lamp.
X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it Overview of bulb types
bulb holder.
X Press the connector into the bulb holder.
X Insert the lamp lens.
To do this, clip the bulb holder into the three
holes provided at the side and tighten
screws :.
License plate lamp

Chassis (example: Cab Chassis)
Lights Bulb type

: Perimeter lamp/stand- R5W
ing lamp
; Tail lamps R5W
= Brake lamps P 21 W
? Turn signal lamps PY 21 W
A Backup lamps P 21 W
X Switch off the lighting system. B Rear fog lamps (driver's P 21 W
X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement into side)
recess ; and carefully pry off lamp lens :.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. C License plate lamp R5W
X Insert a new bulb.
X Align lamp lens : and clip it in so that it Tail lamps
engages.
: Screws
; Lamp lens
= Perimeter lamp/standing lamp
? Turn signal lamps
A Brake lamps
B Tail lamps
Changing bulbs 91
C Rear fog lamp Perimeter lamp (Cab Chassis)

D License plate lamp
E Backup lamps
X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
bulb holder.
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :.

Additional lamps
Additional turn signal lamp on the roof
Type of lamp: W 5 W
X Undo screws : and remove the lamp unit.
X Turn bulb holder ; and remove it.
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Screw bulb holder ; into the lamp unit.
X Carefully position the lamp housing and
tighten screws :.
Type of lamp: P 21 W
X Switch off the lighting system. Courtesy lights, rear compartment
X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
bulb holder.
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten screws :
again.
Bulb type: W5W

X Press in the latching spring of courtesy
light : with a suitable implement, e.g. a
screwdriver.
X Pry off courtesy light :.
X Disconnect cable connector =.
X Unscrew bulb holder ;.
Z
92 Changing bulbs
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.

X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Screw bulb holder ; into courtesy light :.
X Connect cable connector =.
The connector locking spring must engage.
X Align courtesy light : on the side and
engage.
Interior lighting
General notes Interior light with switch
! Have the bulbs in the overhead control Type of lamp: K 15 W
panel replaced at a qualified specialist work- X Switch off the interior lighting.
shop. You could otherwise damage the over- X Press in the catch springs of lamp housing :
head control panel. with a suitable object and pry off lamp hous-
ing :.
Front interior light X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ;
outwards and remove bulb =.
X Insert a new bulb =.
X Align lamp housing : on the left-hand side
and engage.
i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is
faulty, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Interior light without switch
Type of lamp: K 18 W
X Switch off the interior lighting.
X Press spring catch ; in the direction of the
arrow and lift off interior light :.
X Remove bulb = from the bulb holder.
X Insert new bulb =.
X Align interior light : on the right-hand side
and engage the spring catch.
Interior light without switch
Type of lamp: K 15 W
Rear interior light
Interior light with switch X Press in the catch springs of lamp housing :
with a suitable object and pry off lamp hous-
ing :.
X Open protective cover ?.
X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ;
outwards and remove bulb =.
X Insert new bulb =.
Windshield wipers 93
XFold protective cover ? back into place. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
XAlign lamp housing : on the left-hand side wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
and engage. washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is
faulty, consult a qualified specialist work- ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
shop. windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
Cargo compartment lamp dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
! Vehicles with rain/light sensor:
Switch the wipers off in dry weather. Other-
wise, dirt or optical effects may cause unde-
sired windshield wiper sweeps. This could

then damage the windshield wiper blades or
scratch the windshield.
The windshield will no longer be wiped properly
if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year (Y page 94), ideally in
spring and fall.
Type of lamp: W 10 W
X Undo screws : and remove the lamp lens.
X Press bulb ; into the bulb holder and
unscrew it counter-clockwise.
X Press new bulb ; into the bulb holder and
screw it in clockwise. Combination switch
X Position the lamp lens and tighten screws :. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
i Vehicles with LED cargo compartment X Turn the combination switch in the direction
lamp: if an LED is defective, consult a quali- of arrow ; to the appropriate setting
fied specialist workshop. depending on the intensity of the rain.
X Single wipe: push the combination switch
briefly to the pressure point in the direction of
Windshield wipers arrow :.
X To wipe with washer fluid: press the com-
Switching the windshield wiper bination switch beyond the pressure point in
on/off the direction of arrow :.
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when The detent positions of the combination switch
the windshield is dry, as this could damage correspond to the following wiper speeds:
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- 0 Windshield wipers off
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is I Intermittent wipe
dry. II Normal wipe
III Rapid wipe
Z
94 Windshield wipers
i Canada only: The rear window wiper switches on automati-

If the windshield wipers are switched on and cally if you engage reverse gear and the wind-
you stop the vehicle, the windshield wiper shield wipers are on.
speed is reduced. For example, if you have
selected level II and stop the vehicle, wiping
continues with intermittent wipe while the Replacing the wiper blades
vehicle is stationary. If intermittent wipe is
selected, the intervals become longer. G WARNING
Vehicles with a rain and light sensor: you If the windshield wipers begin to move while
can use level I as the universal setting. The you are changing the wiper blades, you could
rain and light sensor sets the appropriate wip- be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
ing frequency automatically, according to the injury.
intensity of the rain. When you stop the vehi-
cle, levels III and II are switched down to Always switch off the windshield wipers and
level I automatically. ignition before changing the wiper blades.
The windshield wiper will return to the original

level when you drive faster than 5 mph ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
(8 km/h). arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
You can adjust the sensitivity of the rain and
light sensor using the on-board computer Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
(Y page 173). wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Information on checking the washer fluid level
can be found in the "Maintenance and care" Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
section (Y page 224). you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Switching the rear window wiper on/ We recommend that you have the wiper
off blades replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
! Only hold the wiper blade by the wiper arm.
You could otherwise damage the wiper rub-
ber.
The windshield will no longer be wiped properly
if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall.
Combination switch
: è Rear window wiper switch
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock. Front windshield wiper arm with wiper blade
X Turn switch : to the corresponding position
Windshield wipers 95
X Fold wiper arm = away from the windshield.

X Set wiper blade : at right angles to the wiper
arm.
X Press both retaining clips ; together in the
direction of the arrow and swing wiper
blade : away from wiper arm =.
X Pull wiper blade : up and out of the retainer
on wiper arm =.
X Slide new wiper blade : into the retainer on
wiper arm =.
X Press new wiper blade : onto wiper arm =
until you hear retaining clips ; engage.
X Fold wiper arm = back onto the windshield
again.
Z
96 Windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wiper Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
jams. movement. The wiper motor has switched off.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch on the windshield wipers again.
The windshield wiper There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive.

does not move at all.
X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the wind-
shield/rear window.
Overview of climate control systems 97
Useful information

safety.
Overview of climate control systems

Climate control
Observe the recommended settings on the fol-
lowing pages. Otherwise, the windows could fog
up.
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances from the air.
Climate control is only operational when the
engine is running. The system only functions
optimally when the side windows are closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather. In order to cool the vehicle
more rapidly, switch climate control to air-
recirculation mode briefly. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired interior
temperature will be reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most par-
ticles of dust and completely filters out pollen.
A clogged filter reduces the airflow into the
vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
always observe the interval for replacing the
filter, which is specified in the Maintenance
Booklet. As it depends on environmental con-
ditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval
may be shorter than that stated in the Main-
tenance Booklet.
98 Overview of climate control systems
Heating control panel

Climate control
: Sets the temperature (Y page 102)

z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 103)
; K Sets the airflow (Y page 102)
= e Activates and deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 104)
? Sets the air distribution (Y page 102)
sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 103)
Information on heating
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec-
ommendations to help you use the heating opti-
mally.
RSet the temperature control to the middle
level. Only change the temperature in small
increments.
If you wish to heat up the vehicle interior as
quickly as possible, set the temperature con-
trol to the z maximum setting. When the
desired interior temperature has been
reached, turn the temperature control back
down in small steps.
ROnly use the settings for defrosting the wind-
shield briefly, until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up
as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-
recirculation mode. The indicator lamp in the
h button comes on when the function is
switched on.
Overview of climate control systems 99
Control panel for the air-conditioning system
Climate control
: Sets the temperature (Y page 102)
; Sets the airflow (Y page 102)
K Increases the airflow
I Reduces the airflow
= e Activates and deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 104)
? x Switches the reheat function (window air dehumidification) on and off (Y page 103)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 102)
sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 103)
B ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 102)
C Blower setting bar display
Information on the air-conditioning as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-
system recirculation mode.
ROnly use reheat mode until the windows are
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- clear again.
ommendations to help you use the air-condi-
tioning system optimally.
RSwitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function. The indicator lamp above the
rocker switch lights up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Only
change the temperature in small increments.
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up
100 Overview of climate control systems
Rear-compartment heating control panel

Climate control
: i Switches rear-compartment heating on and off (Y page 101)

; K Sets the airflow (Y page 102)
= Sets the temperature (Y page 102)
Information on rear-compartment
heating
For optimum climate control, set the tempera-
ture control to the middle level. Only change the
temperature in small increments.
Operating the climate control system 101
Control panel for rear-compartment air-conditioning system
Climate control
: Sets the airflow (Y page 102)
K Increases the airflow
I Reduces the airflow
; Sets the temperature (Y page 102)
= Blower setting bar display
? i Switches rear-compartment air-conditioning on and off (Y page 101)
Information on rear-compartment air Vehicle with heating

conditioning X To switch on: set airflow control ; down to
at least level 1 (Y page 99).
For optimum climate control, set the tempera-
ture control to the middle level. Only change the X To switch off: set airflow control ; up to the
temperature in small increments. 0 position (Y page 99).
Vehicle with air conditioning
X To switch on: press the K button.
Operating the climate control system The blower speeds are shown in bars next to
Switching the climate control on/off the button.
X To switch off: press the I button and,
Important information after reaching the lowest blower speed, press
it again.
When the climate control is switched off, air
intake and air circulation also stop. Only use this
setting for a brief period. Otherwise, the win- Activating/deactivating rear-compart-
dows could fog up. ment climate control via the control
panel
Activating/deactivating climate con- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
trol via the control panel
102 Operating the climate control system
Vehicle with rear-compartment heating/ Increasing and reducing temperature in

rear-compartment air conditioning the rear compartment via the control
X To switch on/off: press the i switch. panel
If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,
the rear-compartment heating/rear-com- Only change the temperature in small incre-
partment air conditioning is switched on. ments.
X Switch on climate control (Y page 101).
X Turn rear-compartment temperature control
Switching the cooling with air dehu- = (Y page 100) or rear-compartment air-
conditioning system ; (Y page 101) clock-
midification function on/off wise to increase or counterclockwise to
reduce the temperature.
Important information
i Vehicles with additional air conditioning and
If you switch off the "Cooling with air dehumid- heating in the rear compartment: if you set
ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will the temperature control to the center posi-
not be cooled (in warm weather) or dehumidi- tion, only one of the two climate control sys-
fied. The windows could fog up more quickly. tems works in the rear compartment and in
The cooling with air dehumidification function is air-recirculation mode (Y page 104).
Climate control
only available when the engine is running. The

air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified
according to the temperature selected. Setting the air distribution
Condensation may appear on the underside of
the vehicle when in cooling mode. This is normal Air distribution settings
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
The air distribution symbols have the following
meanings:
Switching on and off
m Directs air through the center and side
Vehicle with air conditioning air vents
X Press the ¿ button. s Directs air to the windshield and the air
If the indicator lamp in the button lights up, z vents
cooling with air dehumidification is switched q Directs air to the windshield, the air
on. vents and into the footwell
r Directs air to the air vents and into the
footwell
Setting the temperature
Adjusting
Increasing and reducing temperature in
the front compartment via the control X Switch on climate control (Y page 101).
panel X Set air-distribution control ? for the heating
(Y page 98) or air-conditioning system A
Only change the temperature in small incre- (Y page 99) to the corresponding symbol.
ments. Start at the center position, or at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Setting the airflow
X Turn temperature control : clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to reduce the X Switch on climate control (Y page 101).
temperature (Y page 99). X Vehicle with heating/rear-compartment
heating: set airflow control ; of the heating
(Y page 98) or of the rear-compartment heat-
ing (Y page 100) to the desired level.
X Vehicle with air conditioning/rear-com-
partment air conditioning: press the I
Operating the climate control system 103
button to reduce or the K button to Clearing condensation from the win-

increase the airflow. dows
The blower speeds are shown in bars next to
the buttons. Windows fogged up on the inside
You should only select this setting until the win-
dows are clear again.
Defrosting the windows
X Vehicle with window heating: switch on the
You can use the "defrosting" function to defrost front (Y page 104) and/or rear window
the windshield or to demist the inside of the defroster (Y page 104) .
windshield and the side windows. X Switch on climate control (Y page 101).
Only use the following settings until the win- X Switch off air-recirculation mode
dows are clear again. (Y page 104).
X Vehicle with window heating: switch on the
Vehicle with heating
front (Y page 104) and/or rear window
defroster (Y page 104) . X Set temperature control : to a higher tem-
X Switch on climate control (Y page 101). perature (Y page 98).
X Set airflow control ; to a higher blower set-
Climate control
Vehicle with heating
ting. It should be set at least to level two
X Set temperature control : and airflow con- (Y page 98).
trol ; to z (Y page 98). X Set air-distribution control ? to s z
X Set air-distribution control ? to s z (Y page 98).
(Y page 98). i If the windows still fog up, set the control as
X Close the center air vents (Y page 105) and described for defrosting (Y page 103).
the air outlets for the headroom and the rear Vehicle with air conditioning
compartment (Y page 106).
X Direct the side air vents towards the side win- X Activate cooling with air dehumidification
dows and open the defroster vents for the (Y page 102).
side windows (Y page 106). X Press the ¨ button (Y page 99).
Reheat mode is activated. The indicator lamp
Vehicle with air conditioning in the switch lights up.
X Set temperature control : to To deactivate reheat mode, press the ¨
z (Y page 99). button again. The indicator lamp in the button
X Press the K button until the maximum goes out.
blower output is reached.
All bars in the display next to the button light Windows fogged up on the outside
up.
X Set air-distribution control A to s z You should only select this setting until the
(Y page 99). windshield is clear again.
X Close the center air vents (Y page 105) and X Switch on the windshield wipers (Y page 93).
the air outlets for the headroom and the rear X Switch on climate control (Y page 101).
compartment (Y page 106). X Adjust air distribution to the footwell
X Direct the side air vents towards the side win- (Y page 102).
dows and open the defroster vents for the X Close the air vents (Y page 105).
side windows (Y page 106).
104 Operating the climate control system
Window heating Rear window defroster

Windshield heater
Rear window defroster switch

The rear window defroster consumes a lot of
Windshield heater switch power. You should therefore switch it off as
The windshield heater consumes a lot of power. soon as the window is clear. The rear window
Climate control
You should therefore switch it off as soon as the heating otherwise only switches off automati-
windshield is clear. The windshield heating oth- cally after 12 minutes.
erwise switches off automatically after X Start the engine.
5 minutes. X To activate and deactivate: press the |
X Start the engine. button.
X To switch on/off: press the z switch. The indicator lamp in the | button comes
The indicator lamp in the z button comes on when the rear window defroster is
on when the windshield heating is switched switched on.
on. If the indicator lamp in the | rear window
If the indicator lamp in the z windshield defroster button flashes, the on-board voltage is
heating button flashes, the on-board voltage is too low. The rear window defroster has switched
too low. The windshield heating has switched off off prematurely or cannot be activated.
prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not
X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior light-
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting.
ing. If enough on-board voltage is available again
If enough on-board voltage is available again within 30 seconds, the rear window heating
within 30 seconds, the windshield heating auto- automatically switches on again. It otherwise
matically switches on again. It otherwise remains switched off.
remains switched off.
Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off
When you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows could fog up more quickly, in particular
at low outside temperatures. Only switch on air-
recirculation mode for a short time.
You can deactivate the intake of fresh air if
unpleasant odors enter the vehicle from out-
side. The air inside the vehicle will only be cir-
culated.
Adjusting the air vents 105
Heating and air-conditioning system On vehicles with a rear-compartment air-condi-

tioning system, you can also adjust the air vents
Air-recirculation mode switches off automati- in the roof duct.
cally after about 10 to 30 minutes, depending on
the outside temperature. i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the
sliders of the center air vents to the center
position.
X To activate/deactivate: press the e but-
ton. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
If the indicator lamp in the e button lights through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
up, air-recirculation mode is activated. please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood free of
Rear-compartment heating and rear- blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the vents or the ventilation grilles
compartment air-conditioning system
in the vehicle interior.
On vehicles with rear-compartment heating and
a rear-compartment air-conditioning system,
you can activate or deactivate air-recirculation Setting the center air vents
mode for the rear-compartment climate control.
Climate control
X To activate: set the temperature control of
rear-compartment heating = (Y page 100) or
rear-compartment air conditioning system ;
(Y page 101) to the center position.
Only one of the two climate control systems in
the rear compartment is activated and is in
air-recirculation mode.
X To deactivate: turn the temperature control
of rear-compartment heating = (Y page 100)
or rear-compartment air-conditioning sys-
tem ; (Y page 101) clockwise or counter- : Center air vent, left
clockwise. Only change the temperature in
small increments. ; Center air vent, right
= Thumbwheel for center air vent, right
? Thumbwheel for center air vent, left
Adjusting the air vents X To open: turn thumbwheel = to the left or
thumbwheel ? to the right.
Important safety notes X To close: turn thumbwheel = to the right or
thumbwheel ? to the left.
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
The center and side air vents are adjustable.
Z
106 Operating the auxiliary heating system
Setting the side air vents Adjusting the air vents in the roof duct
! Always leave at least one air vent open.
If the rear-compartment air conditioning is
switched on and all the air vents are closed,
the air-conditioning system may be damaged.
Side air vent (example: right-hand side of the vehi-

cle)
X To open: turn thumbwheel = of side air
vents : upward.
Climate control
X To close: turn thumbwheel = of side air On vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-
vents : downward. tioning, adjustable air vents are integrated into
the roof duct.
i If the ® symbol can be seen on thumb-
wheel =, defroster vent ; is open. X To adjust the airflow: open or close the air
flap in air vents : as needed.
X To adjust the air distribution: turn air
Adjusting air vents for the passenger vent : to the desired position.
compartment
Operating the auxiliary heating sys-
tem
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, for example in
enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in
Air vents (example: right-hand side of the vehicle) snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
You can use the air vents to ventilate the vehicle Switch the auxiliary heating off in enclosed
interior on the left and right, in the rear and the spaces without extraction systems, e.g. in
headroom. garages. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and
X To open: for the right-hand side of the vehi- you have to leave the auxiliary heating run-
cle, turn thumbwheel ; to the left or for the ning, keep the exhaust pipe and the area
left-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel : around the vehicle free of snow. To ensure an
to the right.
adequate supply of fresh air, open a window
X To close: for the right-hand side of the vehi-
on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into
cle, turn thumbwheel ; to the right or for the
left-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel : the wind.
to the left.
Operating the auxiliary heating system 107
G WARNING system when the engine is running and the out-

side temperature is low.
When the auxiliary heating is switched on,
You can use the auxiliary heating at an outside
parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g. temperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †). At an outside
the exhaust system. temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the auxiliary
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or heating system and the heater booster function
twigs may ignite if they come into contact switch off automatically.
with:
Rhot parts of the exhaust system Hot-water auxiliary heating
Rthe exhaust gas itself
There is a risk of fire.
Heating time
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, The heating time when operating the auxiliary
make sure that: heating with the vehicle is stationary without the
engine running depends on the outside temper-
Rno flammable materials come into contact ature and the electrical consumers switched on.
with hot vehicle components
Outside Heating Possible startup
Climate control
Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the tempera- time procedures
exhaust pipe unhindered ture
Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact
Above Approx. 6
with flammable materials. 23 ‡ 20 minutes
(Ò5 †)
! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least once a
month for approximately 10 minutes. The 23 ‡ Approx. 3
auxiliary heating could otherwise be dam- (Ò5 †) to 40 minutes
aged. 5‡
(Ò15 †)
! Make sure that the flow of hot air is not
blocked. The auxiliary heating will otherwise Below 5 ‡ Approx. 2
overheat and switch off. (Ò15 †) 50 minutes
Your vehicle may be equipped with either an
auxiliary hot-water heater or an auxiliary warm- You can then switch on the auxiliary heating
air heater. Adjustment and operation of the: again.
Rhot-water auxiliary heater is done via the on- If you do not start the engine for a while, the total
board computer and with the auxiliary heating duration of heating is limited to a maximum of
button in the control panel (Y page 108) or 120 minutes to protect the starter battery.
with the remote control (Y page 109). Switching on the auxiliary heating is then auto-
Rauxiliary warm-air heater is done via the timer
matically disabled. You can, for example, switch
on the auxiliary heating without the engine run-
above the overhead control panel
ning if the outside temperature is Ò5 ‡ (Ò20 †) a
(Y page 114).
maximum of two times. If you try it again, the
The auxiliary heating works independently of the indicator lamps in the y button
engine and supplements the climate control (Y page 108) flash alternately for approximately
system in the vehicle. The auxiliary heating 2 minutes to signal switch-on interlock. The aux-
heats the air in the vehicle interior to the tem- iliary heating cannot be switched on without
perature set. starting the engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hot-water aux- When the condition of charge of the starter bat-
iliary heater, the auxiliary heating also keeps the tery is sufficient again, the switch-on interlock
coolant warm. This way, the load on the engine will be deactivated. To charge the starter bat-
is minimized and fuel is saved. tery, let the engine run. The engine run time
The heater booster function (Y page 111) of the required to reach the necessary condition of
auxiliary heating supports the climate control charge depends on the outside temperature and
on the electrical consumers switched on.
Z
Outside tempera- Engine runtime interior to the temperature that you have set.
ture The blower switches to the first level.
X To deactivate the auxiliary heating: press
Above 32 ‡ (0 †) at least 10 minutes the upper section of the y switch.
32 ‡ (0 †) to 14 ‡ at least 15 minutes or
(Ò10 †) X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0.
The red indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Below 14 ‡ (Ò10 †) at least 20 minutes The auxiliary heating operates for another
2 minutes and then switches off automati-
Before switching on cally.
X Check the fuel level and top up if necessary.

The auxiliary heating is operated directly
Selecting a switch-on time
using the vehicle's fuel. The tank must be at
least a quarter full to ensure that the auxiliary Important information
heating functions. You can use the on-board computer to define up
X Switch on climate control (Y page 101). to three switch-on times, one of which can be
selected.
Climate control
X Set the temperature control to the desired

temperature (Y page 102). The yellow indicator lamp in the y button
X Set the air distribution as required
goes out after 30 minutes, if you:
(Y page 102). Rhave selected the switch-on time and
X Open the center (Y page 105) and side air Rturn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock
vents (Y page 106) and set them to the middle
position. On-board computer without steering
wheel buttons
i The auxiliary heating automatically switches X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
to heater booster mode after the engine is
started. X Press the y button.
The y symbol flashes in the display.
Operating with the button (control or
panel) X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument
cluster repeatedly until the y symbol
flashes in the display.
X Use the f or g buttons on the instrument
cluster to select the switch-on time 1 to 3.
The switch-on time selected is displayed.
X Wait 10 seconds for the standard display to
appear.
The switch-on time is selected. The yellow
indicator lamp in the y button lights up.
If you do not preselect a switch-on time, and
--:-- is shown in the display, this means that
the automatic switch-on mode is switched
off. The yellow indicator lamp in the y
i Switch the heater booster function on or off button goes out.
with the ¢ button (Y page 111).
X To activate the auxiliary heating system:
press and hold the upper section of the y
switch for longer than 2 seconds.
The red indicator lamp in the button lights up.
The auxiliary heating heats or ventilates the
On-board computer with steering wheel X Press the 9 button.

buttons The display shows the Minutes menu.
X Use the W and X buttons to set the
minutes.
X Press the V button.
The switch-on time is set and selected.
Operation with the remote control

Important information
You can switch the auxiliary heating on/off and
X Press the y button. set the operating duration using the remote con-
The Aux. heat submenu is shown in the dis- trol. You can use up to 4 remote control units on
play. the vehicle. These must be synchronized for the
If no switch-on time has been selected, the receiver in your vehicle (Y page 110).
selected switch-on time is highlighted or The remote control has a maximum range of
Timer off is highlighted. approximately 600 meters. This range is
Climate control
i You can also access the Aux. heat. sub- reduced by:
menu via the Settings (Y page 168) menu. Rsources of interference
X Use the W or X button on the steering Rsolid objects between the remote control and
wheel to select the desired switch-on time. the vehicle
Use the Timer off setting to deactivate Rthe remote control being in an unfavorable
automatic switch-on. position in relation to the vehicle
X Press the V button on the steering wheel. Rtransmitting from an enclosed space
The switch-on time is selected. The yellow
indicator lamp in the y button lights up. Overview of the remote control
Setting the switch-on time

X Use the same method to select a switch-on
time as described in the "Preselecting a
switch-on time" section.
On-board computer without steering wheel
buttons
X Press the 9 reset button on the instrument
cluster.
The hour display flashes.
X Use the f and g buttons on the instrument
: Indicator lamp
cluster to set the hours.
; To confirm settings
X Press the 9 reset button
= To switch the remote control on/off, set the
The minute display flashes. operating duration or end or cancel settings
X Use the f and g buttons to set the minutes.
The switch-on time is set and selected. Indicator lamp : lights up in various ways to
show different operating modes:
On-board computer with steering wheel but-
tons Signaling Meaning
X Press the 9 button on the steering wheel. Lights up red Remote control switched on
The display shows the Hours menu.
X Use the W and X buttons on the steer- Data transfer
ing wheel to set the hours.
Z
Signaling Meaning Changing the operating duration

X Switch on the remote control.
Flashes red Auxiliary heating switched X When indicator lamp : flashes red, press
off Ü and b simultaneously.
Lights up Auxiliary heating switched Indicator lamp : flashes green.
green on X Press the Ü button repeatedly until the
desired operating duration is shown.
Flashes green Change operating duration R20 minutes
active
Indicator lamp : flashes green twice.
Flashes alter- Remote control in synchro- R30 minutes
nately red and nizing mode Indicator lamp : flashes green three
green times.
R40 minutes
i When the remote control battery is weak, Indicator lamp : flashes green four times.
indicator lamp : flashes red rapidly. Replace X Press the b button.
the remote control battery (Y page 111).
During data transmission, indicator lamp :
Climate control
You can find information on further lamp sta- lights up red.

tuses in the "Problems with the hot-water aux- If indicator lamp : emits two long, green
iliary heater" section (Y page 113). flashes, the selected operating duration is
Switching the remote control on/off stored.
The remote control switches to standby mode
i If no adjustment is made, indicator lamp :
flashes six times and the remote control goes
after 10 seconds. Indicator lamp : goes out.
into standby mode.
X To switch on: press and hold the Ü button
until indicator lamp : lights up red. Synchronizing the remote control
If a connection between the remote control X Press the y auxiliary heating button in the
and the receiver in the vehicle has been estab- control panel (Y page 108) for longer than
lished and indicator lamp :: 10 seconds.
Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating is switched When you press and hold the y button, the
off. red indicator lamp lights up in the button.
Rlights up green, the auxiliary heating is When the red indicator lamp in the y but-
switched on. ton flashes, the receiver in the vehicle is ready
X To switch off: press and hold the Ü but- for synchronizing.
ton until indicator lamp : goes out. X Press and hold the Ü remote control but-
ton until indicator lamp : lights up red.
Switching the auxiliary heating on/off If there is an active connection between the
X Switch on the remote control. remote control and the receiver, indicator
lamp : flashes alternately red and green.
X To switch on: when indicator lamp : flashes The remote control is in synchronizing mode.
red, press the b button.
During data transmission, indicator lamp : i If you press the Ü button again on the
lights up red. remote control after starting synchronization,
you will only synchronize this remote control
When indicator lamp : lights up green, the
unit with the receiver. Any other remote con-
auxiliary heating is switched on.
trol units that were synchronized will be
X To switch off: when indicator lamp : lights cleared. Indicator lamp : flashes alternately
up green, press the b button. red and green (very slowly).
lights up red. X Press the b button on the remote control.
When indicator lamp : flashes red, the aux- lights up red.
iliary heating is switched off.
When remote control indicator lamp : emits
two long green flashes, the selected operat-
ing time is synchronized. The indicator lamp in After switching off, the auxiliary heating oper-
the y auxiliary heating button goes out. ates for about another 2 minutes and then
switches off automatically.
Switching the heater booster function
on/off Replacing the remote control battery
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Climate control
Vehicles with auxiliary heating Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
Vehicles with heater booster function collection point for used bat-
At outside temperatures of up to 39 ‡ (4 †) the teries.
fuel-fired heater booster system heats the vehi-
cle interior as quickly as possible when the If the indicator lamp on the remote control
engine is running. flashes red rapidly, the remote control battery is
The auxiliary heating automatically switches to discharged. You should replace the remote con-
heater booster mode after the engine is started. trol battery.
At an outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the You need a battery of the type CR2430, which
auxiliary heating system and the heater booster can be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
function switch off automatically. shop.
If you switch off the engine without switching off
the heater booster function, the system will be
switched on the next time the engine is started
(memory function).
i Switch the auxiliary heating on or off with
the y button (Y page 108).
X To switch on/off: press the ¢ button.
If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,
the heater booster function is switched on.
Z
X Remove battery cover ; using a suitable

implement, e.g. a coin, by turning it counter-
clockwise.
X Check the seal on battery cover ; for dam-
age and, if necessary, replace.
X Remove old batteries =.
Climate control
X Insert new, clean battery = into the battery

tray with the positive pole facing upwards.
Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
X Position battery cover ; so that mark : on
the raised area points between two
recesses ?.
X Turn battery cover ; using a suitable imple-
ment, e.g. a coin, clockwise to the stop.
X Check all the functions of the remote control
(Y page 109).
Problems with the hot-water auxiliary heating

The indicator lamp on The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is not
the remote control possible.
flashes red rapidly. X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 111).
The indicator lamp on There is no connection between the remote control and the receiver in
the remote control the vehicle.
flashes red and green in X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the remote
rapid succession. control higher or to the side.
X Move closer.
If you cannot establish a connection and the auxiliary heating is
switched on, it can then only be deactivated using the y button
(Y page 108).
or
Climate control
Several remote controls are being used at the same time.
X Switch on the remote control again after a short while
(Y page 110).
or
The remote control is not synchronized.
X Synchronize the remote control (Y page 110).
The indicator lamp on The remote control is being synchronized.

the remote control X Wait until the remote control synchronization process is complete
slowly flashes red and (Y page 110).
green alternately.
The remote control for The remote control battery is discharged.
the auxiliary heating can- X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 111).
not be switched on.
The auxiliary heating The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heating
does not switch on. switches off automatically.
The auxiliary heating The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches off
switches off automati- automatically.
cally and/or cannot be X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
switched on.
X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines are
full.
or
The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unit
switches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is less
than 10 V.
X Have the alternator and battery checked.
or
Z

The fuse is blown.
X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.
X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
or
A malfunction has occurred.
X Switch the ignition on and off twice.
If the auxiliary heating still cannot be switched on, the heating device
is faulty.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The auxiliary heating is The coolant level is too low.
overheated.
Climate control
X Check the coolant level and add more coolant if necessary

(Y page 222).
Auxiliary warm-air heater Timer overview
Operation with the timer

G DANGER
If a switch-on time has been selected, the
auxiliary heating switches on automatically.
RIf the ventilation is insufficient, poisonous
exhaust gases can collect, in particular car-
bon monoxide. This is the case in enclosed
spaces, for example. There is a risk of fatal
injuries. Timer above the overhead control panel
: Program column
RIf highly flammable substances or flamma-
G Sets preselection memory 1 – 3
ble materials are nearby, there is a risk of a (Y page 115)
risk of fire and explosion. Sets weekday (Mon. – Sun.) (Y page 115)
Always deactivate the preselected switch-on ; Menu bar
times if you stop the vehicle in such or similar y Switches immediate heating mode
situations. on/off (Y page 115)
B Sets the program times
Use the timer to: (Y page 115)
Ractivate and deactivate immediate heating Ñ Sets the day, time and the operating
mode duration (Y page 115)
Rset up to three switch-on times ß Sets the heating level (Y page 116)
Rset the operating duration to between 10 and = Display panel for: time, heating level and
120 minutes or to continuous operation operating duration
Rset the heating level (preselected tempera- à Continuous operation mode active
ture) to a range between 10 and 30 ß Heating level set
? Selects options in program column : or X Using the Û or â button, set the

menu bar ; (forwards) minute value or select the à symbol for
Increases values continuous operation.
A Confirms a selection or setting X Press the b button.
B Status bar The operating duration is stored. The time is
shown.
y Heating mode activated
C Activates the timer Switching immediate heating mode
Cancels or ends settings in a menu on/off
D Selects options in program column : or X To switch on: press the Û or â button
menu bar ; (backwards) until the y symbol in the menu bar flashes.
Reduces values
X Press the b button.
Activating the timer The operation duration flashes in the display.
The timer switches to standby mode after i You can preset the default value that is
10 seconds. The display goes off. shown (Y page 115).
X Press and hold the Ü button until the X Using the Û or â button, set the
menu bar appears in the display and the time minute value (10 to 120) or select the à
Climate control
is shown. symbol for continuous operation.
Setting the day, time and operating dura- Immediate heating mode is activated. The
tion time and the y symbol appear.
You must reset the day, time, and default value X To switch off: press the Û or â button
for the operating duration: until the y symbol flashes in the menu bar,
and then press the b button.
Rduring initial operation
Immediate heating mode is deactivated. The
Rafter a voltage supply interruption (e.g. if the y symbol disappears.
battery has been disconnected) The auxiliary heating operates for another
Rafter a malfunction. 2 minutes and then switches off automati-
You can find information on malfunctions in the cally.
"Problems with the auxiliary warm-air heater" i If you switch off the ignition during immedi-
section (Y page 117). ate heating (operating duration 10 to
X Press the Û or â button until the Ñ 120 minutes), you also switch off the imme-
symbol in menu bar ; flashes. diate heating mode. The auxiliary heating
X Press the b button. operates for another two minutes and then
In program column :, the day selected switches off automatically.
flashes. If you have set continuous operation as the
X Press the Û or â button to set the operating duration and you switch off the igni-
desired day. tion, the auxiliary heating switches off auto-
matically after about 15 minutes. If, in the
The day selected is stored. The hour setting of remaining time, the ignition is switched on
the clock flashes. again, continuous operation of the auxiliary
heating continues.
X In the same way, set the hour and subse-
quently the minutes, then confirm by pressing Setting the preselection time
the b button.
The time is stored. Program column : dis- G WARNING
appears and the operating duration flashes. The auxiliary heating must not be operated if
i The operating duration set is the default set- there are highly flammable substances
ting for immediate heating mode. You can set nearby or in enclosed spaces without an
the operating duration from 10 to extraction system. Make sure that the auxili-
120 minutes or activate continuous opera- ary heating is not switched on automatically
tion.
by the timer in such places. If this possibility
Z
exists, deactivate the respective programmed Setting the heating level

time. You can set the heating level to a range between
10 and 30.
You can set three preselection times using the The heating level corresponds to a preselection
timer. temperature for the vehicle interior. This is a
After a malfunction or if the battery has been guide value and may, depending on the outside
disconnected, you must set the preselection temperature, differ from the interior tempera-
times again. You can find information on mal- ture.
functions in the "Problems with the auxiliary X Press the Û or â button until the ß
warm-air heater" section (Y page 117). symbol in the menu bar flashes.
X Press the Û or â button until the B X Press the b button.
symbol in the menu bar flashes. The heating level display flashes.
X Press the b button. X Using the Û and â buttons, set the
In the program column, the G preselection desired heating level to a range between 10
memory numbers appear. The selected pre- and 30.
selection memory flashes. X Press the b button.
X Press the Û or â button to select the The heating level is set and the y symbol
Climate control
desired preselection memory. appears.

The preselection memory is selected. The
days are shown.
X Set the day and time as described in the "Set-
ting the day, time and operating duration"
section (Y page 115).
The preselection time is stored. The program
column disappears. In the display panel, the
on message and the y symbol appear.
The operating duration flashes.
X Press the Û or â button to set the
minute value (10 to 120).
The operating duration for the preselection
time is saved. The time and number of the
selected preselection memory are shown.
i The preselection memory that will be acti-
vated next is underlined. Additionally, the day
that is set appears.
Deactivating the preselection time
X Carry out the steps as described in the "Set-
ting the preselection time" section.
If the y symbol in the status bar is shown:
X Press the Û or â button until the off
message in the display panel is shown.
The preselection time is deactivated. The time
is shown.
Operating the cargo compartment air vents 117
Problems with the auxiliary warm-air heater

The auxiliary heating The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heating
does not switch on. switches off automatically.
The auxiliary heating The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches off
switches off automati- automatically.
cally and/or cannot be X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
switched on.
X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines are
full.
or
The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unit
switches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is less
than 10 V.
Climate control
X Have the alternator and battery checked.
or
The fuse is blown.
X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.
X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Operating the cargo compartment air X To activate and ventilate: press the lower
vents section of the · switch.
The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into the
cargo compartment.
X To switch off: set the switch to the middle
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator,

you can ventilate and extract air from the cargo
compartment.
X To activate and extract air: press the upper
section of the ´ switch.
The roof ventilator removes used air from the
cargo compartment.
Z
118 Driving
Useful information Driving
This Operator's Manual describes all models as Important safety notes

vehicle that were available at the time of going G WARNING
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Driving and parking
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped safety-relevant functions are only available
with all of the described functions. This also with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
applies to systems and functions relevant to for example, the power steering and the brake
safety.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Breaking-in notes
G WARNING
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) If the parking brake has not been fully
New or replaced brake pads and brake disks released when driving, the parking brake can:
only reach their optimum braking effect after a
Roverheat and cause a fire
few 100 miles (a few 100 kilometers). Until then,
compensate for this by applying greater force to Rlose its hold function.
the brake pedal. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
For the service life and economy of your vehicle the parking brake fully before driving off.
it is crucial that you break in the engine with due
care. If you park the vehicle for more than
RTherefore, protect the engine for the first three weeks:
1000 miles (1500 km) by driving at varying Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
vehicle and engine speeds.
Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and high
Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat-
engine speeds during this period, e.g. driving
at full throttle. Do not exceed Ø of the max- tery main switch (Y page 118) and
imum speed for each gear. Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
RDo not change down a gear manually in order Otherwise, you need to check the battery's con-
to brake. dition of charge every three weeks, since
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal standby power consumption can drain the bat-
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). tery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V,
RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be
the battery must be charged. Otherwise, the
battery may be damaged by exhaustive dis-
engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when driv- charging.
ing in mountainous terrain.
Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase and charging the batteries under "Battery"
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the (Y page 227). You can obtain information about
vehicle to full speed. trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work-
i You should also observe these notes on shop.
breaking-in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Battery isolating switch
! Make sure that the key is in position 0 in the
ignition lock and wait at least 20 seconds
before disconnecting or connecting the bat-
Driving 119
tery isolating switch. You could otherwise X Pull connector : from the earth pin.
damage electrical system components. X Push connector : as far to the side as pos-
You can use the battery isolating switch to dis- sible so that it cannot make contact with the
connect the power supply to all your vehicle's earth pin.
consumers. This will prevent uncontrolled bat- All starter battery consumers are disconnec-
tery discharge caused by off-load current con- ted from the power supply.
Driving and parking

sumption.
If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary bat- Switching on the power supply
tery in the engine compartment, you will need to
disconnect both batteries. Only then is the elec-
trical system fully disconnected from the power
supply.
i Only switch the vehicle to de-energized
using the battery main switch if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period
Rit is absolutely necessary
After the power supply has been activated,
you will need to reset the side windows
(Y page 71).
Switching off the power supply X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
X Press connector : onto earth pin ; until
! When you clamp the connector under the you feel it engage and the lock inhibitor is
accelerator pedal, make sure that the con- released.
nector does not become damaged or dirty. It Connector : must be in full contact with
may otherwise not be possible to restore the earth pin ;.
electrical connection when the parts are reas- All consumers are reconnected to the DC
sembled. power supply.
Key positions
Battery main switch to the left of the center con-

sole
X Remove the key from the ignition lock and
wait for about 20 seconds.
g To insert and remove the key, lock the steer-
X Press button ; in the direction of the arrow
ing wheel
and hold.
1 To unlock the steering wheel, power supply
for some consumers (e.g. the radio)
2 To switch on the ignition. Power supply for
all consumers, preglow and drive position
3 To start the engine
Z
120 Driving
On vehicles with a battery main switch, you must depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
first switch on the power supply (Y page 118). ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
i To unlock the steering, move the steering risk of an accident.
wheel slightly while turning the key to position Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
1.
they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Driving and parking
When using floormats or carpets, make sure

that they are properly secured so that they do
Preparing for a journey
not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place
Visual check of the vehicle exterior several floormats or carpets on top of one
another.
X In particular, check the following components
on the vehicle, and on the trailer as necessary:
G WARNING
Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn signals,
brake lamps and wiper blades for dirt and Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
damage of the pedals, e.g.:
Rtires and wheels for firm seating, correct Rshoes with thick soles
tire pressure and general condition
Rshoes with high heels
Rtrailer tow hitch for play and security
Rslippers
The trailer coupling is one of the most
important vehicle parts with regard to road There is a risk of an accident.
safety. The separate instructions issued by Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
the manufacturer pertaining to operation,
usage of the pedals.
care and maintenance should be observed.
Rthat contour markings on attachments and X Secure the load as per the loading guidelines
bodies are in good condition (Y page 212).
X Rectify any noticeable defects before com- X Stow luggage items securely. Secure the load
mencing the journey. as per the loading guidelines (Y page 212).
X Make sure that the floormats and carpets are
Checks in the vehicle properly secured so that they cannot slip and
obstruct the pedals.
Emergency equipment and first-aid kit X Close all doors.
X Check the equipment to make sure that it is
accessible, complete and ready for use.
The first aid and breakdown assistance equip- Starting the engine
ment is in the front door stowage compartments
and behind the driver's seat. G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Vehicle lighting
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
X Check the lighting system with the aid of a is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
second person.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 86).
out sufficient ventilation.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when

Before driving off starting the engine.
G WARNING X Before starting the engine, make sure that:
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
Driving 121
Rall
the doors are closed. At extremely low outside temperatures you
Rall
the vehicle occupants are wearing their may then no longer be able to start the
seat belts correctly. engine. Have the malfunction rectified at a
Rthe parking brake is applied. qualified specialist workshop.
i If you depress the brake pedal before start- i Depending on the equipment installed, the
ing the engine, the pedal travel is short and vehicle either automatically locks centrally
Driving and parking

pedal resistance is high. after switching on the ignition or after pulling
If you depress the brake pedal again after away. The locking knobs in the doors drop
starting the engine, pedal travel and resist- down.
ance will be back to normal again. You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
Automatic door locking can be deactivated
(Y page 64).
Driving off
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
Gearshift pattern
j Park position with parking lock When engaging transmission position D or R,
k Reverse gear always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
i Neutral not simultaneously accelerate.
h Drive
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi-
XMove the selector lever to position P. cle is stationary. Otherwise, you could dam-
The display in the instrument cluster shows P: age the transmission.
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
(Y page 167) depressed.
Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons The selector lever lock is released.
(Y page 163) X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
i You can also start the engine in neutral N. On vehicles with a reverse warning feature,
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. when reverse gear is engaged a warning tone
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru- sounds to alert other road users
ment cluster lights up briefly. (Y page 122).
X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goes X Release the parking brake (Y page 131).
out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition The c indicator lamp in the instrument
lock and release it as soon as the engine is cluster goes out.
running. X Release the brake pedal.
i You can start the engine without preglow X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
when the engine is warm.
The preglow system is malfunctioning if the i After pulling away or switching on the igni-
% preglow indicator lamp lights up for tion, the vehicle automatically locks centrally.
approximately 1 minute: The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
Rafter the ignition is switched on
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
Rwhile the engine is running
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (Y page 64).
Z
122 Driving
Reverse warning device

G WARNING
Other road users may ignore or fail to hear the
warning tone of the reverse warning feature.
Driving and parking
There is a risk of injury if you fail to ensure that

the area in which you are maneuvering is
clear.
Make sure that there are no persons or
objects in the area in which you are maneu-
vering. It may be necessary to enlist the help
of a second person when maneuvering.
The reverse warning feature is a system

designed to assist you in ensuring the safety of
other road users.
A warning signal sounds to alert other road
users when reverse gear is engaged. The volume
of the warning tone can be reduced for night-
time driving.
X To reduce the volume of the warning tone:
engage reverse gear twice in quick succes-
sion.
The warning tone is now quieter.
i The warning tone sounds at a normal vol-
ume by default. The volume of the warning
tone has to be reduced each time you engage
reverse gear if necessary.
Driving 123
Problems with the engine

The engine does not There is air in the fuel system.
start. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting
Driving and parking

The starter motor can be to start the engine again.
heard. X Start the engine again.
Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attempts will
drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank has been run dry.
start. X Refuel the vehicle.
The starter motor can be
If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get into the
heard. The reserve fuel
fuel system. If the engine does not start after refueling, bleed the fuel
warning lamp is lit and
system as follows:
the fuel gage is at 0.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately
10 seconds.
X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.
If the engine does not start:

X Wait approximately 2 minutes.
X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.
X If the engine still fails to start, do not continue trying to start it.
The vehicle cannot be The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or an emissions-
driven at a speed relevant malfunction has occurred.
exceeding 5 mph This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas aftertreat-
(8 km/h). ment.
The yellow ; Check X Observe the messages in the display:
Engine lamp and the yel- Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 178)
low å DEF indicator
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons (Y page 187).
lamp2 light up.
The engine does not The battery isolating switch is switched off.
start. X Switch on the power supply (Y page 118).
The starter motor cannot
be heard.
2 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.
Z
124 Automatic transmission

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is too weak or discharged.
start. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 242).
The starter motor cannot
be heard. If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty.
Driving and parking
The engine does not The battery is discharged or faulty.

start. X Check the battery for damage.
The starter motor cannot X Charge the battery (Y page 232).
be heard.
Automatic transmission i Neutral

h Drive
The display in the instrument cluster shows the
G WARNING present selector lever position or the current
shift range:
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons
and you engage transmission position D or R,
(Y page 167)
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons
a risk of an accident. (Y page 163)
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate. Selector lever positions
! Vehicles with automatic transmission may B Park position

roll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro- This prevents the vehicle from rolling
longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when being away when stopped. Only move the
towed, will result in transmission damage. selector lever to P if the vehicle is
Towing (Y page 243) stationary.
You can only remove the key when
the selector lever is in this position.
Selector lever The selector lever is locked in posi-
tion P if the key is removed.
The parking lock should not be used
as a brake when parking. Always
apply the parking brake as well once
you have parked the vehicle.
C Reverse gear
Only move the selector lever to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear
Automatic transmission 125
A Neutral X To shift down: press the selector lever to the

left towards D–.
No power is transmitted from the The automatic transmission shifts to the next
engine to the drive wheels. Releasing gear down, depending on the gear currently
the brakes will allow you to move the engaged. The shift range is also restricted.
vehicle freely, e.g. by pushing.
i The automatic transmission does not shift
Driving and parking

Do not move the selector lever to N
down if you press the selector lever towards
while driving. The automatic trans-
D– while traveling at too high a speed. This
mission could otherwise be dam-
aged. protects the engine from overrevving.
X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever to
If ASR is deactivated or ESP® has
malfunctioned: only move the selec- the right towards D+.
tor lever to N if the vehicle is in dan- The automatic transmission shifts to the next
ger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. gear up, depending on the current gearshift
program. This also extends the shift range.
7 Drive X To derestrict the shift range: press and hold
The automatic transmission changes the selector lever towards D+ until D appears
gear itself. All forward gears are avail- in the display again.
able. The automatic transmission shifts from the
You can influence the gearshifts and current shift range directly to D.
shift gears yourself or limit the shift X To select the optimum shift range: press
range. and hold the selector lever to the left towards
D–.
The automatic transmission will shift to a
Changing gear range which allows easy acceleration and
deceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-
The 5-speed automatic transmission adapts to mission will shift down one or more gears.
your individual driving style by continuously
adjusting its shift points. These shift point
adjustments take into account the current oper-
ating and driving conditions. If the operating or Shift ranges
driving conditions change, the automatic trans- When the selector lever is in position D you can
mission reacts by adjusting the gearshift pro- restrict or derestrict the shift range for the auto-
gram. matic transmission.
When the selector lever is in position D, the X To extend and restrict the shift range:
automatic transmission selects the individual press the selector lever briefly to the right
gears automatically. This depends on: towards D+ or left towards D–.
Rany restriction in the shift range The display shows the selected shift range.
(Y page 125) The automatic transmission shifts only as far
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal as the relevant gear.
Rthe road speed i If the maximum engine speed for the restric-
ted shift range is reached and you depress the
accelerator pedal, the automatic transmis-
Touchshift sion will not shift up.
When the selector lever is in position D, you can

perform gearshifts yourself.
Z
126 Automatic transmission
Driving situations Towing a trailer

5 Use the braking effect of the engine X Drive at moderate engine speeds on steep
on steep downhill gradients and for uphill gradients.
driving: X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,
shift down to a shift range adapted to the
Ron steep mountain roads
Driving and parking
driving situation (Y page 125), even if cruise

Rin mountainous terrain control is activated.
Rin arduous conditions
4 Use the braking effect of the engine

on extremely steep downhill gradi-
ents and long downhill stretches.
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rlots of throttle: later upshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to the next
gear down, depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts up again.
Maneuvering
Maneuvering in a tight space:
X Control the vehicle's speed by braking care-
fully.
X Depress the accelerator pedal slightly and
evenly.
i You can shift back and forth between drive
position D and reverse gear R at low speeds
without applying the brakes. This can help
you, for example when rapidly maneuvering
the vehicle or rocking it out of snow or slush.
Refueling 127
Problems with the transmission

The transmission mal- The transmission is losing oil.
functions when shifting X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking

gear. workshop.
The acceleration charac- The transmission is in emergency mode.
teristics have deteriora- It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear R.
ted noticeably.
X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission does
X Depress the brake pedal.
not shift.
X Move the selector lever to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
In position D, the transmission shifts into second gear; in position R,
the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Releasing the parking lock manually X Remove implement ;.

X Re-install cover :.
In the event of a malfunction, it is possible to
manually release the selector lever from the i The screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit
lock in parking position P, e.g. to have the vehi- could function as the implement, for instance
cle towed away. (Y page 240).
Refueling
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
X Apply the parking brake.
before refueling.
X Remove cover :.
X Slide implement ; as far as it will go into the
opening.
G WARNING
X Push the implement in and simultaneously Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
move the selector lever out of position P. There is a risk of injury.
The selector lever lock is released. You can You must make sure that fuel does not come
now move the selector lever freely again until into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
it is returned to position P.
Z
128 Refueling
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel ! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from
barrels or containers.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-
observe the following: tem due to contaminated fuel.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately Further information on fuel and on fuel grades
Driving and parking
using soap and water. can be found in the "Technical data" section
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, (Y page 277).
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay. Refueling procedure
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-hand
noticed. There is a risk of fire. door when viewed in the direction of travel. It is
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline only possible to open the fuel filler flap when the
with diesel fuel. front door is open.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
H Environmental note X Switch off the auxiliary heating system
If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a (Y page 106).
X Open the front left-hand door first, and then
danger to persons and the environment. Do
the fuel filler flap.
not allow fuels to run into the sewage system,
X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors
the surface waters, the ground water or into
from entering the vehicle interior.
the ground.
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counter-clockwise,
remove it and let it hang from strap :.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
diesel engine. Even small amounts of gasoline
will cause damage to the fuel system and pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
engine. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out.
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acciden- X Replace tank filler cap ; on tank and turn
tally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the clockwise.
fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified
specialist workshop and have the fuel tank You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is
and fuel lines drained completely. closed fully.
X Open the front left-hand door first, and then
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the close the filler flap.
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
Refueling 129
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank cator, topping up may not be possible. Park
the vehicle in a warm place, e.g. in a garage,
If your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines or the until the DEF has become liquid again. Top-
fuel tank are defective. ping up is then possible again. Alternatively,
X Turn the key immediately to position 0 in the have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-
ignition lock and remove it. cialist workshop.
Driving and parking

X Do not restart the engine under any circum- i If you add DEF at temperatures below 12 ‡
stances. (Ò11 †) it is possible that the level is not
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. shown correctly due to the frozen DEF.
If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refueling Drive for at least 20 minutes (heating phase in
carry out the following steps: the tank activated) and then stop the vehicle
for at least 30 seconds. The level is then
X Before starting the engine: switch on the igni- shown correctly.
tion three or four times.
You will find further information on DEF in the
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock "Service products" section (Y page 277).
(Y page 119).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up briefly. Refueling procedure
X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goes
DEF filler neck
out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition
lock and release it as soon as the engine is Non-lockable DEF filler cap
running.
You can start the diesel engine without preglow
when the engine is warm.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

! Only use DEF in accordance with
ISO 22241. Never mix DEF with additives or
thin it with tap water. The exhaust gas after-
treatment may otherwise be damaged. Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment
Observe the MB Specifications for Service X To open: switch off the ignition.
Products, Sheet 352.0.
Damage that results from the use of additives
or tap water leads to the loss of the New X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and
Vehicle Limited Warranty. remove it.
! If DEF comes into contact with a painted or X To close: replace cap : on the filler neck and
aluminum surface, wash the surface off turn it clockwise.
immediately with plenty of water. You will hear a click when cap : is fully
closed.
! DEF is not a diesel additive and must not be X Close the hood (Y page 219).
mixed with fuel in the tank. Even small
amounts of DEF can cause engine damage.
Damage that results from the blending of DEF
will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limi-
ted Warranty.
i If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡
(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If the DEF
is frozen and there is an active warning indi-
Z
130 Parking
Lockable filler cap Parking

G WARNING
Driving and parking
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
X To open: switch off the ignition.
X Open the hood (Y page 218). G WARNING
X Remove tool ? for unlocking tank filler If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cap : from the footwell on the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
passenger side (Y page 240).
Rrelease the parking brake.
X Pull cover = up, turn 90° and release.
X Insert tool ? into hole ; of tank filler cap :. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and parking position P.
remove it. Make sure that tool ? remains in Rstart the engine.
tank filler cap : while doing so.
X To close: replace filler cap : and turn it ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
clockwise until closed. an accident and injury.
X Pull tool ? out of tank filler cap : and stow
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
with the vehicle tool kit in the footwell on the
front-passenger side. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X Pull cover = up over hole ; of tank filler
cap :, turn and release.
! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to the
X Turn tank filler cap :.
vehicle or damage to the drive train.
If tank filler cap : turns freely, the DEF tank
is closed. ! When the vehicle is parked, always remove
the key to prevent the battery from becoming
discharged.
On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,
switch off the power supply if the vehicle is to
be out of use for a longer period of time.
Parking 131
Always park your vehicle safely and according to When leaving the vehicle, always take the
legal requirements and secure it against rolling SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
away.
To ensure that the vehicle is properly secured
against rolling away unintentionally:
G WARNING
Rthe parking brake must be firmly applied
Driving and parking

If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
Rthe selector lever must be in position P and
the key must be removed from the ignition brake, the braking distance is considerably
lock longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the front increased danger of skidding and accidents.
wheels must be turned towards the curb Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
Rthe rear axle must be secured, e.g. with a cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
wheel chock, on steep uphill or downhill gra- apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
dients wheels lock, release the parking brake until
Use the wheel chock (Y page 132) to do so. the wheels begin turning again.
If you leave the vehicle parked for more than
three weeks:
Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat-
tery main switch (Y page 118) and
Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
Otherwise, you need to check the battery's con-
dition of charge every three weeks, since
standby power consumption can drain the bat-
tery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V,
battery may be damaged by exhaustive dis- The brake lamps are not illuminated when you
charging. brake the vehicle using the parking brake.
Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting As a rule, you may only apply the parking brake
and charging the batteries under "Bat- when the vehicle is stationary.
tery“ (Y page 227). You can obtain information
about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist X To apply the parking brake: pull brake
workshop. lever : up as far as the last possible detent.
The c warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
Parking brake i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, you
can then press lever : down to the stop.
G WARNING X To release the parking brake: on vehicles
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- with a folding brake lever, first pull brake
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: lever : up to the stop.
X Raise brake lever : slightly and press
Rrelease the parking brake. release knob ;.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the X Guide brake lever : down to the stop.
parking position P. The c indicator lamp in the instrument
Rstart the engine. cluster goes out.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
Z
132 Parking
Exceptionally, if the service brake fails, the park-

ing brake can be used to brake the vehicle in an
emergency.
X Emergency braking: press and hold release
button ; and carefully apply brake lever :.
Driving and parking
Switching off the engine

G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine. Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartment
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an X To remove the wheel chock on Cargo
accident. Vans/Passenger Vans: pull restraining
After switching off the engine, always switch cable : down a little and remove it from
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- retainer ;.
X Remove the chock.
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake. i When stowing the wheel chock, make sure
that restraining cable : is holding it securely
! If the coolant temperature is very high, e.g. in retainer ;.
after driving on hilly roads, leave the engine
running at idle speed for about two minutes
before turning it off.
This allows the coolant temperature to return
to normal.
X Stop the vehicle.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
P.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock
and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated. Wheel chock to the rear of the chassis on the left
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling side of the vehicle (example)
away (Y page 130). XTo remove the wheel chock on Cab Chas-
sis: pull the locking springs down and remove
the wheel chock.
Wheel chock i When stowing the wheel chock, make sure
that it is secured in the retainer with the lock-
Use the wheel chock or a similar object to pre- ing springs.
vent the vehicle from rolling away, e.g. when
parking or changing a wheel.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you park your vehicle for longer than
three weeks:
Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
Driving tips 133
Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat- more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
tery main switch (Y page 118) and of an accident.
Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
Otherwise, you need to check the battery's con-
dition of charge every three weeks, since
standby power consumption can drain the bat-
! Always observe the ground clearance of the
Driving and parking

vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehicles with
tery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V,
a step, ground clearance is further restricted.
Obstacles can damage the vehicle.
battery may be damaged by exhaustive dis-
charging. If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe-
cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, have
Be sure to observe the notes on disconnecting
another person direct you.
and charging the batteries under "Battery"
(Y page 227). You can obtain information about
trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work- Drive sensibly – save fuel
shop.
In order to save fuel, observe the following tips:
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
result of lack of use. In this event, consult a ommended tire pressure.
qualified specialist workshop. X Remove unnecessary loads.
X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-
ded.
Driving tips X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General notes
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-
G WARNING play.
The driver's attention to the road must always Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
be his/her primary focus when driving. For cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in moun-
tainous terrain.
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
Overrun cutoff
and stop before placing or taking a telephone
call. If you choose to use the telephone while If you are in overrun mode and take your foot off
driving, please use the hands-free device and the accelerator pedal, the fuel supply is cut off
only use the telephone when road, weather when the engine speed is out of the idle speed
control range.
and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Drinking and driving
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph G WARNING
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) driving are very dangerous combinations.
every second. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
G WARNING ment.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
safety-relevant functions are only available dent are greatly increased when you drink or
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, take drugs and drive.
for example, the power steering and the brake
Z
134 Driving tips
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow Speed limiter

anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs. G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
Emission control
Driving and parking
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There

G WARNING is a risk of accident.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There tire load rating and speed rating required for
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave your vehicle.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation. As the driver, you must find out about the max-
imum speed of the vehicle and the resulting per-
missible maximum speed of the tires (tire and
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
tire pressure). In particular, also observe the tire
the level of poisonous substances in exhaust
approval regulations for each country.
fumes within legal limits.
You must not exceed the speed limit for the tires
These systems only work optimally if they are
listed in the tire pressure tables. You can find
maintained exactly in accordance with the man-
information on tire pressures in the "Wheels and
ufacturer's specifications. Any work on the
tires" section (Y page 250).
engine should therefore be carried out by quali-
fied and authorized technicians at a Sprinter You can permanently limit the maximum speed
dealer. of your vehicle to 65 mph (105 km/h) or 75 mph
(120 km/h).
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. In addition, all specific We recommend that you have the maximum
maintenance work must be carried out at regu- speed programmed by an authorized Sprinter
lar intervals and in accordance with the service dealer.
requirements of the dealer listed here on the Before overtaking, take into consideration that
inside title page. Details can be found in the the engine speed limiter prevents the speed
Maintenance Booklet. increasing beyond the programmed maximum
speed.
Short journey
Driving abroad
! If the vehicle is predominantly used for
short-distance driving or is stationary for long Service
periods, this could lead to a malfunction in the
automatic cleaning function for the diesel par- An extensive network of authorized Sprinter
ticle filter. This can lead to blockage of the Dealers is also at your disposal when you are
diesel particle filter. This can also result in fuel traveling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear in
collecting in the engine oil and cause engine mind that service facilities or replacement parts
failure. may not always be immediately available. You
can obtain a list of workshops at any authorized
Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances, Sprinter Dealer.
drive on a highway or an inter-urban road for
20 minutes every 300 miles (500 km). This facil-
itates the diesel particle filter's burn-off proc- Fuel
ess. In some countries, only fuels with a higher sulfur
content are available.
Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Infor-
mation on fuel (Y page 277).
Driving tips 135
Low-beam headlamps increases the stopping distance and can even

If you are traveling in countries where vehicles cause the braking system to fail. There is a
are driven on the opposite side of the road to risk of an accident.
that in which the vehicle is registered, you will Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
need to: depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
Driving and parking

Rhave the halogen headlamps partially masked pedal at the same time.
Rhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps set to symmet-
rical low beam ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
This prevents glare to oncoming traffic and no results in excessive and premature wear to
longer illuminates the edge of the road to the the brake pads.
same height and distance.
Have the headlamps masked or adjusted at a Downhill gradients
qualified specialist workshop before you cross
the border, but as close to it as possible. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
When you return from your journey, and as close
the brake pads.
to the border as possible, you will need to:
Rremove the adhesive surfaces from your hal-
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
ogen headlamps and clean the glass of the should change down to shift range 2 or 1 in
headlamps if necessary good time. This should be observed in particular
when driving with a laden vehicle and when tow-
Rhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps reset to asym-
ing a trailer.
metrical low beam at a qualified specialist
workshop i You must also change the shift range in
good time when cruise control is switched on.
You thereby make use of the braking effect of
Transport by rail the engine and do not have to brake as often to
maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the
Transporting your vehicle by rail may be subject service brake and prevents the brakes from
to certain restrictions or require special meas- overheating and wearing too quickly.
ures to be taken in some countries due to vary-
ing tunnel heights and loading standards.
Heavy and light loads
You can obtain further information from any
authorized Sprinter dealer. G WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
Brakes driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
Important safety notes cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
G WARNING
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
an attempt to increase the engine's braking pedal at the same time.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
accidents. results in excessive and premature wear to
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- the brake pads.
ing on a slippery road surface. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
G WARNING on for a short while. The brakes are cooled down
more quickly in the airflow.
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
Z
136 Driving tips
Wet road surfaces Parking brake

If you have been driving for a long time in heavy G WARNING
rain without braking, there may be a delayed
response when you first apply the brakes. This If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
may also occur after driving through a car wash brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
Driving and parking
or deep water.
You must depress the brake pedal more firmly. increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Maintain a longer distance to the vehicle in Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
front. cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
While paying attention to the traffic conditions, apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving
on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This wheels lock, release the parking brake until
heats the brake discs, so that they dry more the wheels begin turning again.
quickly, which protects them against corrosion.
When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered sur-
faces, road salt and/or dirt may get into the
Limited braking performance on salt- parking brake. This causes corrosion and a
treated roads reduction of braking force.
When driving on salted roads, salt may start to In order to prevent this, drive with the parking
build up on the brake disks and brake pads. This brake lightly applied from time to time. When
can increase braking distances considerably. doing so, drive for a distance of approximately
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in 110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph
front. (20 km/h).
The brake lamps are not illuminated when you
To remove any build-up of salt that may have brake the vehicle using the parking brake.
formed:
X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey,
occasionally during journey and at the end of Driving in wet conditions
the journey. Make sure that you do not endan-
ger other road users when doing so. Hydroplaning
New brake discs and brake pads/ G WARNING

linings There is a danger of hydroplaning occurring,
even if you are driving slowly and your tires
New brake pads and brake discs only reach their
optimal braking effect after a few have sufficient tread depth, depending on the
100 kilometers. Until then, compensate for this depth of water on the road. There is a risk of
by applying greater force to the brake pedal. an accident.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brake care-
mends only installing the following brake discs fully.
and brake pads/linings:
Rbrake discs that have been approved by Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in
Mercedes-Benz which hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows:
Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved Rreduce your speed
by Mercedes-Benz or are of an equivalent Ravoid tire ruts
standard of quality Rapply the brakes with care
Other brake discs or brake pads/linings can
compromise the safety of your vehicle.
Driving on flooded roads
Always replace all brake discs and brake pads/
linings on an axle at the same time. Always ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
install new brake pads/linings when replacing the depth of any water before driving through
brake discs. it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-
Driving tips 137
erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
the engine compartment. This can damage tion (Y page 249).
the electronic components in the engine or
the automatic transmission. Water can also Slippery road surfaces
be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage. G WARNING
Driving and parking

If you have to drive on stretches of road on which If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
water has collected, please bear in mind that: an attempt to increase the engine's braking
Rthe water level of standing water should not effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
be above the lower edge of the front bumper There is an increased danger of skidding and
Rdo not drive faster than walking speed accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Driving in winter
General notes G WARNING
The outside temperature indicator is not
G WARNING designed to serve as an ice-warning device
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
There is an increased danger of skidding and face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
accidents. especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission may
roll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro-
G DANGER longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when being
towed, will result in transmission damage.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle X Shift the transmission to neutral position N.
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of X Try to maintain control of the vehicle using
fatal injury. corrective steering.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads.
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking
maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
You can find further information on winter tires
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a and snow chains in the "Winter operation" sec-
window on the side of the vehicle that is not tion (Y page 249).
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified Driving off-road

specialist workshop in good time at the onset of
winter. Important safety notes
i Do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a winter
cover. The measurements of the on-board G WARNING
diagnostic system may otherwise return inac- If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
curate values. Some of these values are turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
legally prescribed and must therefore always
be exact.
Z
138 Driving tips
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a When driving off-road and on construction sites,
risk of an accident. sand, mud and water mixed with oil, for exam-
ple, may get into the brakes. This may lead to a
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of reduction in braking performance or total brake
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the failure, also as a result of increased wear. The
vehicle. braking characteristics will vary depending on
Driving and parking
the material that has got into the system. Clean

G WARNING the brakes after driving off-road. If you then
notice reduced braking performance or hear
When driving off-road, your body is subject to scraping noises, have the brake system checked
forces from all directions, due to the uneven at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjust your
surface. You could be thrown from your seat, driving style to the changed braking character-
for instance. There is a risk of injury. istics.
Always wear a seat belt, even when driving off- Driving off-road or on construction sites increa-
ses the possibility of vehicle damage which may
road. in turn lead to the failure of certain assemblies
and systems. Adapt your driving style to the off-
G WARNING road driving conditions. Drive carefully. Have
If you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer- any vehicle damage rectified at a qualified spe-
ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causing cialist workshop as soon as possible.
injury to your hands. When driving on rough terrain, do not shift the
transmission into the neutral position. You could
Always hold the steering wheel firmly with lose control when attempting to brake the vehi-
both hands. When driving over obstacles, you cle with the service brake. If your vehicle cannot
must expect steering forces to increase manage an uphill slope, drive back down the
briefly and suddenly. slope in reverse gear.
When loading your vehicle for driving off-road or
G WARNING on a construction site, keep the vehicle's center
of gravity as low as possible.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with Checklist before driving off-road
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire. X Check the fuel and DEF levels (Y page 162)
and top up (Y page 129).
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
X Engine: check the oil level (Y page 220) and
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
add oil (Y page 222).
particular, remove parts of plants or other
Before driving up or down steep gradients, fill
flammable materials which have become the oil to the maximum level.
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
i If you drive up or down steep gradients, the
qualified specialist workshop. 4 symbol may appear in the display. The
engine operating safety is not put at risk if you
! When driving off-road or on unpaved surfa- have filled the engine oil to the maximum level
ces, check the underside of the vehicle and before the journey.
the wheels and tires at regular intervals. In
particular, remove any trapped foreign X Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is work-
objects, e.g. stones and branches. ing (Y page 240).
Such foreign objects may: X Make sure that a lug wrench (Y page 240),
wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow
Rdamage the chassis, the fuel tank or the
cable and a folding spade are carried in the
brake system vehicle.
Rcause imbalances and thus vibrations
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depth
Rbe flung out when you continue driving (Y page 248) and tire pressure
If there is any damage, inform a qualified spe- (Y page 250).
cialist workshop.
Driving tips 139
Rules for driving off-road reduce the risk of an accident for yourself and
other road users. Clean your vehicle thoroughly
! Always bear the vehicle's ground clearance before driving on public roads.
in mind and avoid obstacles, e.g. deep ruts. Observe the following points after driving off-
Obstacles may damage the following parts of road, on construction sites and before driving on
the vehicle: public roads:
Driving and parking

Rthe chassis X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: deactivate
Rthe drive train all-wheel drive (Y page 148).
Rthe fuel and supply tanks X Activate ASR (Y page 53).
For this reason, you should always drive X Clean the headlamps and tail lamps and
slowly when driving off-road. If you have to check them for damage.
drive over obstacles, have the front X Clean the front and rear license plates.
passenger direct you. X Clean the windshield, windows and exterior
i We recommend that you additionally carry a mirrors.
shovel and a recovery rope with shackle in the X Clean the steps, door sills and grab handles.
vehicle. This increases safety of footing.
REnsure that loads and items of luggage are X Clean the wheels and tires, wheel arches and
securely stowed or lashed down the underbody of the vehicle with a water jet.
(Y page 212). This increases road grip, especially on wet
RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle and road surfaces.
shift to a low gear. X Check the wheels and tires and wheel arches
RIf the surface demands it, temporarily deacti- for trapped foreign objects and remove them.
vate ASR when pulling away (Y page 53). Trapped foreign objects can damage the
wheels and tires or may be flung out from the
ROnly drive off-road with the engine running
vehicle when you continue driving.
and a gear engaged.
X Check the underbody for trapped branches or
RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace is
other parts of plants and remove them.
necessary in many situations. Trapped branches or other parts of plants
RAvoid spinning the drive wheels. increase the risk of fire and can cause dam-
RMake sure that the wheels always remain in age to fuel lines, brake hoses and the rubber
contact with the ground. bellows of axle joints and drive shafts.
RDrive with extreme care over unknown terrain X Clean the brake disks, brake pads and axle
where you can only see for a short distance. joints, particularly after operation in sand,
As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to take mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirty
a look at the route to be taken in advance. conditions.
RCheck the water depth before fording. X Check the entire floor assembly, the tires,
RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes, wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering,
tree stumps and ruts). chassis and exhaust system for any damage.
RAvoid edges where the surface could crumble X Check the service brake for operating safety,
or break away. e.g. carry out a brake test.
X If you notice strong vibrations after driving off-
Checklist after driving off-road road, check the wheels and drive train for for-
eign objects again. Remove any foreign
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after objects which can lead to imbalances and
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked thus cause vibrations.
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Off-road driving places a higher demand on your
vehicle than normal road operation. Check your
vehicle after driving on rough terrain. By doing
so you will notice any damage in good time and
Z
140 Driving systems
Driving systems Cruise control lever

Cruise control Operating cruise control
General notes
Driving and parking
Cruise control maintains the speed of the vehi-

cle for you.
Use cruise control if road and traffic conditions
make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed
for a prolonged period. You can set any speed
from 20 mph upwards in increments of 1 mph.
i If you have set km/h as the unit for the dig-
ital speedometer (Y page 170), you can set
any speed from 30 km/h upwards in incre-
ments of 1 km/h. : To activate and store the current speed or a
Cruise control should not be activated when higher speed
driving off-road or on construction sites. ; To activate at the last stored speed
Cruise control may not be able to maintain the = To activate and store the current speed or a
stored speed on uphill or downhill gradients. If lower speed
the gradient evens out and the vehicle's speed ? To deactivate cruise control
does not fall below 20 mph (30 km/h), the
stored speed is resumed. The cruise control lever is the upper lever on the
left of the steering column.
i The speed shown in the speedometer may
differ slightly from the speed stored by cruise Displaying the cruise control speed
control. Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: when
you activate cruise control, the text field in the
Important safety notes display briefly shows the speed limit message
and the stored speed. The status area of the
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are display then shows the V symbol and the
inattentive, cruise control can neither reduce stored speed.
the risk of an accident nor override the laws of Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
physics. Cruise control cannot take road, when you activate cruise control, the display
weather and traffic conditions into account. briefly shows the V symbol and the stored
Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible speed.
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in lane. Activation conditions
Do not use cruise control: To activate cruise control, all of the following
Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable for activation conditions must be fulfilled:
driving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traf- Rthe parking brake must be released. The c
fic, on winding roads or off-road. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is off
Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h)
may cause the drive wheels to lose traction Rneither the brake or clutch pedal is depressed
and the vehicle could then skid.
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, i Other drive and brake systems not descri-
heavy rain or snow. bed in this Operator's Manual, such as a
If there is a change of drivers, make sure that retarder, may affect cruise control. You can
you inform the new driver about the set cruise find information on this in the separate oper-
speed. ating instructions provided by the body man-
ufacturer.
Driving systems 141
Storing and maintaining the current X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : to
speed increase the speed or down = to reduce the
speed.
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed The last stored speed increases or decreases
above 20 mph (30 km/h). in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments).
X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : or or
Driving and parking

down ?. X Press and hold the cruise control lever up :
X Release the accelerator pedal. or down = until the desired speed has been
Cruise control is activated. The current speed reached.
is stored. X Release the cruise control lever.
The display shows the V symbol and the The current speed is stored.
stored speed. The display shows the V symbol and the
stored speed.
Resuming the stored speed
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
G WARNING depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-
ate briefly to overtake, for example, cruise
If you call up the stored speed and it differs control resumes the vehicle’s speed to the
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- last speed stored after you have finished over-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the taking.
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- Deactivating cruise control
dent.
There are various ways to deactivate cruise con-
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- trol:
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
do not know the stored speed, store the wards ?.
desired speed again. or
X Apply the brakes.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =. The last speed set remains stored. The last
X Release the accelerator pedal. speed stored is deleted when you switch off the
Cruise control is activated and resumes the engine.
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. Cruise control is deactivated automatically
The display shows the V symbol and the when:
stored speed. Ryou apply the brakes
i When you pull the cruise control level Ryou apply the parking brake and the c
towards you for the first time after starting the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
engine, cruise control adopts the current up
speed. Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph (30 km/h)
Ryou shift the automatic transmission to neu-
Setting the speed tral position N while the vehicle is in motion
RESP® or ASR intervenes
It may be a moment before the vehicle starts to
accelerate or brake to the set speed. Take this Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP®, ASR or ABS
delay into account when setting the speed. system
Z
142 Driving systems
Problems with cruise control

On vehicles with steering The display shows a high-priority message. Thus a change in speed is
wheel buttons, the not possible.
Driving and parking
speed cannot be set X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display.

when cruise control is
X Deactivate cruise control
activated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
General notes warning function.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprises the
distance warning function and adaptive Brake Operation
Assist. The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
Distance warning function vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
Important safety notes detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
be warned visually and acoustically. Without
i Note the section on 'Important safety notes' your intervention, the distance warning function
(Y page 52). cannot prevent a collision.
G WARNING The distance warning function will issue a warn-
ing at speeds of around 20 mph (30 km/h) or
The distance warning function does not react: more if:
Rto people or animals Ryou approach a vehicle ahead of you very
Rto oncoming vehicles quickly. You will then hear an intermittent
Rto crossing traffic
warning tone and the red · warning lamp
in the instrument cluster flashes.
Rwhen cornering
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Thus, the distance warning function cannot distance from the vehicle in front.
provide a warning in all critical situations. or
There is a risk of an accident. X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- so.
uation and be ready to brake. If you want the distance warning function to
assist you, the function must be activated and
G WARNING operational.
The distance warning function cannot always Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated driving conditions may cause the
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
system to display an unnecessary warning.
situations.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
In such cases, the distance warning function distance warning function can detect obstacles
may: that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
ded period of time.
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Up to a speed of around 45 mph (70 km/h), the
Rnot give a warning distance warning function can also react to sta-
There is a risk of an accident. tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parked
vehicles.
Driving systems 143
If you approach an obstacle and the distance function display. The message then disap-
warning function detects a risk of a collision, the pears and the indicator lamp Ä goes out.
system will alert you both visually and acousti-
cally.
Adaptive Brake Assist
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired in the case of: i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Driving and parking

Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering tion for driving safety systems (Y page 52).
the sensors G WARNING
Rsnow or heavy rain
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
Rinterference from other radar sources
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
tions.
ple in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
motorbike Rintervene unnecessarily
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnot intervene
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
speeds where there is no visible damage to the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
front of the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the distance G WARNING
warning function Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
When you switch on the engine, the distance Rto people or animals
warning function switches on after a few sec-
Rto oncoming vehicles
onds.
Rto crossing traffic
X To deactivate: press the æ button
(Y page 35). Rto stationary obstacles
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: Rwhen cornering
the Ä warning lamp in the instrument clus-
ter lights up and the OFF message flashes. The As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
message then disappears and the Ä indi- intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
cator lamp remains lit. risk of an accident.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Ä warning lamp in the instrument cluster uation and be ready to brake.
flashes and the Distance warning system
deactivated message appears .The mes- Adaptive Brake Assist aids you when braking
sage then disappears and the Ä warning during hazardous situations at speeds above
lamp remains lit. 20 mph (30 km/h). With the help of Adaptive
X To activate: press the æ button again Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can
(Y page 35). detect obstacles that are in the path of your
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: vehicle for an extended period of time.
the Ä warning lamp in the instrument clus- When you approach an obstacle and adaptive
ter lights up and the on message flashes. The Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of a col-
message then disappears and the Ä indi- lision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates the brak-
cator lamp goes out. ing force necessary to avoid a collision. Should
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake
Ä warning lamp in the instrument cluster Assist will automatically increase the braking
flashes and the Distance warning system force to the calculated level.
activated message appears in the multi-
Z
144 Driving systems
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper and
emergency braking situation is over. behind the protective strips of the B-pillars.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes function as usual again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal
G WARNING
Driving and parking
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. placing them in the blind spot area
Up to the maximum vehicle speed, adaptive Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
Brake Assist can react to moving obstacles that differential and overtake your vehicle
have already been recognized as such at least
once over the period of observation. Adaptive As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
Brake Assist does not react to stationary obsta- warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
cles. an accident.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be Always observe the traffic conditions care-
impaired if: fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering
the sensors Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
Rsnow or heavy rain detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- i USA only:
ple in parking garages This device has been approved by the FCC as
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
motorbike is intended for use in an automotive radar
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line system only. Removal, tampering, or altering
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a of the device will void any warranties, and is
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the full not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with,
brake boosting effect with the help of BAS alter, or use in any non-approved way.
remains available. Any unauthorized modification to this device
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, could void the user’s authority to operate the
have the configuration and operation of the equipment.
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist Monitoring range of the sensors
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
front of the vehicle. impaired in the case of:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering
the sensors
Lane Tracking package Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Blind Spot Assist Rnarrow and short vehicles, e.g. motorcycles
or bicycles
General notes Rvery wide lanes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to Rnarrow lanes
monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane
It supports you from speeds of approximately
Rbarriers or other road boundaries
20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the
exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
detected in the monitored area. If you then indicated.
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lane, you will also receive an optical and
audible collision warning. For this purpose, Blind
Driving systems 145
Have the function of the radar sensors checked

at a qualified specialist workshop:
Rafter a severe impact
Rafter damage to the bumper
Rafter damage to the protective strips of the B-
Driving and parking

pillars
Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work prop-
erly.
Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area approx-

imately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft (3.5 m)
each side of it. For this purpose, Blind Spot
Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper
and behind the protective strips of the B-pillars.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side If yellow indicator lamp : lights up:
of their lane. Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
Due to the nature of the system: RBlind Spot Assist is deactivated
Ra clear warning situation may not occur. The RBlind Spot Assist is malfunctioning
yellow indicator lamp on the relevant side of Rthere is no clear warning, depending on the
the vehicle will then light up. situation
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving Blind Spot Assist is active from a speed of
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane 20 mph (30 km/h). If a vehicle is detected in the
borders. blind spot monitoring range, red warning
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving lamp : on the corresponding side lights up.
alongside particularly long vehicles, for exam- This warning occurs when a vehicle enters the
ple trucks, for a prolonged time. blind spot monitoring range from behind or from
The four sensors of Blind Spot Assist are inte- the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warn-
grated into the rear bumper and behind the pro- ing only occurs if the difference in speed is less
tective strips of the B-pillars. Make sure that the than 14 mph (22 km/h).
bumper and protective stripping are free of dirt, Yellow indicator lamp : goes out if reverse gear
ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactiva-
radar sensors must not be covered, for example ted.
by cycle racks or overhanging loads. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjusted automatically according to the ambi-
ent light.
Z
146 Driving systems
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds once. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
Driving and parking
are indicated by the flashing of red warning

lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
i Blind Spot Assist is activated when you
switch on the ignition.
: Lane Keeping Assist camera
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light Lane Keeping Assist supports you from speeds
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and of approximately 40 mph(60 km/h).
then turn yellow. If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings,
X To deactivate: press the k button in the the Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
center console (Y page 35). ter lights up green. Lane Keeping Assist is opera-
The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mirror : tional.
first flashes and then lights up continuously. Important safety notes
X To activate: press the k button in the
center console again (Y page 35). G WARNING
The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mirror : Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
flashes initially. If you exceed 20 mph recognize lane markings.
(30 km/h) while driving, the yellow indicator
lamp in exterior mirror : goes out. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Towing a trailer
Rnot give a warning
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
correctly established the electrical connection. There is a risk of an accident.
This can be accomplished by checking the trailer Always pay particular attention to the traffic
lighting. Blind Spot Assist is deactivated as a situation and stay in lane, in particular if
result. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
lights up yellow.
On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, the G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist Deactivated message
also appears in the display. The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
Lane Keeping Assist a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
General notes yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of ing Assist.
your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of
the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
lane markings on the road and warns you before ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident
you leave your lane unintentionally. nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping
Assist cannot take into account road, weather or
traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Driving systems 147
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.
in its lane. X To activate: press the j button in the
The system may be impaired or may not function center console again (Y page 35).
if: On vehicles without steering wheel but-
Rif the vehicle is incorrectly loaded tons:
(Y page 212) on flashes briefly in the display and the Ã
Driving and parking

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, out. If a lane marking is detected, the Ã
fog or spray indicator lamp lights up green.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if The Lane Keep. Assist Activated mes-
the road surface is wet) sage appears in the display and the Ã
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- out. If a lane marking is detected, the Ã
ity of the camera indicator lamp lights up green.
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are pres- Lane Keeping Assist is activated.
ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area A Lane Keeping Assist warning is suppressed if:
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
Ryou have set the turn signal and a lane change
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- is detected. In this case, the warnings are
ted suppressed for a certain period of time.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehi-
branch off, cross one another or merge cles with an automatic transmission.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Ryou brake hard.
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
the road obstacle or change lane quickly.
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
over a lane marking. In addition, a warning tone
sounds and the Ã indicator lamp in the In order that you are warned only when neces-
instrument cluster flashes red. sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping and warns you accordingly.
Assist Lane Keeping Assist warns you earlier if:
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically activated Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
when you start the engine. bend.
X To deactivate: press the j button in the Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway.
center console (Y page 35). Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
On vehicles without steering wheel but- Warnings are given later if:
tons:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
OFF flashes briefly in the display and the Ã
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes yellow and then lights up continu-
ously.
On vehicles with steering wheel buttons: All-wheel drive
The Lane Keep. Assist Deactivated mes- Important safety notes
sage appears in the display and the Ã
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
flashes yellow and then lights up continu- This may damage the transfer case. Damage
ously. of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
Z
148 Driving systems
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Engaging/disengaging all-wheel drive

Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels in full contact with the
ground.
! A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.
Driving and parking
Before you operate the vehicle on such a

dynamometer, please consult a qualified
workshop. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the all-wheel drive system can nei-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. The all-wheel drive system X To engage/disengage: press the ; but-
cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions ton.
into account. The all-wheel drive system is only The indicator lamp in the ; button flashes.
an aid. You are responsible for the distance to The h and : indicator lamps light up in
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for the instrument cluster. ESP® and ASR are
braking in good time. deactivated for the duration of the engaging/
4ETS ensures permanent drive for all four disengaging process.
wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the If the engaging/disengaging process is suc-
vehicle's traction. cessful, the h and : indicator lamps in
If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction: the instrument cluster go out and ESP® and
RWhen pulling away, make use of the traction ASR are reactivated.
control integrated in ESP®. Depress the If the indicator lamp in the ; button is lit,
accelerator pedal as far as necessary. all-wheel drive is engaged. On vehicles with
RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off the
steering-wheel buttons, the display then
accelerator pedal shows the following message: Four-wheel
drive active.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains If the engaging/disengaging process fails, the
(Y page 249). This is the only way to get the full indicator lamp in the ; button flashes
benefit from the all-wheel drive system. three times briefly. One of the gear change
conditions was not fulfilled.
For information on "Driving off-road", see
(Y page 137). As long as the indicator lamp in the ; button
is flashing, you can cancel the engaging/disen-
gaging process by pressing the ; again.
Engaging all-wheel drive
i If the LOW RANGE transmission ratio
Conditions for engaging/disengaging (Y page 148) is engaged, all-wheel drive can-
All-wheel drive can only be engaged or disen- not be disengaged.
gaged if:
Rthe engine is running LOW RANGE transmission ratio
Rthe vehicle is stationary
General notes
If it is not possible to engage all-wheel-drive:
The LOW RANGE transmission ratio assists you
Rmove the selector lever to position N when driving on difficult terrain. If you engage
Rrelease the brake pedal LOW RANGE, the engine's performance charac-
Rpress the ; button teristics and the automatic transmission's shift-
Rmove the selector lever from N to D or R
ing characteristics are adjusted accordingly.
The transmission ratio from the engine to the
wheels is around 40% lower than in the on-road
position. This increases the drive torque.
Driving systems 149
Conditions for engaging/disengaging laws of physics. DSR cannot take road, weather
LOW RANGE can only be engaged or disengaged and traffic conditions into account. DSR is only
if: an aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for
Rthe engine is running braking in good time.
Rthe vehicle is stationary
General notes
Driving and parking

Rthe brake pedal is depressed
Rthe selector lever of the automatic transmis- DSR supports you with the LOW RANGE trans-
sion is in position P or N mission ratio when you are driving downhill off-
road and on construction sites. DSR maintains a
Rall-wheel drive is engaged
preset speed for you on downhill gradients by
Engaging and disengaging LOW RANGE applying the brakes as required. Maintaining the
speed is dependent on the road surface condi-
tions and the downhill gradient and cannot
therefore be guaranteed in all situations.
You can set the speed to between 2.5 mph
(4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake
and accelerator pedals or the cruise control
lever.
RIf the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less
than 2.5 mph (4 km/h) the speed is set to
2.5 mph (4 km/h).
RIf you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) off-
road, DSR switches to standby mode. DSR
remains activated, but does not brake auto-
: Engages and disengages LOW RANGE matically.
X To engage or disengage: press button : RIf you drive downhill slower than 11 mph
or ;. (18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previ-
The + indicator lamp flashes in the instru- ously set speed.
ment cluster for the duration of the engaging/ RDSR switches off automatically if you drive
disengaging process. faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
If the engaging/disengaging process is suc-
cessful: Cruise control lever
Rand LOW RANGE is engaged, the + indi-
cator lamp lights up.
Rand LOW RANGE is disengaged, the +
indicator lamp goes out.
As long as the + indicator lamp is flashing,
you can cancel the engaging/disengaging
process by pressing button : or ; again.
If the engaging/disengaging process fails, the
+ indicator lamp briefly flashes three
times. One of the gear change conditions was
not fulfilled.
: Activates DSR and stores the current or
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) higher speed
; Activates DSR and stores the current speed
Important safety notes = Activates DSR and stores the current or
Observe the notes on braking in the section on lower speed
"Driving and parking". If you fail to adapt your ? Deactivates DSR
driving style or you are inattentive, DSR can nei-
ther reduce the risk of accident nor override the The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever
on the left of the steering column. For as long as
Z
150 Driving systems
the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is engaged, DSR is activated but is not intervening
only use the cruise control lever to operate DSR. RYou are driving at between 11 mph (18 km/h)
When the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is dis- and 28 mph (45 km/h).
engaged, use cruise control.
RThe DSR message is displayed in the status
Activation conditions area of the on-board computer. Also, the
speed 11 mph (18 km/h) flashes.
Driving and parking
In order to activate DSR, both activation condi-

tions must be fulfilled: DSR is activated but is not intervening
RThe LOW RANGE transmission ratio is RYou are driving faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
engaged. The + indicator lamp in the RThe DSR message is displayed in the status
instrument cluster lights up. area of the on-board computer. Also, the ---
RThe vehicle is stationary or you are not driving message is displayed for 5 seconds.
faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). DSR is activated but is not intervening
RThe DSR --- message is displayed in the sta-
Activating DSR
tus area of the on-board computer.
You can activate DSR when the vehicle is sta-
There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brak-
tionary or moving.
ing System (EBS). Visit a qualified specialist
X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the workshop.
required speed between 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
and 11 mph (18 km/h). Setting the speed whilst driving downhill
X Briefly push the cruise control lever up : or You can set the speed to between 2.5 mph
down =. (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake
or and accelerator pedals or the cruise control
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards lever.
you ;. X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the
X Release the brake or accelerator pedal. required speed on the downhill gradient.
The current speed is stored. When the vehicle X Release the brake or accelerator pedal. The
is stationary, the speed is stored at 2.5 current speed is stored.
(4 km/h). DSR maintains the stored speed on or
the downhill gradient and brakes automati- X Briefly push the cruise control lever
cally. upwards : to increase the speed or down-
When DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls wards = to reduce the speed.
away, accelerates or brakes, the speed set cor- The last speed stored is increased or reduced
responds to the speed at which the accelerator incrementally.
or brake pedal is released. This is only the case X Release the cruise control lever. The current
if you are not driving faster than 11 mph speed is stored.
(18 km/h). or
DSR status indicator in the on-board com- X Press and hold the cruise control lever up :
puter or down = until the desired speed has been
reached.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons X Release the cruise control lever.
LOW RANGE is engaged The current speed is stored.
RThe DSR message is displayed in the status
area of the on-board computer. i It may take a moment before the vehicle
brakes to the set speed. Take this delay into
RDSR can be activated.
account when setting the speed with the
DSR is activated cruise control lever.
RThe DSR message and the set speed are dis-
played in the status area of the on-board com-
puter.
Driving systems 151
Deactivating DSR are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- You could damage the vehicle or objects.
wards ?. PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from:
or Rultrasonic sources such as a truck's
X Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph compressed-air brakes, an automatic car
wash or a pneumatic drill
Driving and parking

(45 km/h).
Rattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear moun-
DSR deactivates automatically if:
ted racks
Ryou are driving faster than 28 mph (45 km/h).
Rnumber plates (vehicle license plates) that
Ryou disengage the LOW RANGE transmission are not affixed flat against the bumper
ratio. Rdirty or icy sensors
Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys-
tem. Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the
minimum detection range to an obstacle from
the bumper, not the ball coupling.
PARKTRONIC
General notes Range of the sensors
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. The PARKTRONIC does not account for obstacles
system is equipped with ultrasonic sensors in that are:
the front and rear bumpers to monitor the area Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons, ani-
around your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indicates vis- mals or objects
ually and audibly the distance between your Rabove its detection range, e.g. overhanging
vehicle and an object. loads, overhangs or truck loading ramps
Your vehicle features two separate sound emit-
ters with different frequencies for the warning
tones. The warning ranges in front of and behind
the vehicle are indicated by different warning
tones.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
Rrelease the parking brake and
Rmove the selector lever to D, N or R.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). PARKTRONIC is reactivated
at speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h).

PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It cannot replace
your own awareness of the immediate surround-
ings. You are responsible for safe maneuvering,
parking and pulling away. When maneuvering,
parking and pulling away, make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu-
vering area.
! Pay particular attention to obstacles above
or below the sensors when parking, such as The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush.
flower pots or trailer towbars. PARKTRONIC Otherwise, they cannot function correctly.
does not recognize such objects when they
Z
152 Driving systems
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to Warning displays

scratch or damage them (Y page 236).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 39 in
(100 cm)
Driving and parking
Corners Approx. 26 in (65 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 71 in
(180 cm)
Corners Approx. 39 in Warning display, front area
(100 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 12 in (30 cm)
Front corner sensors Approx. 10 in (25 cm)
Rear corner sensors Approx. 12 in (30 cm)
If an obstacle is within this range, all segments

of the warning displays light up and you hear a
warning tone. If the distance between the vehi- Warning display for the left-hand rear area in the
cle and the obstacle falls below the minimum left-hand exterior mirror
range, it is possible that the distance may no : Warning segments for the left front area
longer be displayed.
; Warning segments for the right front area
= Operational readiness symbol for the front
area
? Warning display segments
A Operational readiness symbol for the rear
area
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensor and the obstacle.
The warning display is divided into five yellow
and two red segments for each side of the vehi-
cle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow indi-
cator segments = and A are lit.
There is a malfunction if only the red segments
of the warning display light up .
The position of the gear lever determines
whether the front and/or rear area is monitored.
Driving systems 153
Selector lever posi- Monitoring Towing a trailer

tion PARKTRONIC detects a coupled trailer if your
D Front area vehicle is equipped with the corresponding elec-
trical installations for trailer towing.
R or N Front and rear area PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
Driving and parking

when you establish an electrical connection
P No areas activated between your vehicle and a trailer. If you use an
adapter for the socket, remove it from the
One or more segments light up as the vehicle socket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise,
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi- PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for the rear
cle's distance from the obstacle. area.
From the: Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the
Rsixth segment, an intermittent warning tone
minimum detection range to an obstacle from
sounds for approximately 2 seconds. the bumper, not the ball coupling.
Rseventh segment, a continuous warning tone
sounds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Roll-back warning
PARKTRONIC automatically monitors the area
behind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to roll
backwards without reverse gear engaged, e.g.
after stopping on an uphill gradient.
If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at a dis-
tance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all the segments
in the warning displays light up. A continuous
warning tone also sounds as the vehicle
approaches the obstacle and for a further
2 seconds after the vehicle has come to a halt.
Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC
X Press the f button.

If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indicator
lamp in the switch lights up.
Z
154 Working mode
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-
Driving and parking
ing displays are lit. cialist workshop.

A warning tone also
sounds for approx-
imately 2 seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds.
The indicator lamp of the
f button lights up
and the red segments in
the PARKTRONIC warn-
ing display go out.
The PARKTRONIC warn- The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.
ing displays implausible X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 236).
distances.
X Turn the key to position 2 again in the ignition lock.
For example, all the seg-
ments may be lit even The license plate or other parts attached near the sensors may not be
though there is no obsta- secured correctly.
cle present.
X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensors for
correct seating.
An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interference.
X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Rear view camera Working mode

Important safety notes ADR (working speed governor)
The rear view camera is only an aid. It cannot General notes
replace your own awareness of the immediate
surroundings. You are responsible for safe When activated, ADR automatically increases
maneuvering, parking and pulling away. When the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed
maneuvering, parking and pulling away, make you have set.
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the maneuvering area.
i After a cold start, the idling speed of the
engine is increased automatically. If the pre-
The rear view camera is a visual parking aid. set working speed is lower than the increased
Information on operation can be found in the idling speed, the working speed is only
separate Audio 15 supplement. reached once the engine has completed the
The camera is in the middle of the roof above the warm-up phase.
high-mounted brake lamp (Y page 236). It is only possible to activate ADR with the
You can find information on cleaning the camera vehicle stationary and the parking brake
in the "Maintenance and care" section applied.
(Y page 236). The selector lever of the automatic transmis-
sion must be in position P.
Towing a trailer 155
Switching ADR on and off Towing a trailer

Notes on trailer towing
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the
ball coupling in question is longer or angled
differently. This could seriously impair the
driving characteristics and the trailer can
X To activate: press upper section : of the come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
E switch while the engine is running. You should only ever install a ball coupling
The indicator lamp in the switch comes on. that has the permissible dimensions and that
The K indicator lamp in the instrument is designed to meet your trailer-towing
cluster lights up or the display shows the fol-
lowing message: Operating speed gover‐ requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
nor active. or the trailer tow hitch.
X To deactivate: press lower section ; of the
E switch while the engine is running. G WARNING
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out. If you use a ball coupling that is not approved
ADR is automatically deactivated if: for your vehicle, it may cause excessive strain
Ryou release the parking brake. on the trailer tow hitch. This can cause dam-
Rthe brake pedal is depressed. age to the vehicle and the trailer may come
Rthe vehicle moves.
loose during the journey. The handling may be
impaired and the rear axle may be overloaded.
Rthe control unit detects a malfunction.
This may lead to an accident involving serious
or even fatal injury.
Setting the working speed
Therefore note the following:
ROnly install a ball coupling that is approved
for your vehicle.
RBefore the journey, make sure that the ball
coupling is correctly installed and secured.
To do this, observe the operating instruc-
tions of the ball coupling manufacturer.
RDo not make any modifications to the ball
coupling or the trailer tow hitch.
You must observe the operating instructions
of the trailer tow hitch or ball coupling manu-
X Activate ADR. facturer.
X To increase: press the E button.
X To decrease: press the F button. G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed
and secured, it could come loose while driving
and endanger other road users. There is a risk
of an accident and injury.
Z
156 Towing a trailer
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri- loads and trailer drawbar noseweights" section
bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal- (Y page 159).
lation instructions. Make sure that the ball Your vehicle behaves differently with a trailer
than without one.
coupling is correctly installed and secured
The vehicle/trailer combination:
before every journey.
Driving and parking
Ris heavier
G WARNING Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-
climbing capability
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
Rhas an increased braking distance
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
Ris more susceptible to strong crosswinds
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
Rrequires more sensitive steering
Rhas a larger turning circle
On no account should you attempt to
This may impair the handling characteristics.
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed
to suit the road and weather conditions. Drive
speed and do not countersteer. Apply the carefully. Maintain a safe distance.
brake as necessary. If you require any further explanation of the
information contained in the Operator's Manual,
Always observe the operating instructions pro- please contact an authorized Sprinter dealer.
vided by the manufacturers of the trailer cou-
pling and the ball coupling.
Couple and decouple the trailer carefully. When
General notes
backing up the towing vehicle, make sure RObserve the legally prescribed maximum
nobody is standing between the vehicle and the speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the
trailer. relevant country, state or Canadian province.
A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to the tow- Before setting off, check the vehicle docu-
ing vehicle could break away. A correctly cou- ments of the your trailer to find out the per-
pled trailer must be positioned horizontally missible maximum speed.
behind the towing vehicle. This reduces the risk of accidents.
Ensure that the following weights are not excee- RInstall only an approved trailer coupling on
ded: your vehicle. Only use a ball coupling that is
Rthe permissible noseweight approved for your vehicle and Sprinter trailer
Rthe permissible trailer load tow hitch. More information on the availabil-
ity, mounting and installation of the trailer
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
electrics is available at any qualified specialist
vehicle workshop.
Rthe permissible gross weight of both the tow-
RThe trailer coupling is one of the most impor-
ing vehicle and the trailer tant vehicle parts with regard to road safety.
Rthe permissible gross combination weight The notes on operation, care and mainte-
The applicable permissible values that may not nance issued by the manufacturer should be
be exceeded can be found: observed.
Rin your vehicle documents RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable
Ron the type plates for the trailer tow hitch
for installing detachable trailer couplings.
RDo not attach rented trailer tow hitches or
Ron the type plates for the trailer
other detachable trailer tow hitches to the
Ron the vehicle identification plate
bumper.
(Y page 276).
RMinimize the risk of damage to the ball cou-
Where the values differ, the lowest is valid. pling. If you do not require the ball coupling,
You will find values approved by the manufac- remove it from the ball coupling recess.
turer on the identification plates and those for
the towing vehicle in the "Permissible trailer
Weight information can be found in the “Per- RMaintain a greater distance than you would
missible trailer and drawbar noseweights” sec- when driving without towing a trailer.
tion (Y page 159). RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes gen-
i The height of the ball neck changes accord- tly at first to allow the trailer brake to overrun.
ing to the load on the vehicle. If this is case, Then, increase the brake force quickly.
use a trailer with a height-adjustable trailer RThe figures for the gradient climbing capabil-
Driving and parking

drawbar. ities from a standstill refer to sea level. When
driving in mountainous areas, note that the
power output of the engine, and with it its
Driving tips gradient climbing capability, decrease with
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ increasing altitude.
trailer combination depends on the type of
trailer. Before setting off, check the vehicle
documents of the your trailer to find out the Coupling up a trailer
permissible maximum speed. Observe the
legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations in the relevant country,
state or Canadian province.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison to
when driving without a trailer and it will con-
sume more fuel.
On long, steep downhill slopes you must select
shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time.
i This also applies if cruise control is activa-
ted.
This enables you to utilize the engine's braking Trailer coupled ready for use
effect and you do not need to brake so heavily to X Make sure the selector lever of the automatic
keep the correct speed. which protects the transmission is in position P.
brake system and prevents the brakes from X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need
X Close all doors.
to brake additionally, to not depress the brake
pedal constantly, but periodically. X Position the trailer horizontally behind your
vehicle.
Driving tips i The height of the ball neck changes accord-
ing to the load on the vehicle. In this case, use
If the trailer begins to swing from side to side: a trailer with a height-adjustable trailer draw-
X Do not accelerate. bar.
X Do not counter-steer. X Couple the trailer.
X Brake if necessary. X Establish all electrical and other connections
i You can reduce the risk of the trailer swing- to the trailer. When doing so, hook the break-
ing and rocking by retrofitting anti-roll bars or away cable of the trailer into eyelet : on the
trailer stability programs. More information is ball coupling.
available from your authorized Sprinter X Remove the objects that are preventing the
Dealer. trailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks.
X Release the trailer parking brake.
i The subharness of the vehicle has a cable

connection to the brake lamp indicator lamp.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Z
Most federal states and all Canadian provinces RSecure the load on the trailer according to the
require by law: applicable specifications and current stand-
Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle and ards on securing loads (Y page 214).
the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound RWhen driving with a trailer, check at regular
under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas- intervals that the load is secured and that the
tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to brakes and lights are working.
Driving and parking
the bumper or the axle. RBear in mind that the handling will be less
Leave enough slack in the chains. This allows stable when towing a trailer than when driving
you to drive round tight corners. without one. Avoid sudden steering move-
Ra separate brake system for certain types of ments.
trailer. RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
Ra safety shut-off for braked trailers. Find out accelerates more slowly and has a decreased
the specific requirements according to the gradient climbing capability and a longer
applicable laws. braking distance.
If the trailer becomes detached from the tow- It is more susceptible to crosswinds and
ing vehicle, the safety feature applies the requires cautious steering.
trailer brakes. RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but rather
moderately at first so that the trailer can acti-
vate its brakes. Then increase the force on the
brake pedal.
Towing a trailer
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
There are numerous legal requirements con- shifts between gears when driving on inclines,
cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restric- restrict the shift range. Select shift range 4, 3,
tions. Make sure your vehicle/trailer combina- 2 or 1.
tion complies with local laws. This not only Driving in a low gear and at a low speed
means where you live, but also anywhere you reduces the risk of damaging the engine.
are driving to. Information is available from the RWhen driving on a downhill gradient, shift to a
police and local authorities.
low gear and take advantage of the engine's
Observe the following when towing a trailer: braking effect.
RPractice driving around bends, stopping and Avoid continuous brake application as this
backing up at a place where there is no traffic. may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if instal-
This enables you to gain experience and get led, the trailer brakes.
used to the new handling characteristics. RIf the coolant temperature increases dramat-
RBefore driving, check: ically while the air-conditioning system is
- that the trailer tow hitch and ball coupling switched on, switch off the air-conditioning
are secure system.
- that the safety switch for a braked trailer is Coolant heat can also be dissipated by
functioning properly switching the airflow and the temperature of
- that the safety chains are secure and not the heater/air conditioning to the maximum
damaged level. Open the windows if necessary.
- that the electrical connections are secure RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention to
- that the lights are working

the extended length of your vehicle/trailer
combination.
- that the wheels are in good order and the
Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer com-
tire pressure is correct bination you need an additional distance
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an before you can return to your original lane.
unobstructed view of the rear section of the
trailer.
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
brakes, pull the vehicle/trailer combination
away carefully. Brake manually using the
brake controller and check that the brakes
are working.
Uncoupling a trailer 750 lbs (340 kg). The actual noseweight may not
exceed the value given on the identification
G WARNING plates of the trailer tow hitch or the trailer. If the
values vary, the lowest value always applies.
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
calculated by adding the gross weight of the
Driving and parking

between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. trailer to the gross vehicle weight including a
There is a risk of injury. driver's weight of approximately 150 lbs (68 kg).
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake The permissible Gross Combination Weight Rat-
is engaged. ing is vehicle-specific and depends on the equip-
ment level.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged When driving with a trailer, you should not
overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could exceed the permitted Gross Combination
be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun Weight Rating (GCWR).
brake. The permissible values, which must not be
X Make sure the selector lever of the automatic
exceeded, can be found in your vehicle docu-
transmission is in position P. ments and on the trailer tow hitch type plates for
the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 276). The
X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle. basic values approved by the manufacturer can
X Close all doors. also be found in the "Technical data" section
X Apply the parking brake of the trailer. (Y page 286). If the values vary, the lowest
X In addition, secure the trailer against rolling value always applies.
away with a wheel chock or similar object.
X Remove the trailer cable and safety chains Loading a trailer
and decouple the trailer.
! Utilize the maximum permissible nose-
weight as fully as possible. Do not allow the
weight to fall below the minimum permissible
Permissible trailer loads and trailer noseweight, otherwise the trailer may come
drawbar noseweights loose.
RYou must distribute the load on the vehicle
Weight information and trailer so that the permitted maximum
! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle values for the gross vehicle weight (GVWR),
weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissi- gross trailer weight (GTW) and gross com-
ble gross combination weight is less than the bined weight (GCWR) as well as permitted
total of the permissible gross vehicle weight gross axle loads (GAWR) and noseweight
and the permissible trailer load. Exceeding (TWR) of your vehicle are not exceeded.
the permissible gross combination weight can RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball cou-
lead to damage to the drivetrain, to the trans- pling (TWR) to the rear axle load. This will pre-
mission or to the trailer tow hitch. vent you from exceeding the permissible
gross axle weight (GAWR).
If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the
relevant value for the permissible gross vehi- RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball cou-
cle weight or the permissible trailer load is pling (TWR) to the vehicle payload. This will
therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the prevent you from exceeding the permissible
vehicle may only be partially loaded. gross vehicle weight (GVWR).
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated by
adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
the load and equipment. RMake sure the weights of the towing vehicle
The maximum gross vehicle weight is vehicle- and the trailer comply with the maximum per-
specific and equipment-dependent: 5,000 lbs missible values. Have the vehicle/trailer com-
(2,268 kg) or 7,500 lbs (3,402 kg). bination weighed on a calibrated weigh-
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose- bridge. The vehicle/trailer combination con-
weight on the ball coupling is 500 lbs (227 kg) or sists of the towing vehicle including the driver,
Z
passengers and load, as well as the loaded

trailer.
RCheck the maximum permissible gross axle
weight rating of the front and rear axles
(GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the
gross combination weight rating (GCWR) and
Driving and parking
the noseweight of the trailer drawbar (TWR).
Trailer power supply

! Incorrect wiring of the connector plug could,
under certain circumstances, cause malfunc-
tions in the vehicle's other electronic sys-
tems. We therefore recommend having the
connector plug wired at a qualified specialist
workshop.
! You can connect accessories with a maxi-
mum power consumption of 240 W to the
permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using the
power supply.
Your vehicle may be equipped with various elec-
trical installations for trailer towing. Depending
on your trailer, you may need an adapter to con-
nect the electrical system of the trailer with that
of the vehicle.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at
the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is on the trailer
socket pin assignment 4.
Note that the permanent power supply of the
trailer is not switched off when the on-board
voltage is low. This can completely discharge
the starter battery of your vehicle.
Further information on the electrical equipment
currently installed on your vehicle and on instal-
ling trailer electrics can be obtained at any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Instrument cluster 161
Useful information You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
On-board computer and displays

operating the on-board computer.
well as standard and optional equipment of your The on-board computer display only shows mes-
vehicle that were available at the time of going sages and warnings from certain systems. You
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- should therefore make sure your vehicle is oper-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped ating safely at all times. If the operating safety of
with all of the described functions. This also your vehicle is impaired, stop the vehicle as
applies to systems and functions relevant to soon as possible, paying attention to road and
safety. traffic conditions. Then consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Instrument cluster
Important safety notes Overview
G WARNING
If you are driving and reach through the steer-
ing wheel to operate the adjustment knob,
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Only operate the adjustment knobs when the
vehicle is stationary. Do not reach through the
steering wheel when driving.
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic : Instrument cluster on vehicles without
steering wheel buttons
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
; Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention wheel buttons
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- = Adjustment buttons f and g
ment when the vehicle is stationary. ? Reset button 9
A Service button Ë (engine oil level check)
G WARNING B Menu button 4
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- You will find a full overview of the instrument
functioned, you may not recognize function cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 32).
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The The display in the instrument cluster is activated
operating safety of your vehicle may be when you:
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Ropen the driver's door
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- Rpress the 9 reset button
ately. Rswitch on the lights
Z
The display switches off automatically after for vehicles without steering wheel buttons
approximately 30 seconds if: under (Y page 163) and for vehicles with steer-
Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. ing wheel buttons under (Y page 167).
Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on. i In some countries, a warning sounds when
the vehicle reaches the maximum speed limit,
e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h).
Instrument lighting
When the lights are switched on, you can adjust Trip odometer
the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting
using the f and g buttons. X To reset: make sure that the display is show-
X To brighten: press the f button. ing the trip odometer if you have a vehicle with
steering wheel buttons (Y page 167).
X To dim: press the g button.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the
i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode: trip odometer is reset to 0.0.
the instrument lighting also adapts to auto-
matic headlamp mode.
Fuel gage
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.
Avoid driving at high engine speeds. This
unnecessarily increases the fuel consumption
of your vehicle and harms the environment as
a result of increased emissions.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the

engine's overrevving range. : Fuel gage on vehicles without steering
wheel buttons
To protect the engine, the fuel supply is inter-
; Fuel gage on vehicles with steering wheel
rupted when the red band is reached.
buttons
= Fuel filler flap location indicator t: the
fuel filler flap is on the left-hand side. Fuel
Outside temperature filler flap location indicator u: the fuel
You should pay special attention to road condi- filler flap is on the right-hand side
tions when temperatures are around the freez- ? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 200)
ing point.
On vehicles without steering wheel buttons
(Y page 163) and on vehicles with steering DEF gage
wheel buttons (Y page 167), the outside tem-
perature display is in the display. Vehicles without steering wheel but-
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- tons
played after a short delay.
If the DEF supply is less than 1.5 US gal (5.5 l),
the dEF Chk message appears in the display.
In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp
Speedometer lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning
The speed can also be shown in the display. You tone sounds.
can find information on the digital speedometer
On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons) 163
If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve range On-board computer (vehicles without
of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the StArtS RExx message

steering wheel buttons)
appears in the display. In addition, the yellow
å DEF indicator lamp lights up in the instru- Operating the on-board computer
ment cluster and three warning tones sound.
In the display, xx corresponds to the number of General notes
possible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ).
The on-board computer is activated as soon as
When the display shows that the number of
you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
remaining starts is 0, the StArtS IdLE message
appears in the display and three warning tones The on-board computer shows vehicle informa-
sound. tion and settings in the display.
In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp You can control the display and the settings in
and the ; Check Engine indicator lamp light the on-board computer using the adjustment
up in the instrument cluster and three warning buttons on the instrument cluster.
tones sound.
The engine management only allows speeds of Standard display
up to 5 mph (8 km/h).
Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF
(Y page 129).
The display message only disappears when the
vehicle is stationary, at the latest after
20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition
or start the engine after refueling.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons : Odometer

; Trip odometer
If the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal = Clock
(5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid ? Outside temperature or digital speedometer
see Operator's Manual message appears in
the display. A Fuel gage (Y page 162)
If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve range B Selector lever position or current shift range
of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the XX starts remaining with automatic transmission (Y page 124)
message is displayed. X To call up the standard display: turn the key
Three short warning tones also sound. to position 2 in the ignition lock.
In the display, xx corresponds to the number of X Press the 4 menu button for longer than
possible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ). 1 second.
When the display shows that the number of The information shown in the display changes
remaining starts is 0, the StArtS IdLE message from the outside temperature to the digital
appears in the display. speedometer.
The yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp
also lights up and three short warning tones
sound. Menus in the on-board computer
The engine management only allows speeds of
up to 5 mph (8 km/h). Overview
Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF If you wish to exit a menu and go to the standard
(Y page 129). display:
The display message only disappears when the X Press the 4 menu button for longer than
vehicle is stationary, at the latest after 1 second.
20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition
or start the engine after refueling. or
X Do not press any button for 10 seconds.
The display accepts the changed settings.
Z
164 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)
Using the f, g, 4 or 9 adjustment buttons, X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
you can select the following functions:
X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until the

RCalling up the service due date L indicator lamp flashes and the on or OFF
(Y page 226) message appears in the display.
RChecking the oil level (Y page 220) X Press the f or g button to activate or deac-
RChecking the DEF supply (Y page 162) tivate the daytime running lamps.
RPreselecting/setting the auxiliary heating i USA only:
switch-on time (Y page 108)
If you turn the light switch to T or L,
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 253) the corresponding light switches on. If you
RSetting the time (Y page 164) turn the light switch to Ã, the daytime
RActivating/deactivating Highbeam Assist running lamps remain switched on.
(Y page 171) Canada only:
RSetting the daytime running lamps If you turn the light switch to L, the low-
(Y page 79) beam headlamps switch on. If you turn the
light switch to T or Ã, the daytime run-
Setting the time ning lamps remain switched on.

X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until the On-board computer (vehicles with
hours figure flashes. steering wheel buttons)
X Press the f or g button to set the hour.
X Press the 9 reset button. Operating the on-board computer
The minute display flashes.
X Press the f or g button to set the minute.
Overview
i If you keep the f or g button pressed, the

value will change continuously.
Activating/deactivating Highbeam
Assist
X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until the
_ indicator lamp flashes and the on or OFF
message appears in the display.
X Use the f or g button to switch Highbeam
Assist on/off.
Switching the daytime running lamps

on/off
If you switch the daytime running lamps on, the
daytime running lamps will automatically light X To activate the on-board computer: turn
up when the engine is running. the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
For safety reasons, it is only possible to change The on-board computer shows vehicle informa-
this setting when the vehicle is stationary. The tion and settings in the display.
factory setting is on in countries in which day- You can control the display and the settings in
time running lamp mode or daytime running the on-board computer with the buttons on the
lamps are mandatory. steering wheel.
On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 165
: Display

On-board computer operation
; W and X
RSelects submenus
RChanges values
RAdjusts the volume
Using the telephone
6 Accepts a call
~ Ends a call
= Scrolls from one menu to another
V Forwards
U Back
Scrolls within a menu
9 Forwards
: Back
Controls
You can think of the order of the menus and of
the functions within a menu as a circle:
X Press the V or U button repeatedly.
The menus are displayed one after the other.
X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly.
The functions in the menu or submenu are
displayed successively.
Several functions are combined thematically in
the menus.
The display changes when you press one of the
buttons on the steering wheel. You can use a
function to call up information or to change the
settings for the vehicle.
For example, the AUDIO menu has functions for
controlling the radio or CD player.
Unlike in other menus, you will find submenus in
the Settings menu. For information on how to
use these submenus, see the "Settings menu"
The number of menus depends on your vehicle's
equipment.
i Operation of the audio equipment using the
steering wheel buttons and making settings
using the AUDIO menu only function with
Sprinter audio equipment. If you are using
audio equipment from another manufacturer,
the described functions may be restricted or
not available at all.
Z
Menu overview
Diagrams
This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus.
Generic terms i The generic terms in the tabular overview

should make orientation easier for you. How-
The illustration shows the menus on a vehicle ever, they are not always shown on the dis-
with Audio 15. play.
On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-board computer
always shows the AUDIO and TEL (telephone)
menus in English. This is the case even if a dif- Operation menu
ferent language is selected for the display.
Operation Overview
: Operation menu (Y page 166) You can select the following functions in the
RStandard
Operation menu by pressing the 9 or :
display
button on the steering wheel:
RCalling up the service due date
RDisplaying the trip odometer and odometer
(Y page 226)
(standard display) (Y page 167)
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 253)
RDisplaying the coolant temperature
RChecking the engine oil level
(Y page 167)
(Y page 220)
RCalling up the service due date
; Audio menu (Y page 167) (Y page 226)
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 253)
= Message memory menu (Y page 176)
RChecking the oil level (Y page 220)
? Settings menu (Y page 168)
A Trip computer menu (Y page 174)
B Telephone menu (Y page 175)
Standard display Audio menu

General notes
Use the functions in the Audio menu to operate
the audio equipment when switched on.
i Operation of the audio equipment using the
steering wheel buttons and making settings
using the AUDIO menu only function with
Sprinter audio equipment. If you are using
audio equipment from another manufacturer,
the described functions may be restricted or
not available at all.
: Odometer If no audio equipment is switched on, you will
; Trip odometer see the message AUDIO off.
= Outside temperature or digital speedometer
? Clock Selecting a radio station
A Selector lever position or current shift range
(Y page 124)
In the basic setting, the odometer and the trip
odometer are shown in the upper part of the
display. This is referred to as the standard dis-
play.
Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the V or U button repeatedly : Reception frequency
until the standard display is shown. ; Waveband or waveband with memory preset
number
Displaying the coolant temperature Using the steering wheel buttons
X Switch on the audio equipment (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
X Press the V or U button repeatedly
until the station selected appears in the dis-
play.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired station.
Using the steering wheel buttons i You can only store new stations on the audio
X Press the V or U button repeatedly system itself. See the separate operating
until the standard display is shown. instructions.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the You can also operate the audio equipment in
coolant temperature. the same way as usual.
The temperature displayed may climb to 250 ‡
(120 †) when the vehicle is being driven in nor-
mal conditions and if the coolant contains the
correct concentration of corrosion inhibitor and
antifreeze. At high outside temperatures and
when driving in mountainous terrain, the coolant
temperature may rise to the end of the scale.
Z
Operating the CD player i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset

all of the functions while the vehicle is in

motion. For example, in the Lighting sub-
menu, the Daytime runn. lamps function
remains unchanged.
Resetting all settings
: Current CD (with CD changer)

; Current track
X Switch on the audio equipment and select the
CD player (see the separate operating instruc-
tions).
Settings menu
until the settings for the current CD appear in When the Settings message is displayed, you
the display. can reset all functions of the submenu to the
X Press the 9 or : button to select a CD
factory settings.
track. Using the steering wheel buttons
until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
Settings menu play.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button for approx-
Introduction imately 3 seconds.
You will see a message in the display prompt-
In the Settings menu, the following options and ing you to press the 9 reset button again to
submenus are available: confirm.
RResetting all settings X Press the 9 reset button again.
RResetting the functions of a submenu The functions in all submenus are reset to the
RInstrument cluster (Y page 169) factory settings.
- Units and language settings i If you want to retain the settings, do not
- Status bar settings press the 9 reset button a second time. The
RTime(Y page 171) Settings menu appears again after approx-
RLighting (Y page 171) imately 5 seconds.
- Switching surround lighting on/off
- Switching the daytime running lamps
Resetting the functions of a submenu
on/off You can individually reset the functions of each
- Setting the exterior lighting delayed switch- submenu to the factory settings.
off Using the steering wheel buttons
- Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist
RVehicle until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
- Setting the radio station selection play.
- Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
RStationary heating or auxiliary heating menu selection.
(Y page 108) X Press the W or X button to select a
RConvenience (Y page 173) submenu.
- Key-dependent settings
X Press and hold the 9 reset button for approx- Instrument cluster submenu
imately 3 seconds.

You will see a message in the display prompt- Selecting the unit for temperature
ing you to press the 9 reset button again to
confirm.
X Press the 9 reset button again.
All functions in the submenu are reset to the
factory settings.
i If you want to retain the settings, do not
press the 9 reset button a second time. The
Settings menu appears again after approx-
imately 5 seconds. Using the steering wheel buttons
Selecting submenus until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
play.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Inst. cluster submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Tem‐
perat. function.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
You will see the collection of submenus. There X Press the W or X button to select the
are more submenus than can be displayed at the unit for all messages in the display: °C
same time. (degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahrenheit).
Selecting the unit for the digital speed-
X Press the V or U button repeatedly ometer
play.
menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select a
submenu.
The submenu currently selected is highligh-
ted.
X Press the 9 button to select the function Using the steering wheel buttons
within a submenu.
X Change the setting by pressing the W or
X button. until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
The changed setting is saved. play.
menu selection.
Inst. cluster submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Dig.
speedo. function.
unit for the digital speedometer: km/h or
mph .
Z
Selecting the unit for distance Selecting the display for the status bar
Using the steering wheel buttons Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press the V or U button repeatedly
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
play. play.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
menu selection. menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select the
Inst. cluster submenu. Inst. cluster submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Trip X Press the 9 button to select the Select
function. disp. function.
The selection marker is on the current setting. The selection marker is on the current setting.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select
unit for all messages in the display: km (kilo- whether to display the outside temperature or
meters) or miles . the speed (digital speedometer).
The selected display is then shown perma-
Selecting the language nently in the lower part of the display.
Selecting the unit for the tire pressure
The selected range of languages shown is just

an example. The range of languages available is
specific to each country. Using the steering wheel buttons
Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly
X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
until the Settings menu appears in the display.
play. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection.
menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the W or X button to select the Inst. cluster submenu.
Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the 9 button to select the Tire
X Press the 9 button to select the Language pres. function.
function. The selection marker is on the current setting.
The selection marker is on the current setting. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the W or X button to set the lan- unit for the tire pressure in the display: bar
guage for all messages. or psi.
Clock/Date submenu Lighting submenu

Setting the time Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist
Using the steering wheel buttons Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press the V or U button repeatedly
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
play. play.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
menu selection. menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select the
Clock/Date submenu. Lighting submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select Set clock X Press the 9 button to select the High‐
Hours or Minutes . beam Assist function.
X Press the W or X button to set the val- The selection marker is on the current setting.
ues. X Press the W or X button to switch
Highbeam Assist On or Off .
Selecting the time format i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset
the Highbeam Assist function to the factory
settings during a journey. You will see the fol-
lowing message in the display: Setting
only possible at standstill.
For further information about Highbeam Assist,
see (Y page 83).
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
Using the steering wheel buttons off
play.
menu selection.
Clock/Date submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the 12/24 h
If you switch the daytime running lamps function
function. to On, the daytime running lamps will automati-
The selection marker is on the current setting. cally light up when the engine is running.
For safety reasons, it is only possible to change
12 h or 24 h clock format. this setting when the vehicle is stationary. The
factory setting is On in countries in which day-
time running lamp mode or daytime running
lamps are mandatory .
Z
Using the steering wheel buttons Rthe parking lamps

X Press the V or U button repeatedly Rthe tail lamps

until the Settings menu appears in the dis- Rthe license plate lamps
play. Rthe fog lamps
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The surround lighting automatically switches off
menu selection. after 40 seconds or if you:
Ropen the driver's door
Lighting submenu.
Rinsert the key into the ignition lock
X Press the 9 button to select the Daytime
Rlock the vehicle using the key
runn. lamps function.
The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting the exterior lighting delayed
X Press the W or X button to switch the switch-off
daytime running lamps On or Off.
i If you turn the light switch to T or L,
the corresponding lamp switches on. If you
turn the light switch to Ã, the daytime
running lamps remain switched on.
i For safety reasons, it is not possible to reset
the Daytime runn. lamps function to the
factory setting while the vehicle is in motion.
You will see the following message in the dis- In the Headlamps submenu, you can set
play: Setting only possible at stand‐ whether and for how long you wish the exterior
still. lighting to remain on after closing the doors.
Switching surround lighting on or off Using the steering wheel buttons
play.
menu selection.
Lighting submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Head‐
Using the steering wheel buttons lamps function.
X Press the V or U button repeatedly The selection marker is on the current setting.
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- X Press the W or X button to select
play. whether and for how long you wish the exte-
rior lighting to remain on.
menu selection. If you have set the delayed switch-off and switch
X Press the W or X button to select the off the engine, the following remain lit:
Lighting submenu. Rthe parking lamps
X Press the 9 button to select the Loc. Rthe tail lamps
lighting function. Rthe license plate lamps
Rthe fog lamps
X Press the W or X button to switch the
surround lighting On or Off . i You can reactivate this function by opening
If you switch the surround lighting to On, the fol- a door within 10 minutes.
lowing lamps light up in the dark after you have If, after switching off the engine, you do not
unlocked the vehicle using the key: open a door or you close an open door, the
exterior lighting switches off after
60 seconds.
Vehicle submenu X Press the 9 button to select the Blind

Spot Assist function.

Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity The selection marker is on the current setting.
X Press the W or X button to switch Blind
Spot Assist On or Off .
For further information about Blind Spot Assist;
see (Y page 144).
Heating submenu
Selecting the switch-on time for the aux-
You can use the Wipe sensor function to set iliary heating
the sensitivity of the rain/ light sensor.
play.
menu selection.
Vehicle submenu. Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the 9 button to select the Wipe X Press the V or U button repeatedly
sensor function. until the Settings menu appears in the dis-
The selection marker is on the current setting. play.
X Press the W or X button to adjust the X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
sensitivity of the rain/light sensor. menu selection.
The levels are graded as follows: X Press the W or X button to select the
RLevel
Heating submenu.
1: high sensitivity – wiping begins even
in light rain X Press the 9 button to switch to the Aux.
RLevel 2: moderate sensitivity

heat. submenu selection (Y page 108).
RLevel 3: low sensitivity – wiping only begins
X Press the W or X button to set the
in heavy rain desired switch-on time.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Use the Timer off setting to deactivate
automatic switch-on.
X Press button V.
The switch-on time is selected.
Convenience submenu

play.
menu selection. The Key function allows you to define whether
X Press the W or X button to select the settings for some submenus are stored with a
Vehicle submenu. key dependence.
Z
This function pertains to the Inst. cluster Using the steering wheel buttons
(instrument cluster) menu, the Lighting menu
X Press the V or U button to select

and the Vehicle menu. After start.
Using the steering wheel buttons or
X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press the 9 or : button to select
until the Settings menu appears in the dis- After reset.
play.
The values in the After start submenu refer to
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- the start of the journey. The values in the After
menu selection. reset submenu refer to the last reset of the trip
X Press the W or X button to select the computer.
Convenience submenu. The After start trip computer function is
X Press the 9 button to select the Key func- automatically reset if:
tion. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
The selection marker is on the current setting. than 4 hours.
X Press the W or X button to activate or R999 hours have been exceeded.
deactivate key dependency. R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The After reset trip computer is automatically
reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
Trip computer menu 99,999 miles.
General notes i If you turn the key to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock or remove it, all the values are reset
You can call up or reset statistical data for the after approximately four hours.
vehicle in the Trip computer menu. The values will not be reset if you turn the key
i When you call up the trip computer again, it back to position 1 or 2 during this time.
displays the last function called up.
The units of the statistical information dis- Calling up the range
played are set permanently for each specific
country, and are therefore independent of the Using the steering wheel buttons
units selected in the Settings menu. X Press the V or U button to select
After start.
Trip computer "After start" or "After X Press the 9 or : button to select
reset" Range.
The approximate distance which can be cov-
ered with the tank's current contents and
your current style of driving is shown.
i If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
the fuel tank, the 7 Please refuel mes-
sage is shown instead of the range.
Resetting the trip computer

Example: "After start" trip computer
: Distance Using the steering wheel buttons
; Time X Press the V or U button to select
= Average speed After start.
? Average fuel consumption X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function you would like to reset.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the
values are reset to "0".
Telephone menu Accepting a call

Introduction X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
G WARNING The display shows the call duration.
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- Rejecting or ending a call
cle while driving, you will be distracted from X Press ~ button on the steering wheel to
traffic conditions. You could also lose control reject or end a call.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. The caller then hears the engaged tone.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic The display shows the mobile phone opera-
situation permits. If you are not sure that this tional readiness symbol again.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- Dialing a number from the phone book
ment when the vehicle is stationary. You can enter new telephone numbers into the
phone book via the mobile phone (see the sep-
You must observe the legal requirements of the arate operating instructions). If your mobile
country in which you are currently driving when phone is able to receive calls, you can search for
operating a mobile phone in the vehicle. If it is and dial a number from the phone book.
permitted to operate a mobile phone while the
vehicle is in motion, only operate it when road Using the steering wheel buttons
and traffic conditions permit. X Use the V or U button to select the TEL
If you have connected a mobile phone to the menu.
Sprinter hands-free system, you can operate it The display shows the mobile phone opera-
using the functions in the TEL menu. tional readiness symbol.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate X Press the 9 or : button to switch to
operating instructions). the phone book.
The on-board computer reads the phone book
X Switch on the audio equipment (see the sep-
stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone.
arate operating instructions). This may take more than a minute.
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection between
When the message is no longer displayed,
the mobile phone and the audio equipment reading has ended.
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the V or U button on the steering
desired name.
wheel to select the TEL menu.
or
X When Please enter PIN: appears in the
X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the
display, enter the PIN using the mobile phone
or audio equipment. 9 or : button longer than 1 second.
The mobile phone will search for a network. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
The display remains blank during this time. button or reach the end of the list.
You will see the mobile phone operational Using the steering wheel buttons
readiness display once the mobile phone has X To start dialing: press the 6 button.
found a network. The on-board computer dials the correspond-
i You can obtain further information about ing phone number.
suitable mobile phones and connecting When a connection is established, the name
mobile phones via Bluetooth® at any qualified of the other person and/or the call duration
specialist workshop. appear in the display.
X To exit the phone book: press the ~ but-
i If the mobile phone operational readiness ton.
symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside of the
transmission and reception range.
Z
176 Display messages
Redialing over, the safety systems may no longer be

The on-board computer saves the last names or able to protect you or others as they are
numbers dialed in the redial memory. designed to do.
Using the steering wheel buttons Always have service work carried out at a
X Use the V or U button to select the TEL qualified specialist workshop.
menu.
The display shows the mobile phone opera- i If you turn the key to position 2 in the igni-
tional readiness symbol. tion, a display check is performed. All warning
X Press the 6 button. and indicator lamps (except the turn signal
The display shows the most recently dialed indicator lamps) and the display are activa-
numbers or names in the redial memory. ted. Before starting the journey, check that
the warning and indicator lamps are operating
correctly.
desired name or number.
X To start dialing: press the 6 button.
Vehicles without steering wheel but-
The on-board computer dials the correspond-
ing phone number. tons
When a connection is established, the name Warnings, malfunctions or additional informa-
of the other person and/or the call duration tion may also be shown in the display. The fol-
appear in the display. lowing tables show all the display messages. A
or warning tone sounds with certain display mes-
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ sages.
button.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons
The on-board computer shows warnings, mal-
Display messages functions or additional information in the dis-
play. A warning tone sounds with certain display
Notes on display messages messages. Display messages of a high priority
are shown in red.
Important safety notes Please respond in accordance with the display
messages and follow the additional notes in this
G WARNING Operator's Manual.
No information will be displayed if either the You can hide low-priority display messages by
instrument cluster or the display is inopera- pressing the V, U, 9 or : button
tive. on the steering wheel or the 9 reset button.
As a result, you will not be able to see warning You cannot hide display messages of the highest
and indicator lamps or information about the priority. These messages will continue to be
driving conditions, such as speed or outside shown in the display until their cause has been
eliminated.
temperature. Driving characteristics may be
The on-board computer stores certain display
impaired. Adjust your driving style and vehicle messages in the message memory
speed accordingly. (Y page 176).
Contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Message memory
G WARNING The on-board computer only records and shows
If service work is not carried out correctly, the malfunctions and warnings from certain sys-
operating safety of your vehicle may be affec- tems. Therefore, make sure that your vehicle is
ted. This could cause you to lose control of safe to use. You could otherwise cause an acci-
your vehicle and cause an accident. More- dent by driving an unsafe vehicle.
Display messages 177
The on-board computer stores certain display

messages. In the Message memory menu, you

can call up stored display messages.
until the number of stored display messages,
e.g. 2 messages, appears in the display.
If no malfunctions have occurred, the No
messages message appears.
X Scroll through the stored display messages
with the 9 or : button.
X To exit the message memory menu: press
the V or U button.
When you switch off the ignition, all display mes-
sages are deleted from the message memory.
You can only remove the key when it is in the
basic position.
Z
Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_ _ _ The activation conditions for cruise control have not been met.
V You can only activate cruise control from speeds of 20 mph
(30 km/h).
or
Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also
displayed after 30 seconds.
The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.
X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is also
displayed after 30 seconds.
The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more
wheels because:
Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel
electronics.
Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units has
been exceeded.
Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.
X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at a
— — TPMS The — — message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is

also displayed after 30 seconds.
The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures of the
individual tires differ significantly.
X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 253).
dEF Chk In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.
The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
X Add DEF supply (Y page 129).
The å DEF indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle is
stationary, at the latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on
the ignition or start the engine after refueling.
In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp and the yel-
low å DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and a
warning tone sounds.
The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant
with ISO 22241.
X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist
workshop as soon as possible.

StArtS RExx In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning
tone sequence sounds.
The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark.
After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply
will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then
only be started another 16 times.
The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the
message every time the engine is started.
X Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF (Y page 129).
The å DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than
20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on
the ignition or started the engine after refueling.
low å DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and
three short warning tones sound.
with ISO 22241.
The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-
evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-
age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp and the ; Check

Engine indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and three
StArtS IdLE warning tones sound.
If the StArtS IdLE message is displayed, you cannot drive the vehicle
at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
The å DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than
20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on
the ignition or started the engine after refueling.
low å DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and a
warning tone sounds.
You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
Z

Err flashes for 5 seconds, in addition the Ã indicator lamp flashes in

the instrument cluster and then lights up yellow continuously.
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThere are no lane markings present.
RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or
fog.
RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:
- It is too dark.
- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt or
snow.
RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 130).
X Clean the windshield (Y page 235), particularly in the camera's
field of vision.
If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is opera-
tional again.
If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Err flashes for 5 seconds, the _ indicator lamp also flashes and then
goes out.
Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily not operational or
Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
fog.
field of vision.
If the _ indicator lamp goes out, Highbeam Assist is operational
again.
If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind_Err flashes for 5 seconds, the yellow indicator lamps flash in the exterior
mirrors and then light up constantly.
Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Err flashes for 5 seconds, the Ä indicator lamp also flashes and then
lights up constantly.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
Display messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Safety systems
ABS ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR and BAS,
Visit workshop as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as a result.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The brak-
ing distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven
wheels can spin when accelerating.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.
X Drive on with care.
ABS ABS is temporarily unavailable or is deactivated due to undervoltage.

Unavailable ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable as
a result.
The battery may not be being charged.
G WARNING
hard, for example.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The brak-
ing distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The driven
wheels can spin when accelerating.
X Drive for a short distance at a speed of more than 13 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
Z

: ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

The engine power output may be reduced.
Visit workshop
G WARNING
The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
: BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Visit workshop G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without elec-
tronic support.
The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
: ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.

Unavailable
G WARNING
hard, for example.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
Brake wear Visit qualified specialist workshop.
workshop

b There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
Brake fluid Visit G WARNING

workshop Braking performance can be impaired.
traffic conditions.
X Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir
(Y page 223).
If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark:
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.
If the brake fluid is above the MIN mark:

b EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.

Brake force distri‐
bution G WARNING
The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking
distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
b EBD has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Brake force distri‐ G WARNING

bution Visit work‐ The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking
shop distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
Z

ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. As a result, cruise

Visit workshop control has also been deactivated.
Engine power output may be reduced.
G WARNING
ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. As a result, cruise

Unavailable control has also been deactivated.
G WARNING
X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
c Additionally, a warning tone sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.
Parking brake
X Release the parking brake (Y page 131).
Release brake
7 The belt system has malfunctioned.
Seatbelt sys. Visit G WARNING

workshop In the event of an accident or a rapid deceleration, the seat belts either
cannot protect you as intended.
X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
6 The restraint system is faulty.
Restraint system G WARNING

Visit workshop If the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual systems could be
triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the event of
an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.
Lights

b The left-hand low beam is faulty3.

X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible
Low beam left
(Y page 87).
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
b The right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty3.

X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible
Low beam right
(Y page 87).
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
b The left-hand cornering light is faulty3.

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 87).
Cornering lt. left
b The right-hand cornering light is faulty3.

Cornering lt. right
b The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in the

Ã position and you have forgotten to remove the key.
Lights on auto‐ X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
matic. Remove key
b The left-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 88) or rear
Turn signal left (Y page 89) indicator lamp.
b The right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 88) or rear
Turn signal right (Y page 89) indicator lamp.
b The left brake lamp is faulty3.

Brake lamp left
b The right brake lamp is faulty3.

Brake lamp right
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty3. This display message will only
appear if all LEDs have failed.
Third brake lamp X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
b The left high-beam headlamp is faulty3.

High beam left
3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn
signals.
Z

b The right high beam headlamp is faulty3.

High beam right
b A license plate lamp is faulty3.

License plate lamp
b You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving the vehicle.
X Turn the light switch to $.
Switch off lights
b The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty.3

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
Foglamp front left workshop.
b The right-hand front fog lamp is faulty3.

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
Foglamp front right workshop.
b The rear fog lamp is faulty3.

Rear foglamp
b The front left parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.

Parking lamp front
left
b The front right parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.

Parking lamp front
right
b A backup lamp is faulty3.

Reverse lamp
b The left-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

Tail lamp left
b The right-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

Tail lamp right
b A perimeter lamp is faulty.3

Marker lamp
3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn
signals.

Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist is faulty.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Highbeam Assist tem‐ Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

porarily unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble
fog.
field of vision.
If the malfunction has been rectified, the Highbeam Assist
available again message appears.
Engine
Exhaust Filter: The automatic regeneration of the diesel particle filter is not sufficient
Drive at high or has malfunctioned.
engine speed. See X Drive at an engine speed of above 2000 rpm until the display mes-
Oper. Manual sage disappears.
If the display message does not go out after approximately
20 minutes, have the malfunction rectified immediately at a quali-
Check Diesel The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
Exhaust Fluid See X Add DEF supply (Y page 129).
Operator's Manual The display message only disappears when the vehicle is stationary,
at the latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition
or start the engine after refueling.
å Three short warning tones also sound.

After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply
XX starts remaining will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then
The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in the
Z

å The yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp also lights up and three
short warning tones sound.
Idle Mode You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
The display message and the yellow ; Check Engine indicator
lamp only disappear when the vehicle is stationary, at the latest
after 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition or start the
engine after refueling.
Check Diesel In addition, the yellow ; DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning
Exhaust Fluid See tone sounds.
Operator's Manual The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant
with ISO 22241.
X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist
workshop as soon as possible.
å The yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp also lights up and three
short warning tones sound.
XX starts remaining After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply
will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then
The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in the
with ISO 22241.
The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-
evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-
age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
å The yellow ; DEF indicator lamp also lights up and three short
warning tones sound.
Idle Mode The vehicle cannot be driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
? The coolant temperature is too high.

If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, the
Coolant Stop, turn coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is switched on
engine off or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving in
mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.
X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message con-
tinues to be shown.

* The coolant level is too low.
Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine could
Coolant Check level overheat and be damaged.
traffic conditions.
X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 283).
X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 127).
Reserve fuel Drive
to a gas station
: The water that has collected in the water separator has reached the
maximum level.
Water in fuel Visit X Drain the water separator (Y page 224).
workshop
m The fuel filter is dirty.

X Have the fuel filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-
Fuel filter Visit fied specialist workshop.
workshop
4 The oil level is too low.

X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 220), and add
Engine oil Add 1.0 oil.
quart(Canada: 1.0
liter)
4 You want to check the engine oil level even though the engine is still
running.
Engine oil level X Switch off the engine.
Not when eng. run‐
X Check the oil level (Y page 220).
ning
4 You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the
engine or catalytic converter.
Engine oil level X Check the oil level (Y page 220).
Reduce oil level
X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted at the next
X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified at the next
Z

4 There is not enough or no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine

damage.
Engine oil level X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
Stop, turn engine traffic conditions.
off
X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 221).
X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualified
4 There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.

X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
Oil sensor Visit workshop.
workshop
Driving systems
_ _ _ The activation conditions for cruise control have not been met.
Cruise control You can only activate cruise control from speeds of 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Cruise control Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Visit workshop X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Lane Keep. Assist and the Ã indicator lamp lights up yellow.

Temporarily Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Unavailable Possible causes are:
RThere are no lane markings present.
fog.
RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:
- It is too dark.
- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt or
snow.
field of vision.
If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is opera-
tional again.
Lane Keep. Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
Inoperative X Have Blind Spot Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is faulty.

tion Assist Inoper‐ X Have COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST checked at a qualified spe-
ative cialist workshop.
Recognition by the radar sensor system can be impaired in the case of:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
X Clean the radar sensor system area.
Intervention Cross‐ The d indicator lamp also flashes in the instrument cluster.
wind Assist Crosswind Assist has intervened perceptibly.
Tires
Tire pres. Adjust The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures of the
pres. individual tires differ significantly.
O X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if
necessary (Y page 253).
Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.

monitor inoperative X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable due to
monitor currently radio interference or undervoltage.
unavailable X Once the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure monitor is
automatically activated.
Tire pres.- The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more
monitor inoperative wheels because:
No wheel sensors Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel
electronics.
Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units has
been exceeded.
Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.
X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
Z

Check tire(s) The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If the tire
pressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheel position
O is also displayed.
traffic conditions.
X Check the tires.
X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 266).
X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 253).
The display message disappears automatically after driving for a
few minutes with the corrected tire pressure.
Warning Tire defect One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitor has
detected the affected wheel, the wheel position is also displayed.
O X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 266).
Vehicle
Ð The power assistance for the steering has malfunctioned. You need to
steer more forcefully.
Steering Assistance X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have the
Failure steering checked immediately.
# The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective

alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.
Battery/Alternator X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
Visit workshop traffic conditions.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a qualified
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
÷ The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all.
X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.
Electrically oper‐
X Open or close the sliding door again.
ated step
X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push the
step in manually (Y page 67). Before stepping out, remind the pas-
sengers that the step is missing.
1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood is not
closed.
Hood open X Close the hood.
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 193

9 You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone.
X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.
Please enter PIN:
1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all the doors
are closed.
Doors open X Close the doors.
¦ The washer fluid level is too low.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 224).
Washer fluid Check
level
Key
+ The key is no longer working.

Replace key Visit
workshop
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
When switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warning
lamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem. Only when
these indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine has started or during the
journey has a malfunction occurred.
· The red distance The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
warning lamp Increase the distance.
lights up while the
vehicle is in
motion.
· The red distance You are approaching a vehicle ahead at too high a speed.
warning lamp X Be prepared to brake immediately.
flashes while the
X Pay particular attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
vehicle is in
brake or take evasive action.
motion. Addition-
ally, an intermit-
tent warning tone
sounds.
Ã The yellow Lane Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.
Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist if necessary (Y page 147).
indicator lamp
lights up while
you are driving.
Z
194 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Ã The green Lane Lane Keeping Assist is operational.

Keeping Assist
indicator lamp
lights up while
you are driving.
Ã The red Lane You are driving with the front wheel on a lane marking.
Keeping Assist
indicator lamp
lights up while
you are driving.
Additionally, an
intermittent
warning tone
sounds.
d The yellow G WARNING
ASR/ESP® warn-
ing lamp flashes ESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels has
while the vehicle reached its tire grip limit.
is in motion. Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do
not use too much throttle.
X Drive slowly.
d The yellow The all-wheel drive is activated/deactivated. When changing gear,

ASR/ESP® warn- ASR and ESP® are deactivated.
ing lamp is lit After changing gear, ASR and ESP® are automatically reactivated.
while the engine
Engage/disengage the all-wheel drive (Y page 148).
is running.
d The yellow In vehicles with all-wheel drive the brake system is overheated.
ASR/ESP® warn-
ing lamp flashes G WARNING
slowly while the The performance of 4ETS is reduced. The braking power output may
vehicle is in be lower.
motion. There is a risk of an accident.
X Drive on carefully and adapt your driving style to suit the road and
traffic conditions.
X When the message is no longer displayed, 4ETS and normal braking
power are available again.
d The yellow ASR is deactivated.
ASR/ESP® warn-
ing lamp is lit G WARNING
while the engine The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.
X Activate ASR again. Exceptions (Y page 53).

h!:b EBD is malfunctioning or deactivated due to undervoltage or malfunc-
The yellow ESP®, ABS tion.
and ASR/BAS indicator The battery may not be being charged.
lamps and the red brake
system indicator lamp G WARNING
are lit while the engine is The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you apply the
running. brakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking sit-
uations.
X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in
the display (Y page 176).
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
b The red brake sys- There is insufficient brake fluid in the expansion tank.
tem indicator
lamp is lit while G WARNING
the engine is run- Braking performance can be impaired.
ning. There is a risk of an accident.
traffic conditions.
X Check the brake fluid level in the expansion tank (Y page 223).
X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on!
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.
b When towing a G WARNING

trailer: the red
brake system The brake force booster in the trailer is faulty.
indicator lamp is The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle could change.
lit while the There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losing control over
engine is running. the truck/trailer combination.
Additionally, a There is a risk of an accident.
warning tone X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the messages in
sounds. the display (Y page 176).
traffic conditions.
X Do not drive on.
Z

: The yellow ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

ASR/BAS indica- The engine power output may be reduced.
tor lamp is lit
while the engine G WARNING
is running. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
: The yellow BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

ASR/BAS indica-
tor lamp is lit G WARNING
while the engine The brake system continues to function normally, but without elec-
is running. tronic support.
: The yellow ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.
ASR/BAS indica- The battery may not be being charged.
tor lamp is lit
while the engine G WARNING
is running. The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.

! The yellow ABS ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction or is temporarily unavailable.
indicator lamp is ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable as
lit while the a result.
engine is running. Self-diagnosis may not be complete, or the battery may not be charg-
ing.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if the
brakes are applied with maximum force.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired.
X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the indi-
cator lamp goes out.
If the indicator lamp does not go out:
å The yellow DEF The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or the current Diesel
indicator lamp is Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the vehicle range.
lit while the X Observe the messages in the display.
engine is running.
h The yellow ESP® ESP® is deactivated due to undervoltage or a malfunction. As a result,
indicator lamp is cruise control has also been deactivated.
lit while the Engine power output may be reduced.
engine is running. The battery may not be being charged.
G WARNING
Z

6 The red warning The restraint systems have malfunctioned.

lamp does not go
out approx- G WARNING
imately 4 seconds If the restraint systems are malfunctioning, individual systems could
after the ignition be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the event
is switched on, or of an accident.
it lights up again. There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.
# The red battery The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective
indicator lamp is alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.
lit while the X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
engine is running. traffic conditions.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult the near-
est qualified specialist workshop.
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
# The red battery The battery is faulty.

indicator lamp is X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
lit while the traffic conditions.
engine is running.
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# The yellow brake The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
pad wear indica-
tor lamp is lit after G WARNING
the engine is star- Braking performance can be impaired.
ted or while the There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle is in
motion. X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
4 The yellow engine The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
oil level warning X Check the engine for oil loss.
lamp is lit after
X If oil loss is detected: consult a qualified specialist workshop imme-
the engine is star-
diately.
ted or while the
vehicle is in X If no oil loss is detected: check the oil level and add engine oil
motion. (Y page 221).

4 The yellow engine On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level display additionally
oil level warning appears in the display, e.g. – 2.0 qts (Canada: – 2.0 ltr).
lamp flashes and There is not enough or no oil in the engine.
the warning buz- There is a danger of engine damage.
zer sounds after
the engine is star- X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
ted or while the traffic conditions.
vehicle is in X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 221).
motion. X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualified
4 The yellow engine The engine oil level is above the maximum level.
oil level warning There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.
lamp lights up and
X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 221).
the warning buz-
zer sounds after X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted as soon as
the engine is star- possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
ted or while the X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified as soon as
vehicle is in possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
motion.
4 On vehicles with a There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.
diesel engine, the X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
yellow engine oil workshop.
level warning
lamp lights up
repeatedly during
the journey.
% The yellow cool- The coolant level is too low.
ant level warning Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine could
lamp lights up overheat and be damaged.
while the engine
is running.
traffic conditions.
X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 222).
X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high.

warning lamp is lit X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and
while the engine traffic conditions.
is running.
Z

? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high.

warning lamp is lit If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, the
while the engine coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is switched on
is running. or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving in
mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.
X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message con-
tinues to be shown.
7 The yellow The fuel filler cap is not closed.
| reserve fuel warn- X Close the fuel filler cap.
ing lamp is on. At You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.
the same time, 0
X If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectified imme-
appears in the
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
fuel tank content
display while the
engine is running,
although there is
fuel in the fuel
tank.
; The yellow Check You have used up all fuel in the tank.
Engine indicator The engine is running in emergency mode.
lamp is lit up or
X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 127).
flashes while the
engine is running. X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 123).
X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling.
Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does not
need to be checked.
; The yellow Check The injection control is malfunctioning.

Engine indicator The engine is running in emergency mode.
lamp is lit up or Engine power output may be reduced.
flashes while the
engine is running. X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engine indi-
cator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Observe the legal requirements.

; The yellow Check The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-
Engine indicator evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-
lamp is lit while age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
the engine is run- After the first message and under normal operating conditions, you
ning. can drive on for up to approximately 500 mi (800 km). Then a warning
tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started another 16
times.
X Observe the messages in the display.
X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked immediately at a
In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engine indi-
cator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Observe the legal requirements.
% If you turn the key At extremely low temperatures, the engine may not start.
to position 2 in There is a malfunction in the preglow system.
the ignition lock, X
Have any malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.
the yellow pre-
glow indicator
lamp remains lit
for approximately
1 minute. Or the
yellow preglow
indicator lamp
lights up for
approximately
1 minute while
the engine is run-
ning.
\ The yellow diesel The automatic regeneration of the diesel particle filter is not sufficient
particle filter indi- or has malfunctioned.
cator lamp is lit X Drive at an engine speed above 2000 rpm until the diesel particle
while the engine filter indicator lamp goes out.
is running.
X If the diesel particle filter indicator lamp does not go out after
approximately 20 minutes: have the malfunction rectified immedi-
ately at a qualified specialist workshop.
È The yellow air fil- The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filter is dirty.
ter indicator lamp X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-
is lit while the fied specialist workshop.
engine is running.
Z

h The yellow tire G WARNING

pressure monitor
warning lamp The tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss of pressure
comes on. in at least one tire.
X Stop the vehicle without making any extreme steering maneuvers or
braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doing
so.
X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continues to
lose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tires imme-
diately.
The warning light will go out after the flat tire has been rectified and
you have been driving for a few minutes.
h US vehicles only: The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.

The yellow tire X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-
pressure monitor fied specialist workshop.
warning lamp
flashes for
60 seconds and
then remains lit.
: The yellow water The water that has collected in the water separator of the fuel filter has
separator indica- reached the maximum level.
tor lamp is lit X Drain the water separator (Y page 224).
when the ignition
is switched on.
m The yellow water The fuel filter is dirty.
separator indica- X Have the fuel filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-
tor lamp is lit fied specialist workshop.
when the ignition
is switched on.
¦ The yellow The water level is too low.
washer fluid level X Add washer fluid (Y page 224).
indicator lamp for
the windshield
washer/head-
lamp cleaning
system is lit after
the engine is star-
ted or while the
vehicle is in
motion.

7 The red seat belt The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt.
warning lamp X Fasten seat belt (Y page 42).
lights up continu-
ously or flashes. A
warning tone may
also sound.
b When the key is One of the exterior lighting bulbs is faulty, with the exception of the
turned to position perimeter lamps and the trailer lighting.
2 in the ignition
lock, the yellow i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can fail for
bulb warning all lamps with the exception of the turn signal lamps.
lamp lights up. X Replace the faulty bulb as soon as possible (Y page 86).
1 The yellow "door The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed.
open" indicator X Close the doors or hood.
lamp is lit while
driving.
1 The yellow "door The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all.
open" indicator X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.
lamp is lit.
X Open or close the sliding door again.
X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push the
step in manually (Y page 67). Before stepping out, remind the pas-
sengers that the step is missing.
Ð The indicator The power assistance for the steering has malfunctioned. You need to
lamp for the steer more forcefully.
steering is lit X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have the
when the ignition steering checked immediately.
is switched on.
Z
204 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
Useful information Glove box

safety.
Stowing and features

Glove box (example: glove box with a lockable lid)

Stowage spaces and stowage com- 1 Unlocked
partments 2 Locked
Important safety notes = Glove box handle
You can lock and unlock the glove box using the
G WARNING mechanical or folding key.
If you do not correctly store objects in the X To open: unlock the glove box lid if neces-
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung sary.
around, thus striking vehicle occupants. X Pull glove box handle = in the direction of the
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- arrow.
ing or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too ? Card holder
large in the trunk. A Pen holder
In addition, observe the information in the X To close: fold the glove box up and press it
"Loading guidelines" section (Y page 212). until it engages.
Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 205
Eyeglasses compartment in the over-

head control panel

Stowage space (example: front passenger side)
X To open: briefly press cover :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down-
wards.
X To close: press the eyeglasses compartment
into the overhead control panel until it
engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Dashboard stowage compartments Stowage compartment equipped with smartphone

connections
G WARNING = USB port
? 3.5 mm audio jack
Objects protruding from the stowage com-
partment above the front passenger front air i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB
bag could obstruct or even prevent deploy- port and an AUX-in connection is installed in
ment of the front passenger front air bag. The the stowage compartment. A Media Interface
front passenger front air bag may then fail to is a universal interface for portable audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
provide the intended protection. There is an
(see the separate audio system operating
increased risk of injury. instructions).
Do not place any protruding objects in the
stowage compartment above the front
passenger front air bag.
! The right and left storage spaces may be

loaded with a maximum of 11 lb (5 kg) each.
Z
206 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
Stowage compartment in the center Stowage space above the windshield

console
! The right and left stowage spaces may be
loaded with a maximum of 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
each.
Stowage compartment on the dashboard above

the center console (example with lid)
The stowage compartments on and in the center Stowage compartment (example: driver's side)
console can be used to store small, light objects. : Stowage compartment
X To open: pull release handle ;.
Lid : swings up.
X To close: close lid : and engage it. Stowage compartment under the twin
The lid of the stowage compartment must front-passenger seat
remain closed while the vehicle is in motion to
ensure that stowed objects are contained
safely.
Stowage space above the headliner

! The entire stowage space may be loaded
with a maximum of 66 lb (30 kg).
Do not place high, bulky loads in the stowage
space. You could otherwise damage the head-
liner in the event of sharp braking.
Twin front-passenger seat (example: Cargo Van)
You can stow various articles in the stowage
compartment under the twin front-passenger
seat.
X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seat
cushion out of front anchorage :.
X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and out
of rear anchorage ;.
X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.
X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down
the seat cushion by the rear edge.
On vehicles with a partition, stowage space : X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-
can only be loaded from the cargo compart- rest into rear anchorage ;.
ment. X Push down on the seat cushion at the front
until it engages in front anchorage :.
Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 207
Stowage compartment under the rear

bench seat
G WARNING
Always secure the folded-up seat cushion
with the retainer loop. The seat cushion could
otherwise drop down unexpectedly and
thereby cause injury to yourself or others.
G WARNING

When folding down the seat cushion, make
sure that nobody can become trapped.
! The retainer loop is neither a grab handle for

people to use nor a securing point for loads. It
may tear if used incorrectly.
Retainer loops ; are secured to the outer head
restraints.
X Attach retainer loop ; to hook = under-
neath folded-up seat cushion :.
X To fold down the seat cushion: hold seat
cushion : and detach retainer loop ; from
hook =.
X Fold down seat cushion :.
The seat cushion engages automatically.
Paper holder
For vehicles with a crewcab, you can use the

stowage compartment under the rear bench
seat to safely store tools and other small items.
X To fold up the rear bench seat: lift seat
cushion : out of the front anchorage and
fold it upwards in the direction of the arrow.
X To open: press the top of paper holder :.
Z
208 Bottle holder
Cup holder Cup holders in the center console

G WARNING
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
traveling, the container may be flung around
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may

be distracted from the traffic conditions and
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury. Cup holders in the center console
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is X To open: pull out ashtray compartment : by
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con- the recess.
Clamping arm ; of the cup holder opens out
tainers of the right size. Always close the con- fully.
tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
i Vehicles with the non-smoking package
have an additional cup holder instead of the
! Do not use the cup holder recesses as ash- ashtray.
trays. This could damage the cup holders.
X Place the beverage container into the cup
holder and push clamping arm ; against the
Cup holders in the dashboard container.
X To close: push ashtray compartment : into
the center console until it engages.
Bottle holder
Cup holder in dashboard stowage compartment

(example: right-hand side of vehicle)
: Cup holder
Bottle holders : in the front doors (example: co-

driver's door)
Cigarette lighter 209
Ashtray Cigarette lighter

Ashtray in the center console
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls

Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Ashtray in the center console Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
X Pull ashtray compartment : out by
unsupervised in the vehicle.
recess ;.
X To open: fold cover = upwards.
X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray by
the recesses on the left and right and pull the
insert out to empty it.
X To replace the insert: press it down into the
holder as shown.
Make sure that the insert is inserted correctly.
Otherwise you will not be able to close ashtray
compartment :.
Ashtrays in the passenger compart-

ment X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the key to
position 1 in the ignition lock.
X Press in cigarette lighter :.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket by
its handle.
Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panels

X To open: fold out the ashtray.
X To remove the insert: press retaining clip :
down and remove the ashtray from the trim.
X To replace the insert: insert the ashtray
down into the trim and close it.
Z
210 Mobile phone
12 V socket Only operate the equipment when the traffic

situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile phones.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is cov-

ering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
every second.
You and others can suffer health-related dam-
Socket on the lower section of the center console age through electromagnetic radiation. By using
: 12 V socket (25 A) an exterior antenna, a possible health risk
The 12 V sockets for accessories are: caused by electromagnetic fields, as discussed
in scientific circles, is taken into account. Only
Ron the lower section of the center console have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified
(12 V, 25 A) specialist workshop.
Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame (12 V,
We recommend the use of an approved exterior
15 A) antenna for operating the mobile phone. Only in
Rin the respective corner trim next to the rear this way can optimal mobile phone reception
doors in the passenger compartment (12 V, quality in the vehicle be ensured and mutual
15 A) interference between the vehicle electronics
Rin the cargo compartment next to the left rear and mobile phones minimized.
door (12 V, 15 A) Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
You can use the 12 V sockets (15 A) for acces- vidual country.
sories with a maximum power consumption of
180 W. You can connect accessories with a
maximum power consumption of 300 W to the Mobile phone pre-installation
12 V socket (25 A) on the lower section of the
center console. The mobile phone pre-installation includes a
hands-free system integrated into the vehicle.
i The sockets are supplied with power even The microphone for the hands-free system is
when the key is removed from the ignition installed in the overhead control panel or in the
lock. If accessories, e.g. a coolbox, remain overhead stowage compartment together with
connected while the engine is not running, the the front interior light.
battery will discharge.
In order to use the hands-free system, you will
need a special bracket. The Sprinter accesso-
ries include brackets for various mobile phone
Mobile phone models.
Important safety notes i Mobile phone brackets which are available
from various manufacturers on the open mar-
G WARNING ket are not compatible with the Sprinter tele-
If you operate information systems and com- phone system. You can recognize suitable
holders for your mobile phone by the imprin-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- ted star and the B6 spare part number on the
cle while driving, you will be distracted from back of the bracket.
Detailed instructions for use can be found in the
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. operating instructions for the mobile phone
Additional communications equipment 211
bracket and in the separate operating instruc-

tions for the mobile phone pre-installation.
i The mobile phone battery is charged
depending on the condition of charge and the
position of the key in the ignition lock. The
mobile phone display indicates the charging
process.
Additional communications equip-

ment
PND connector (on the side behind the instrument
Important safety notes cluster)
G WARNING = USB port
? 3.5 mm audio jack for the PND audio signal
If you operate mobile communication equip- (voice announcements)
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
X Connecting the PND: connect the PND ports
to the appropriate jacks in the vehicle.
i You can also use USB port = and 3.5 mm
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle audio jack ? for external audio sources.
is stationary. The voice announcements are heard through
the radio speakers when you start navigation.
You must observe the legal requirements for the The audio source played until this point is then
country in which you are currently driving when muted for the duration of the voice announce-
operating mobile communication equipment. ments.
Please remember, a navigation system does not
supply information on the load-bearing capacity i If you use audio devices or personal naviga-
of bridges or the overhead clearance of under- tion devices which have been recommended
passes. The driver remains responsible for by Mercedes-Benz, you can use all of the
safety at all times. functions available, such as the mute func-
You and others can suffer health-related dam- tion.
age through electromagnetic radiation. By using You can obtain further information from any
an exterior antenna, a possible health risk authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
caused by electromagnetic fields, as discussed
have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified
You will find information on installing electrical
or electronic equipment in the “Vehicle elec-
tronics” section (Y page 275).
Installation for PND mobile navigation

devices
You can secure a personal navigation device
(Personal Navigation Device PND) using a com-
mercially available adapter.
Z
212 Loading guidelines
Useful information rear bench seat, it is advisable to store it out-

side the vehicle.
well as standard and optional equipment of your G WARNING
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- When the permissible wheel loads, axle loads
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped and/or the maximum permissible gross vehi-
with all of the described functions. This also cle weight are exceeded, driving safety is
applies to systems and functions relevant to compromised. The handling as well as steer-
safety. ing and braking characteristics may be signif-
Read the information on qualified specialist icantly impaired. Overloaded tires may over-
workshops (Y page 26). heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk of
an accident.
When transporting a load, always observe the
Loading guidelines
Transporting loads
permissible wheel loads, axle loads and the

Important safety notes maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
for the vehicle (including occupants).
G WARNING
As a result of improperly placed or unevenly G WARNING
distributed loads, the center of gravity of the When you load the roof, the center of gravity
load being transported may be too high or too of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
far back. This can significantly impair handling istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
as well as steering and braking characteris- load, the driving characteristics, as well as
tics. There is a risk of an accident. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Always make sure that the center of gravity of There is a risk of an accident.
the load is: Never exceed the maximum roof load and
Rbetween the axles adjust your driving style.
and
! If you are using a roof carrier, observe the
Ras low as possible, near the rear axle. maximum roof load and maximum roof carrier
load.
G WARNING You will find information about the maximum
When objects are unsecured or inadequately roof load in the "Technical data" section
secured, they can slip, turn over or be thrown (Y page 286) and information about roof carri-
about, striking vehicle occupants. This also ers in the "Carrier systems" section
applies to: (Y page 216).
RDo not stack luggage or loads higher than the
Rluggage or loads backrests.
Ra rear bench seat which has been removed RStow objects preferably in the cargo com-
and is being transported in the vehicle in an partment.
exceptional case. RWhen transporting luggage, always use the
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the cargo tie-down rings and a parcel net, if pres-
ent.
event of braking maneuvers or abrupt
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteners which
changes in direction. are suitable for the weight and size of the
Always stow objects in such a way that they load.
cannot be tossed about. Before traveling, Always observe the operating instructions of the
secure objects, luggage or loads to prevent respective manufacturer when using suitable
them slipping or tipping over. If you remove a load securing aids or tie downs. In particular, the
information on service life.
Loading guidelines 213
Load securing aids and tie downs may not be During loading
used, for example, if:
Ridentification marks are missing or illegible ! On passenger van versions with maximum
seating layout, the permissible rear axle load
Rthere are yarn breakages, damage to bearing
would be exceeded if the full payload were to
seams or other signs of tearing be loaded in the cargo compartment.
Rthere are signs of shearing, deformation,
X Observe the gross axle weight rating and per-
pinching or other damage
missible gross vehicle weight for your vehicle.
Rthere is damage to clamping or connecting
Take into account that your vehicle's curb
elements weight is increased if accessories or optional
Such load securing aids and tie downs are worn; equipment are installed. The maximum pay-
they should not be used and must be replaced. If load is thus reduced.
you use load securing aids or tie downs which X Observe the notes on load distribution
are worn, the load may not be sufficiently (Y page 214).
secured and could cause damage to property. The overall center of gravity of the load should
Transporting loads
After an accident, the following must be always be as low as possible, centered and
checked at a specialist workshop: between the axles near the rear axle.
RCargo compartment floor X Secure the load (Y page 214).
RLoad surface Observe the legal requirements of the country
RCargo tie-down rings
in which you are currently driving.
RTie downs
Otherwise, the load may not be correctly
secured the next time anything is stowed. Checks after loading
Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the load G WARNING
increases the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. Observe the tips in the "Securing lug- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gage/loads" (Y page 214) and "Load distribu- gases, such as carbon monoxide. If the sliding
tion" (Y page 214) sections. door or rear door is open when the engine is
running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior, especially during the journey. There
Before loading is a risk of poisoning.
! The anti-slip mats cannot be used for secur- Always switch off the engine before opening
ing goods and must be replaced when they the sliding door or rear door. Never drive the
show signs of: vehicle when the sliding door or rear door is
RPermanent deformation and crushing open.
RCrack formation
RCuts
X Securing loads: check that the load is secure
before every journey and at regular intervals
X Tire pressure: check the tire pressure and during a long journey, and correct if neces-
correct if necessary (Y page 250). sary.
X Cargo compartment floor: clean the cargo X Doors: close the sliding doors and rear doors.
compartment floor. X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressures
The cargo compartment floor must be free according to the vehicle load (Y page 250).
from oil and dust, dry and swept clean to pre- X Driving style: adapt your driving style
vent the load from slipping. according to the vehicle load.
X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on the
cargo compartment floor if necessary.
Z
214 Securing loads
Load distribution Always tension the tie-downs in the proper

manner and only between the described
General notes cargo tie-down rings. Always use tie-downs
! Excessive loads on individual points of the designed specifically for the loads.
cargo floor or on the load surface impair vehi-
cle handling characteristics and could cause G WARNING
damage to the floor covering.
You may not transport anyone in the cargo
The overall center of gravity of the load should compartment or on the load surface. Never let
always be as low as possible, centered and more people ride in the vehicle than there are
between the axles near the rear axle.
seat belts available. Make sure everyone rid-
On Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans: ing in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a
X Always transport loads in the cargo compart- separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for
ment. more than one person at a time.
Transporting loads
X Always place the load against the backrests of

the rear bench seat. ! Observe the information on the maximum
X Move large and heavy loads as far towards the loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-
front of the vehicle as possible against the down points.
rear bench seat. Stow the load flush with the If you use several cargo tie-down points to
rear bench seat. secure a load, you must always take the max-
X Always additionally secure the load with suit- imum loading capacity of the weakest cargo
able load-securing aids or tie downs. tie-down point into account.
Observe the following notes: If you brake hard, for example, the forces act-
ing could be up to several times the weight
RDo not stack loads higher than the upper edge
force of the load. Always use multiple cargo
of the backrests. tie-down points in order to distribute the force
RTransport loads behind seats that are not absorption. Load the anchorages evenly.
occupied.
Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie-
RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert
down points or tie-down rings.
the seat belts crosswise into the buckle of the
opposite seat belt. Please also refer to the notes about qualified
specialist workshops (Y page 26).
Always observe the operating instructions or the
notes of the lashing strap manufacturer for the
Securing loads operation of the lashing strap.
Important safety notes Information about the maximum loading capa-
city of the cargo tie-down points can be found in
G WARNING the "Technical data" section (Y page 285).
If you attach the tie-down incorrectly when As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring
securing the load, the following may occur in that:
the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak- RThe load is secured against slipping, tipping,
ing maneuvers or an accident: rolling or falling off. This applies both in nor-
mal traffic conditions and if the vehicle must
Rthe cargo tie-down rings may become swerve to avoid an obstacle, in the event of
detached or the tie-down may tear if the full brake application and on poor road surfa-
permissible load is exceeded ces.
RThe applicable requirements and guidelines
Rthe load may not be restrained.
relating to load-securing practices must be
This may cause the load to slip, tip over or be met.
tossed about, striking vehicle occupants. If this is not the case, this may constitute a
There is a risk of an accident and injury. punishable offense, depending on local legis-
lation and any ensuing consequences.
Securing loads 215
You should therefore observe the respective

legal requirements for the relevant country.
Make sure that the load is secure before every
journey and at regular intervals during a long
journey. Correct an incorrectly or inadequately
secured load if necessary.
You can obtain information about securing the
load correctly from the manufacturer of the load
securing aids or tie down for securing the load.
X Fill spaces between the load and the cargo
compartment walls or wheel housings (form-
locking). Use rigid load securing aids, such as
wedges, wooden fixings or padding. Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van without
loading rails)
X Attach secured and stabilized loads in all
directions. Use the cargo tie-down points or : Cargo tie-down rings
Transporting loads
cargo tie-down rings and the loading rails in
the cargo compartment or on the cargo area.
Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods or
lashing nets and lashing straps, that have
been tested in accordance with current
standards (e.g. DIN EN).
Always use the cargo tie-down rings closest to
the load to secure it and pad sharp edges for
protection.
Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should
preferably be secured using the cargo tie-
down rings.
i Tie downs tested in accordance with current
standards (e.g. DIN EN) are available at any
Cargo tie-down points (example: Cargo Van with

loading rails)
: Cargo tie-down rings
; Load rails
Secure loose loads with a tested lashing net or a
tarpaulin.
X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulin to
all available cargo tie-down points. Make sure
that the retaining hooks are secured against
accidental opening.
If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails ;
in the floor, you can place lashing rods directly in
front of and behind the load. The lashing rods
directly absorb the potential shifting forces.
Securing loads on the cargo compartment floor
Cargo tie-down points (example: Passenger Van) by lashing them down is only recommended for
: Cargo tie-down rings lightweight loads. Place non-slip mats (anti-slip
mats) under the load to increase load security.
Z
216 Carrier systems
Installing/removing cargo tie-down Carrier systems

rings for the load rails
Roof carrier
G WARNING
G WARNING
If the cargo tie-down ring is not properly
installed, it may slip or become detached in When you load the roof, the center of gravity
the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak- of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
ing maneuvers or an accident. This may cause istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
objects, luggage or the load to slip, tip over or load, the driving characteristics, as well as
be tossed about, striking vehicle occupants. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of an accident.
Before using the cargo tie-down rings, always Never exceed the maximum roof load and
make sure they are properly installed and adjust your driving style.
Transporting loads
cannot be moved. You can find information about the maximum

roof load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 286).
! Make sure that:
Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tightened
in the sliding blocks to a torque of
6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft (8 – 10 Nm)
Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touch the
rails.
Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area of
the plastic caps.
Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section.
X To install: slide the cargo tie-down ring Rthe mounting rails in the interior are free of
through a recess in the loading rail close to dirt.
the load until locking mechanism : engages Rthe screws are retightened evenly after
in the recess. approximately 300 miles (500 km).
i When you pull locking mechanism : up and We recommend that you only use roof racks
out of the recess, the cargo tie-down ring is tested and approved by Sprinter. These help
able to move within the loading rail. Make avoid vehicle damage.
sure that locking mechanism : is always ! If you want to retrofit securing rails, have it
engaged in a recess. done at a qualified specialist workshop. You
X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seat- could otherwise damage the vehicle.
ing.
X To remove: pull locking mechanism : up
and pull the cargo tie-down ring towards the
locking mechanism and out of the loading rail
through a recess.
: Securing rails
Carrier systems 217
It is possible to install a roof carrier if your vehi-

cle is equipped with securing rails on the roof.
Special mounting elements (grooved plates) are
available as accessories.
These mounting elements are available at any
Ladder carrier
Transporting loads
Example: ladder rack on Chassis Cab
: Front ladder rack
; Rear ladder rack
Pay attention to the important safety notes in
the "Loading guidelines" section (Y page 212).
You can find information about the maximum
ladder rack load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 216).
You will find information about cleaning and
care in the "Notes on care" (Y page 233) and
"Power washers" (Y page 234) sections.
Z
218 Engine compartment
Useful information If you need to do any work inside the engine

compartment:
This Operator's Manual describes all models as Rswitch off the ignition
vehicle that were available at the time of going Rnever reach into the area where there is a
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- risk of danger from moving components,
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
safety. Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Read the information on qualified specialist ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
The fuel injection system operates with a high
Engine compartment voltage. If you touch the live components, you
Maintenance and care
Hood could receive an electric shock. There is a risk

of injury.
Important safety notes Never touch components of the fuel injection
system when the ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when The live components of the fuel injection system
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. are, for example, the injectors.
There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
G WARNING of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Opening the hood when the engine is over- Working in the engine compartment poses a
heated or when there is a fire in the engine risk of injury.
compartment could expose you to hot gases Where possible, let the engine cool down and
or other service products. There is a risk of touch only the components described in the
injury. following.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the If you have to carry out work in the engine com-
engine compartment, keep the hood closed partment, only touch the following components:
and contact the fire department. RHood
ROil
dipstick
G WARNING REngineoil filler neck cap
The engine compartment contains moving RWasher fluid reservoir cap
components. Certain components, such as RCoolant expansion tank cap
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There Opening the hood
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
ers or the hood.
Engine compartment 219
Closing the hood

G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it could tip forward
during rapid deceleration of the vehicle and
hit persons or objects within its path. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, always make sure that the hood is
closed and locked completely before driving
off.
Release handle for the hood If the hood is not locked and you are already
Observe the safety notes when you open the driving at walking pace:
hood. Rthe yellow 1 indicator lamp in the instru-
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as ment cluster goes on for vehicles without

possible on level ground. steering-wheel buttons.
X Switch off the engine. Rthe 1 Hood open display appears for vehi-
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling cles with steering-wheel buttons.
away. ! When you press the support strut back,
X Pull release handle : on the hood. make sure that you do not press it against the
The hood is released. detent position and cause it to bend.
! Do not use your hands to push the hood
down. You could damage it otherwise.
X Lift the hood slightly.
X Press support strut = towards the back.
X Lower the hood and allow it to fall with
momentum from a height of approximately
1 ft (30 cm).
The hood locks audibly.
X Check that the hood is correctly locked.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. If the hood is not correctly
X Reach into the gap and push lever ; on the engaged, open the hood again. Let the hood
hood catch up. fall with a little more momentum.
X Swing the hood upwards until support strut

= engages and the hood is supported.
Z
Overview of the engine compartment Only check the oil level when the engine is at
normal operating temperature.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
X Wait 5 minutes.
The display is activated.
X Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
press the 4 menu button on the instrument
cluster (Y page 32) repeatedly until the dis-
play shows the 1 symbol.
The --:-- display message appears in the
display while the engine oil level measure-
Example: engine ment is running.
: Coolant expansion tank cap (Y page 222) X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
; DEF filler neck cap (Y page 129) press the Ë service button on the instrument
= Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 220) cluster (Y page 32).
? Brake fluid expansion tank cap The 4 Engine oil level Measuring
(Y page 223) in progress display message appears in the
display while the engine oil level measure-
A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 224) ment is in progress.
Regularly check the fluid level and the assembly Display message for vehicles without steer-
for leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oil flecks on ing-wheel buttons: the display may show the
the vehicle parking space, consult a qualified following messages after the engine oil level
specialist workshop immediately. measurement.
1 Action
Engine oil
OK X Do not add oil.
General notes
– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oil
! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of opera- shown (Y page 222).
– 1.5 qts
tion and its quality and volume are gradually X Check the engine oil level
diminished. Regularly check the oil level, and – 2.0 qts again after a few minutes.
top up or have it replaced as needed.
HI The oil level is too high.
Observe the information on engine oils and oil
consumption in the "Technical data" section X Have excess oil removed.
(Y page 280).
You can check the oil level in the engine: Measurement units in the display:
Ron the display of the on-board computer
Rqts USA only
Rwith the oil dipstick
Rltr Canada only
Display message for vehicles with steering-
Checking the oil level shown in the dis- wheel buttons: the display may show the fol-
play lowing messages after the engine oil level meas-
urement.
If at extremely low temperatures no engine oil
level is displayed after 5 minutes, repeat the 1 Action
engine oil level check after another 5 minutes.
If an oil level reading is still not displayed, check Engine oil X Do not add oil.
the engine oil level with the dipstick level OK
(Y page 221). Have the engine oil level checked
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil X Add the amount of oil Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
Add shown (Y page 222). stick
1.0 quart X Check the engine oil level
again after a few minutes.
Engine oil
Add
1.5 quarts
Engine oil
Add
2.0 quarts
Engine oil The oil level is too high.
level X Have excess oil removed.
Reduce oil
level
Example: 4-cylinder diesel engine
Eng. oil Turn the key to position 2 in

X
lev. Turn the ignition lock.
ignition
on for
level
Observe X Repeat the engine oil
wait. measurement after about
period 5 minutes if the engine is at
normal operating tempera-
ture.
X Repeat the engine oil
measurement after about
30 minutes if the engine is Example: 6-cylinder diesel engine
not at normal operating
temperature. For vehicles with a red oil dipstick, only check
the oil level when the engine is at normal oper-
Engine oil X Switch off the engine when ating temperature:
level Not it is at normal operating X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
when eng. temperature and wait possible on level ground.
running approximately 5 minutes X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
before measuring the away.
engine oil level.
X Wait 5 minutes.
Measurement units in the display:
For vehicles with a yellow oil dipstick, only check
Rqts USA only the oil level when the engine is cold.
Rltr Canada only
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
possible on level ground.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
X Pull out oil dipstick :.
X Wipe oil dipstick : using a lint-free cloth.
Z
X Insert oil dipstick : back into the guide tube ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
as far as it will go and remove it again. This could damage the engine.
If the level is between minimum mark = and
maximum mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X Unscrew and remove cap ?.
X If the oil level has dropped to or below mini-
mum mark =, open cap ? and add engine oil X Add engine oil.
(Y page 222). X Replace cap ? on the filler neck and tighten.
The difference in quantity between marks ; When doing so, make sure that the cap
and = is approximately 2 qt (2 l). engages correctly.
X Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube as far X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick
as it will go. (Y page 221) or on the display (Y page 220).
X Close the hood (Y page 219). X Close the hood.
OM651 4-cylinder diesel engine:
At outside temperatures between 32 ‡ (–0 †)
and 86 ‡ (30 †), the oil level can be checked Coolant
when the engine is cold.

Measuring the engine oil when the engine is cold G WARNING
is less precise than measuring when the engine The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
is at normal operating temperature. ticularly when the engine is warm. When
When the appropriate warning is shown in the opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
display coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
X Add engine oil (Y page 222) Let the engine cool down before opening the
or cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
X Have engine oil siphoned off. opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Adding engine oil
Only check the coolant level and/or fill the cool-
G WARNING ant if the vehicle is on a level surface and the
engine has cooled down. The coolant tempera-
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ture must be below 122 ‡ (50 †).
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. ! Check the engine cooling and heating sys-
tem regularly for leaks.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have the
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- cialist workshop.
ponents before starting the engine.
G WARNING
! The alternator is located below the engine If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
oil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto the alter- ponents in the engine compartment, it may
nator, there is a danger of alternator damage. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Be very careful when adding engine oil.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
H Environmental note freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to antifreeze from components before starting
the environment. the engine.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much ! Take care not to spill any coolant on painted
engine oil can result in damage to the engine surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess paintwork.
engine oil siphoned off.
Brake fluid
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Example: cap and coolant expansion tank
Checking the coolant level Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Also observe
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as the safety notes in the "Service products and
capacities" section (Y page 277).

possible on level ground.
X Switch off the engine. G WARNING
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
away. from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock- fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
wise to allow excess pressure to escape. brake system when the brakes are applied
X Turn cap : further and remove it.
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
X Check the coolant level.
If the coolant reaches the maximum mark on
coolant expansion tank ;, there is enough You should have the brake fluid renewed at
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. the specified intervals.
Adding coolant
! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-
X If the coolant drops under the minimum mark ber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come into
on coolant expansion tank ;, add coolant to contact with brake fluid, rinse with water
the maximum mark. immediately.
Observe the information on coolant mixture Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 years at a
ratio and water quality in the "Technical data" qualified specialist workshop. Observe the infor-
section (Y page 283). To prevent damage to mation on brake fluid in the "Technical data"
the engine cooling system, use only approved section (Y page 283).
corrosion inhibitor and antifreeze that com-
plies with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to
tighten.
X Start the engine.
X After approximately 5 minutes, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool down.
X Check the coolant level again and add coolant
if necessary.
X Close the hood.
Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g. weekly

or when refueling.
Z
Checking the brake fluid level Add windshield washer concentrate to the
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as washer fluid all year round. Observe the infor-
possible on level ground. mation on washer fluid in the "Technical data"
Adding washer fluid
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away. X Mix the washer fluid to the appropriate mixing
X Open the hood (Y page 218). ratio in a container beforehand.
X Check the brake fluid level. X Open the hood (Y page 218).
The brake fluid level is correct if the level is X Pull cap : on the washer fluid reservoir
between the MIN mark and MAX mark on upwards at the tab.
brake fluid reservoir :. X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X Close the hood. X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it
engages audibly.
! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluid res- X Close the hood.
ervoir has fallen to the MIN mark or below,
check the brake system immediately for

leaks. Also check the thickness of the brake
linings. Visit a qualified specialist workshop Fuel system
immediately.
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct Draining the fuel filter
the malfunction.
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
Washer fluid fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
G WARNING sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if ignition and auxiliary heating before carrying
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- out work to the fuel system. Always wear pro-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of tective gloves.
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con- H Environmental note
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB ! When the : indicator lamp lights up,
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam- drain the fuel filter with water separator
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps. immediately. Otherwise, the engine may be
damaged.
Example: washer fluid reservoir

Maintenance 225
If the : indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes on, drain fuel filter with water sep-
arator = immediately.
i We recommend that you have this mainte-
nance work carried out at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
X Park the vehicle safely and secure it from roll-
ing away.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating system .
X Place a suitable receptacle under drain Filter magazine, located on the roof in the rear
hose :. compartment
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. An increased amount of sand or dust may collect
X Open drain plug ; immediately until the in the air filter of the rear-compartment air con-

water/fuel mixture flows out of drain hose :. ditioning when you drive on dusty or sandy
roads.
X Screw in drain plug ; as soon as approx-
imately 0.2 qt (0.2 l) of the water/fuel mixture X To remove the filter mat: carefully pry
has been collected. cover : out of recesses ; and remove.
The electrical fuel pump automatically halts X Remove the filter mat from the air duct.
the flow of the water/fuel mixture after X To clean the filter mat: wash the dirty filter
30 seconds. mat with clear water.
X After draining, turn the key back to position 0 X Leave the filter mat to dry.
in the ignition lock.
i The filter mat must not be cleaned or dried in
X Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixture
a machine.
in an environmentally responsible manner,
e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. X To install the filter mat: insert the filter mat
X Check drain plug ;. The drain plug must be into the air duct.
closed. X Replace and engage cover :.
When the engine is running and drain hose ;
is open, fuel is lost through drain hose :.
X Close the hood (Y page 219). Maintenance
If the : indicator lamp does not go out after
draining:
General notes
X Drain the fuel filter again. H Environmental note
X If the : indicator lamp does not go out Observe measures to protect the environ-
after draining for the second time, have the ment when working on the vehicle. You must
cause checked immediately at a qualified spe-
observe the legal requirements when dispos-
cialist workshop.
ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. This
also includes all components, e.g. filters,
which have come into contact with service
Vehicle interior
products. Any qualified specialist workshop
Air filter for the rear-compartment air can provide information about this.
conditioning Dispose of empty containers, cleaning cloths
and care products in an environmentally
! Regularly check the air filters for visible dirt.
Clean or replace a dirty filter mat. The dirt may responsible manner. Comply with the instruc-
otherwise lead to damage to the air-conditions for use of the care products.
tioning system.
Z
226 Maintenance
Do not run the engine for longer than neces- service interval display should therefore not
sary when the vehicle is stationary. be confused with the 5 engine oil level
display.
Before having maintenance and repairs per- The service due date is displayed in days or
formed, it is essential to read the materials rela- miles (kilometers), depending on the total dis-
ted to the maintenance and repairs: tance driven.
Rthe applicable sections of the technical doc- The symbols or letters on the service display
umentation, e.g. the Operator's Manual and show the type of service that is due.
workshop information. ¯ or A for a minor service
Rregulations such as industrial safety regula- ° or B for a major service
tions and accident prevention regulations.
While working under the vehicle, you must Service due date display
secure the vehicle on jack stands with sufficient
load capacity. Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
Never use the jack as a substitute. The vehicle's following messages may be displayed.
jack is intended only to raise the vehicle for a R¯ Service A due in ... days
short time when changing a wheel. It is not R¯ Service A due in ... mi (km)
suited for performing maintenance work under
R¯ Service A Carry out now
the vehicle.
Please also refer to the notes about qualified Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
specialist workshops (Y page 26). the following messages may be displayed.
The scope and regularity of the inspection and R¯ for service A
maintenance work primarily depend on the R° for Service B
often diverse operating conditions. Specialist Additionally, you will see the remaining distance
knowledge beyond the scope of this Operator's in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the remaining
Manual is required when carrying out testing time in days (d).
and maintenance work. This work should only be
carried out by trained staff.
Service due date has been exceeded
The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describes the
scope and frequency of maintenance work and Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if you
contains additional notes on the New Vehicle have missed the service due date, one of the
Limited Warranty and on service products. following messages appears in the display and
Maintenance services must be carried out in warning tone also sounds.
accordance with the provisions and recommen- R¯ Service A overdue by ... days
dations in the Maintenance Booklet. Not doing
R¯ Service A overdue by ... km (km)
so could void the warranty claim and lead to
refusal of goodwill gestures after the manufac- Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if
turer has submitted a damage report. you have missed the service due date, the ¯
or ° symbol for the service flashes for
i Observe the notes on genuine Sprinter parts 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on. A
(Y page 28). minus sign also appears in front of the service
due date.
Service interval display Calling up the service due date

General notes X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
The display is activated.
A service that is due is displayed in the service
interval display about 1 month in advance. A Vehicles without steering wheel buttons
message is then displayed while the vehicle is in X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument
motion or when the ignition is switched on. cluster repeatedly until the ¯ or °
i The service interval display does not provide symbol for the service appears in the display.
information about the engine oil level. The
Battery 227
Additionally, you will see the remaining dis- G WARNING

tance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the
remaining time in days (d). Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
X Press the V or U button on the steering explosion.
wheel until the standard display (Y page 167)
appears in the display. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
X Press the & or * button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the service message build-up.
appears in the display, for example:
The flammable gas mix is produced when the
R¯ Service A in ... days
battery is charged or when the vehicle is jump-
R¯ Service A in ... mi (km) started.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery are electrostatically charged. Electrostatic
Battery charging results, for example, from:

Rwearing synthetic clothing
Rfriction between clothing and the seat
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or installing, Rdragging or pushing the battery across carpet
requires specialist knowledge and the use of flooring or any other synthetic materials
special tools. Therefore, always have work on Rrubbing the battery with cloths or towels.
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. Comply with the following safety precautions
and take protective measures when handling
G WARNING batteries.
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery Risk of explosion. Explosive oxyhy-
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and drogen is produced when batteries
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can are being charged. Only charge bat-
teries in well-ventilated areas.
lead to function restrictions applying to
Fire, open flames and smoking are
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
therefore prohibited when working
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® on the battery. Avoid creating
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating sparks.
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-
could lose control of the vehicle, for example: tact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear acid-proof protective gloves. If
Rbraking
skin or clothes are splashed with
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver acid, neutralize the splashes imme-
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not diately with soapy water or an acid
adapted to the road conditions neutralizer, and then clean the affec-
ted areas with water. Consult a doc-
There is a risk of an accident. tor if necessary.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- Wear eye protection. When mixing
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop water and acid, the liquid can splash
immediately. Do not drive any further. You into your eyes. Rinse acid splashes
should have all work involving the battery car- to the eyes immediately with clean
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. water and contact a doctor immedi-
ately.
Further information can be found under "ABS" Keep children at a safe distance.
(Y page 53) and under "ESP®" (Y page 54). Children are not able to assess the
Z
228 Battery
dangers posed by batteries and standby power consumption can drain the
acid. battery. If the battery voltage is lower than
When handling batteries, observe 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-
the safety precautions and special wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-
protective measures contained in tive discharging.
this Operator's Manual. Be sure to observe the notes on charging the
batteries (Y page 232).
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the Installation locations
law to dispose of them with Your vehicle may be equipped with three bat-
the household rubbish. They teries, depending on the equipment version:
must be collected separately RStarter battery in the battery case in the left
and recycled to protect the footwell
environment. RAdditional battery in the engine compartment
Dispose of batteries in an RAuxiliary battery under the left-hand front

environmentally friendly seat
manner. Take discharged Have the auxiliary battery removed at a qualified
batteries to a qualified spe- specialist workshop.
collection point for used bat-
teries. Installing/removing the floor cover-
ing (starter battery)
Observe the following notes:
G WARNING
RRecharge the battery more frequently, if you:
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
- predominantly drive short distances
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
- predominantly drive at low outside temper-
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
atures
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
- park the vehicle longer than three weeks
In order for the batteries to achieve their max- Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
imum possible service life, they must always stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
be sufficiently charged. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the key if securely and as specified in order to ensure
you do not require any electrical consumers. sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
The vehicle will then use very little energy, loose floormats and do not place floormats on
thus conserving battery power. top of one another.
RWhen replacing a battery, only use batteries
that are recommended for use in Sprinter
vehicles.
RHave the battery removed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
RIf you leave your vehicle parked your vehicle
longer than three weeks:
- consult a qualified specialist workshop or
- switch off the power supply using the bat-
tery main switch (Y page 118) or
- disconnect the batteries (Y page 229).
Otherwise, you need to check the battery's
condition of charge every three weeks, since
Battery 229
X Switch off all electrical consumers. ! Always disconnect the battery in the order
X To remove: remove screws = and take off described below. Never swap the terminal
trim ;. clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-
X Remove floor covering :. cle electronics.
X To install: insert floor covering : and align If the vehicle is expected to be out of use for over
with the driver's seat base and the doorway. 3 weeks, disconnect the batteries. This will pre-
vent battery discharge caused by off-load cur-
X Put trim ; in place and screw screws = rent consumption.
back in.
Disconnecting/connecting the
starter battery

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. Battery cover in the left footwell
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a X Switch off all electrical consumers.
connected battery does not come into con- X Switch off the engine and remove the key
tact with vehicle parts. from the ignition lock.
X Remove the floor covering (Y page 228).
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
X Loosen screws ; and slide battery cover :
tery.
in the direction of the arrow.
RIt is important that you observe the descri- The screws must protrude beyond the larger
bed order of the battery terminals when recesses.
connecting and disconnecting a battery. X Remove battery cover : upwards.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
Disconnecting the starter battery

! Switch off the engine and remove the key Starter battery in the left footwell
from the ignition lock. Firstly remove the bat- X First loosen and remove the negative terminal
tery terminals. Otherwise, you could destroy clamp so that it is no longer in contact with
electronic components such as the alterna- the terminal.
tor. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal.
Always disconnect the starter battery in the X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and fold it
battery case in the left-hand side footwell up to the side together with the pre-fuse box.
first.
Z
230 Battery
Reconnecting the starter battery

! Always connect the battery in the order
described below. Never swap the terminal
clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-
cle electronics.
X Fold the positive terminal clamp with the pre-
fuse box down to the terminal.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp.
X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.
X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
X Position battery cover : so that screws ;
X Loosen the bolts holding retainer =, which
are positioned over the large recesses.
prevents the battery from moving around.
X Slide battery cover : in the direction of
travel into the smaller recesses.
X Tighten screws ;.
X Install the floor covering (Y page 228).
Carry out the following work after connecting

the battery:
X Reset the side windows (Y page 71).
Removing/installing the starter bat-

tery
X Pull retainer = upwards.
Removing the starter battery
X Slide the battery from its anchorage in the
direction of travel.
X Fold the bar of the battery upwards and
remove the battery from the battery case.
Installing the starter battery

X Insert the battery into the battery case.
X Fold down the bar of the battery.
X Slide the battery into its anchorage in the
opposite direction to the direction of travel.
X Insert retainer =.
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 229). X Tighten the bolts on retainer = which holds
the battery in place.
X Pull breather hose with connector bracket ;
from connection : on the degassing cover. X Attach breather hose with connector
bracket ; to connection : of the ventilation
cover.
X Connect the battery (Y page 229).
Battery 231
Disconnecting and connecting the

additional battery (engine compart-
ment)
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a Additional battery in the engine compartment
connected battery does not come into con- X Switch off all electrical consumers.
tact with vehicle parts. X Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition lock.

RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
tery. X Open the hood (Y page 218).
X First loosen and remove the negative terminal
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
clamp so that it is no longer in contact with
bed order of the battery terminals when the terminal.
connecting and disconnecting a battery. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the X Loosen and remove the positive terminal
battery poles with identical polarity are clamp.
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the Connecting the additional battery
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables. ! Always connect the battery in the order
described below. Never swap the terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running. cle electronics.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp.
Disconnecting the additional battery X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.
X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
! Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition lock. Firstly remove the bat- X Close the hood.
tery terminals. Otherwise, you could destroy Carry out the following work after connecting
electronic components such as the alterna- the battery:
tor.
X Reset the side windows (Y page 71).
Always disconnect the starter battery in the
battery case in the left-hand side footwell
first.
Installing and removing the additional
! Always disconnect the battery in the order
described below. Never swap the terminal battery (engine compartment)
cle electronics. Removing the additional battery
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 231).
X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer that pre-
vents the battery from moving around.
X Remove the battery holder and take out the
battery.
Z
232 Battery
Installing the additional battery ! Only charge the installed battery with a bat-
tery charger that has been tested and
X Insert the battery into the battery case. approved by the distributor named on the
X Insert the battery holder. inside of the front cover. This device allows
X Tighten the bolts holding the retainer that the battery to be charged when it is installed
prevents the battery in the engine compart- in the vehicle. The vehicle's electronics may
ment from moving around. otherwise be damaged.
X Connect the battery (Y page 231). A battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
Charging accessory. Only this device permits the charging
of the battery in its installed position. Only
G WARNING charge the installed battery with a battery
charger that has been tested and approved by
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- Mercedes-Benz, using the jump-start connec-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start- tion point in the engine compartment. Contact
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for infor-
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of mation and availability. Read the operating
an explosion. instructions for your charger before charging
the battery.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
The additional battery cannot be charged from
charging it or jump-starting. the jump-starting connection point.
Recharge the battery more frequently if you use
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in
the vehicle mainly for short trips and/or drive at
the instrument cluster when temperatures are
low outside temperatures.
low, it is probably because the discharged bat-
tery has frozen. Should this be the case, do not X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in the
jump-start the vehicle or charge the battery. The operating instructions for your battery
service life of a thawed battery may be shorter. charger.
Start-up behavior may deteriorate, in particular X If necessary, install battery. Observe the
at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery notes on reconnecting the battery.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Recharge uninstalled, out of service batter-
G WARNING ies every three months. This will counter self-
During charging and jump-starting, explosive discharging and prevent battery damage.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Care
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ! Dirty battery clamps and battery surfaces
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. cause leak currents which lead to the batter-
Do not lean over a battery. ies discharging.
! Do not use cleaning agents containing fuel.
G WARNING Cleaning agents containing fuel corrode the
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. battery housing.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do ! If dirt gets into the battery cell, battery self-
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over discharge will increase and the battery may
the battery. Keep children away from batter- be damaged.
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
Care 233
The following points on battery care must be H Environmental note

observed:
Only clean your vehicle at specially designed
X Regularly check the battery terminals and the
wash bays. Dispose of empty containers and
fastening of the negative cable to the chassis
to ensure that they are firmly seated. used cleaning products in an environmentally
X Always keep the battery terminals and battery
responsible manner.
surfaces clean and dry.
X Lightly grease the undersides of the battery
terminals with acid-resistant grease. Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
X Only clean the battery casing with a commer- cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
cially available cleaning product. ner.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for

Care retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-

Notes on care mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
G WARNING mended and approved for Sprinter vehicles.
If you use openings in the bodywork or
detachable parts as steps, you could:
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
Rslip and/or fall
paintwork
Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to
fall. Automatic car wash
G WARNING
Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
ble ladder.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of After the vehicle has been washed, brake
the following: carefully while paying attention to the traffic
Rdry, rough or hard cloths conditions until full braking power is restored.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Rsolvents
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Rcleaning agents containing solvents cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Do not scrub. damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. suitable for the size of the vehicle.
You could otherwise scratch or damage the
surfaces and protective film. Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors and
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended remove any additional antennas. Otherwise,
period straight after cleaning it, particularly the exterior mirror, antenna or the vehicle
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel itself could be damaged.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fully
increased corrosion of the brake discs and folded out again and that any additional
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you antennas are re-installed when you leave the
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. automatic car wash.
Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked.
Z
234 Care
! Make sure that: nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
Rthe side windows and the roof are com- edly. There is a risk of an accident.
pletely closed Do not use power washers with circular jet
Rthe climate control blower is switched off nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0 tires or chassis components replaced imme-
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. diately.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start. ! Under no circumstances use power washers
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in the vehicle interior. The pressurized water
in an automatic car wash. and associated spray produced by the power
washer could cause extensive damage to the
After putting the vehicle through an automatic vehicle.
car wash, wipe off wax from:
Rthe rear view camera lens (Y page 236) ! Observe the minimum distance to be main-
tained between the nozzle of the power
Rthe windshield
washer and object to be cleaned, as outlined
Rthe windshield wiper blades below:

This will prevent smears and reduce wiping Rapproximately 2.2 ft(70 cm) when using
noises caused by residue on the windshield. round-jet nozzles
Rapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using
Washing by hand 25°flat-spray jets and dirt blasters
In some countries, washing by hand is only Keep the water jet moving while cleaning. To
allowed at specially equipped washing bays. avoid causing damage, do not point the water
Observe the legal requirements of the country jet directly at:
you are currently in when washing by hand. Rdoor joints
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rbrake hoses
vehicle in direct sunlight. Relectrical components
X Use a soft car sponge. Relectrical connections
X Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a car shampoo Rseals
approved for use with Sprinter vehicles. Rdrive train, especially not at the intermedi-
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- ate bearing of the propeller shaft
tle jet of water. Rrear view camera (camera lens and micro-
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the phone opening on the bottom)
air inlets.
Keep a minimum distance of 1.6 ft(50 cm).
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
Cleaning the engine
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois. ! Water must not enter intake or ventilation
X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on the openings. When cleaning with high pressure
paintwork. water or steam cleaners, the spray must not
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all be aimed directly at electrical components or
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as the terminals of electrical lines.
soon as possible. Preserve the engine after the engine has been
cleaned. Protect the belt drive system from
exposure to the preservative agent.
Power washers
Also observe the information under "Power
G WARNING washers" (Y page 234).
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
Care 235
Cleaning the paintwork Before cleaning the windshield
! Do not affix: X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock

or remove it.
Rstickers
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
Rfilms windshield until you feel them engage.
Rmagnetic plates or similar items Before switching the ignition on again, fold
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise the windshield wipers back into position.
damage the paintwork. Cleaning the windows
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is
care cannot always be completely repaired. In recommended and approved for Sprinter
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. vehicles.
X Remove impurities immediately, where pos-
sible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and Exterior

rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off Cleaning the wheels
the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, ! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaning
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a agents. They can cause corrosion on the
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter wheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainer
fluid. springs for the wheel-balancing weights.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Cleaning the windows increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
G WARNING should drive for a few minutes after cleaning.
You could become trapped by the windshield Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of can then be parked.
injury. If you clean the wheels with a power washer,
Always switch off the windshield wipers and observe the safety notes for the power washer
(Y page 234). You could otherwise damage the
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or tires.
wiper blades.
Cleaning the wiper blades
! Do not fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield unless the hood is closed. Oth- G WARNING
erwise, you could damage the hood.
You could become trapped by the windshield
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
back. The windshield could be damaged if the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
injury.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Always switch off the windshield wipers and
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with wiper blades.
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
Z
236 Care
! Do not fold the windshield wipers away from If you clean the sensors with a power washer
the windshield unless the hood is closed. Oth- or steam cleaner, observe the information
erwise, you could damage the hood. provided by the manufacturer regarding the
distance to be maintained between the vehi-
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the cle and the nozzle of the power washer.
wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
or remove it.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the

windshield until you feel them engage. PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, left
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp side of vehicle)
cloth. X Clean all sensors : in the front and rear
X Fold back the wiper arms before switching on bumpers with water, shampoo and a soft
the ignition. cloth.
Cleaning the exterior lighting Cleaning the rear view camera

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do
which are suitable for plastic light lenses. not scrub. Otherwise, you will scratch or dam-
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths age the lens of the rear-view camera.
could scratch or damage the plastic light len- If you clean the vehicle with a high-pressure or
ses. steam cleaner, maintain a distance of at least
X Clean the plastic covers of the exterior light- 1.650 cm from the rear-view camera. Do not
ing with a damp sponge and a mild cleaning aim directly at the rear-view camera or at the
agent, e.g. car shampoo for Sprinter vehicles, microphone opening on the underside of the
or with cleaning cloths. rear-view camera. You could otherwise dam-
age the rear-view camera.
Cleaning the mirror turn signal
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Rear view camera in the middle of the roof above

Cleaning the sensors the high-mounted brake lamp
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do : Camera lens
not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or dam- ; Microphone openings
age the sensors.
Care 237
X Clean camera lens : with clean water and a Pay attention to the important safety notes in
soft cloth. the "Notes on care" (Y page 233) and "Power
Make sure that you do not apply any wax to washers" (Y page 234) sections.
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If nec- Keep step in the bumper : free from dirt, such
essary, remove the wax using water, shampoo as:
and a soft cloth. Rmud
Rclay
Cleaning the sliding door Rsnow
X Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of Rice
the contact surfaces and contact pins of the X Clean access step in the bumper : with a
sliding door. power washer.
X Clean the contact surfaces and contact pins
with a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
Do not oil or grease the contact plates and con-
tact pins. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power

washer. Do not use solvents.
Steps ! Observe the notes on care in the Operator's
Manual for the trailer tow hitch and the ball
Cleaning the electrical step coupling manufacturer.
Clean the electrical step at least once a month. You can also have the maintenance work on the
Make sure that no dirt accumulates in the hous- ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out
ing or on the step. by a qualified specialist workshop.
X Extend the electrical step (Y page 66).
X Close the sliding door until the door lock
engages. Interior
The electrical step remains extended for
cleaning. Cleaning the interior
X Clean the electrical step and the housing with
a power washer. ! When using liquids to clean the vehicle inte-
rior, observe the following points:
X After cleaning, spray the step guides on each
side with silicone spray when the housing and RUnder no circumstances use power wash-
electrical step are dry. ers.
Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant. RMake sure that no fluids enter or remain in
X Retract the electrical step. gaps and cavities.
REnsure sufficient ventilation when clean-
Access step in the bumper ing.
RMake sure that the vehicle interior is com-
pletely dry after cleaning.
Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
Example: access step in the bumper cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display.
Z
238 Care
X Switch off the audio equipment and let the X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint-free
display cool down. cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Clean the display surface with a commercially X Heavy soiling: use care products and clean-
available microfiber cloth and cleaner for ing agents recommended and approved for
TFT/LCD displays. Sprinter vehicles.
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
cloth. Cleaning the seat covers
Cleaning the plastic trim ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean artifi-
cial leather covers. If used often, a microfiber
G WARNING cloth can damage the cover.
Care products and cleaning agents containing ! Clean:
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to Rartificialleather covers with a cloth mois-
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may tened with a solution containing 1% deter-
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- gent, e.g. dish washing liquid.
ment. There is a risk of injury. Rcloth covers with a microfiber cloth mois-
Do not use any care products and cleaning tened with a solution containing 1% deter-
gent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Wipe entire
agents to clean the cockpit. seat sections carefully to avoid leaving visi-
ble lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt
Rstickers and how long it has been there.
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items Cleaning the seat belts
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
G WARNING
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or Seat belts can become severely weakened if
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas- bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces. belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with a
injury or fatal injury.
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use a mild detergent or care Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
products and cleaning agents recommended
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- or in direct sunlight.
tor lever Remove any stains or dirt immediately. This will
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth. avoid residue or damage.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the trim elements

Cleaning the headliner
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes X Use a soft brush or dry shampoo to remove
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- heavy soiling.
ing the surface.
Care 239
Cleaning the curtains

! The curtains must not be washed. Washing
could cause the curtains to shrink and lose
their fire-retardant properties. Always have
the curtains dry-cleaned.
Z
240 Where will I find...?
Useful information Stowage compartment in the front-

passenger footwell
safety.
Where will I find...? Unlocking and removing the cover

Vehicle tool kit X Turn quick-release fastener : counter-clock-
wise or clockwise 2.
General notes X Slightly raise and pull out the cover.
Roadside Assistance
The vehicle tool kit is in the stowage compart-

ment in the footwell on the front-passenger
side.
The vehicle tool kit consists of:
Ra towing eye
Ra screwdriver with Torx, Phillips and slotted
bits
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel
bracket and a jack, the vehicle tool kit addition-
ally contains:
Ra wheel wrench
Ra spanner Removing the vehicle tool kit and the jack
Ra pump lever rod X Remove vehicle tool kit A.
i The maximum payload of the jack can be X Pull up quick-release lever = and unhook the
found on the sticker on the jack itself. retaining strap of jack ?.
The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of a X Lift jack ? upwards out of the holder.
malfunction, please contact a qualified spe- i When stowing away the jack, place it in the
cialist workshop. holder as shown in the illustration. Make sure
that the retaining strap of the jack is hooked
in and tensioned.
Inserting and engaging the cover
X Slide in the cover and fold it down.
X Press down quick-release fastener : until it
engages.
Where will I find...? 241
Warning triangle and warning lamp X Lift warning triangle : up and out of the
bracket.
Removing the warning lamp
First-aid kit
Removing the first-aid kit
Roadside Assistance
X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position
2.
The cover is unlocked.
X Lift up the cover.
X Take warning lamp = out of the retainer. X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position
X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-release 2.
fasteners to position 1. The cover is unlocked.
The cover is locked. X Lift up the cover.
X Take first-aid kit = out of the retainer.
Removing the warning triangle X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-release
fasteners to position 1.
The cover is locked.
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit
at least once a year. Replace any expired or
missing contents.
Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seat

base
242 Jump-starting
Fire extinguisher G WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Removing the fire extinguisher
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the

vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another
vehicle or from a donor battery using jumper
cables. For this purpose, the vehicle has a jump-
starting connection point in the engine com-
partment.
Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co-
driver's seat The additional battery in the engine compart-
ment is not suitable for jump-starting opera-
X Pull tabs ; upwards. tions. If your vehicle requires jump-starting, or if
X Take fire extinguisher : out of its holder. you use it to jump-start another vehicle, use the
Roadside Assistance
Please read the instructions on fire extin- jump-starting connection point in the engine
guisher : carefully and familiarize yourself with compartment.
its operation. Have fire extinguisher : refilled When jump-starting, observe the following
after each use and checked every one or two points:
years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If
Observe the legal requirements for each indi- the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
vidual country. jump-start the vehicle using a donor battery
or a jump-starting device.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen.
Flat tire Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from
Information on breakdown assistance in the batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
case of a flat tire can be found in the chapter ROnly use jumper cables that have a sufficient
"Wheels and tires" (Y page 266). cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach the
battery of another vehicle for a few minutes
Jump-starting before attempting to start. This charges the
empty battery a little.
Important safety notes RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
G WARNING
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
Rbare parts of the terminal clamps do not come
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
into contact with other metal parts while the
risk of an explosion. jumper cables are connected to the battery.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. These parts move when the engine is started
Do not lean over a battery. and while it is running.
i Jumper cables and further information
regarding jump starting can be obtained at
any qualified specialist workshop.
Tow-starting and towing away 243
Before connecting the jumper cables G WARNING

On vehicles with a battery main switch, check When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
whether the battery main switch is switched on and its weight is greater than the permissible
(Y page 118). gross weight of your vehicle, the:
X Apply the parking brake. Rthe towing eye could detach itself
X Move the selector lever of the automatic
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
transmission to position P.
over.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. audio
equipment, blower. There is a risk of an accident.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
and remove it (Y page 119). its weight should not be greater than the per-
X Open the hood (Y page 218). missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on the gross vehicle weight can be

found on the vehicle identification plate
Tow-starting and towing away (Y page 276).
Important safety notes ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
Roadside Assistance
G WARNING damaged.
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
! Observe the following points when towing
no longer available if: with a tow rope:
Rthe engine is not running. RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
Rthe brake system or the power steering is both vehicles.
malfunctioning. REnsure that the tow cable is not longer than
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply

legally permitted. Mark the tow cable in the
middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm).
or the vehicle's electrical system. This will make other road users aware that
If your vehicle is being towed, much more the vehicle is being towed.
force may be necessary to steer or brake. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
There is a risk of an accident. eye.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
make sure that the steering moves freely. vehicle while driving. Always maintain a dis-
tance so that the tow rope does not sag.
RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
G WARNING your vehicle. You could otherwise damage
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the the vehicle.
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this
is a risk of an accident. could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover
Always switch off the ignition when towing the the vehicle with a crane.
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.
When towing away, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
It is preferable to have the vehicle transported
on a transporter or trailer instead of towing it.
Z
244 Tow-starting and towing away
The automatic transmission selector lever must Installing the front towing eye
be in the N position when towing the vehicle. X Take the towing eye and screwdriver from the
The battery must be connected and charged. vehicle tool kit (Y page 240).
Otherwise, you: X Press cover : and remove cover : from the
Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to opening.
position 2 You will see the fixture for the towing eye.
Rcannot move the selector lever to position N X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
on vehicles with automatic transmission X Insert screwdriver into the towing eye and
Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the auto- tighten it.
matic locking feature (Y page 64). You could Removing the front towing eye
otherwise lock yourself out of the vehicle when
pushing or towing away the vehicle. X Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit.
X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye and
Installing/removing the towing eye turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise.
X Unscrew the towing eye.
X Insert cover : with the lug at the bottom and
press it in at the top until it engages.
X Place the towing eye and screwdriver back in
Roadside Assistance
the vehicle tool kit.
Towing away in the event of malfunc-

tions
Front or rear axle damage on all-wheel-
drive vehicles
The fixture for the front towing eye is located in the
bumper. ! For vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four
wheels must be raised for towing away. Oth-
erwise, you may damage the transfer case.
If the vehicle can only be raised by the front
axle, you must remove the propeller shaft
between the rear axle and the transfer case.
Always use new bolts when installing the pro-
peller shaft.
If the vehicle has front or rear axle damage, have
it transported on a transporter or trailer.
With transmission damage

Rear towing eye under the bumper, attached to the ! Always use new bolts when installing the
chassis propeller shafts.
Your vehicle may be equipped with rear towing i Only have the propeller shafts fitted or
eye ;. If you tow or tow-start a vehicle, attach removed by qualified, skilled personnel.
the towing device to rear towing eye ;. If the vehicle has transmission damage, have the
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow propeller shaft removed before towing away.
hitch, attach the towing device to the trailer tow
hitch (Y page 155).
Tow-starting and towing away 245
Towing with the front or rear axle Towing the vehicle with both axles on
raised the ground
General notes Important safety notes
! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi- G WARNING
cle is being towed with the front or rear axle
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and
damage the brake system. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
! Always use new bolts when installing the Always switch off the ignition when towing the
propeller shafts.
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
i Only have the propeller shafts installed and
removed by qualified, skilled personnel. ! Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph
Observe the following before towing a vehicle (50 km/h). You could otherwise damage the
with a raised front or rear axle: transmission.
Rthe information on towing in the event of mal- i Only have the propeller shafts fitted and
functions (Y page 244) and removed by qualified, skilled personnel.
Rthe important safety notes (Y page 243). Before towing the vehicle, observe the follow-
Roadside Assistance
If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle at ing:
the front axle and if the rear axle is damaged, Rthe information on towing in the event of mal-
raise the vehicle at the rear axle. functions (Y page 244) and
Rthe important safety notes (Y page 243).
Towing
If the front axle is raised, the vehicle may be Towing
towed a maximum of 30 miles (50 km). For a
towing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), the You may only tow the vehicle a maximum dis-
propeller shafts to the driven axles must be tance of 30 miles (50 km). For a towing distance
removed. of over 30 miles (50 km), the propeller shafts to
the driven axles must be removed.
depressed.
depressed.
N.
N.
X Release the brake pedal.
and leave it in this position.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 82). X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Release the brake pedal. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
X Release the parking brake.
(Y page 82).
X Do not exceed the towing speed of 30 mph
X If the front axle is raised, do not exceed the
towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) and the (50 km/h) and the towing distance of
towing distance of 30 miles (50 km). 30 miles (50 km).
Recovering a vehicle that is stuck

! When recovering a vehicle that has become
stuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as pos-
sible. Excessive tractive power could damage
the vehicles.
Z
246 Electrical fuses
If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or

muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the
utmost care. This is especially the case if the
vehicle is laden.
Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a trailer
attached.
Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, using
the tracks it made when it became stuck.
Transporting the vehicle

! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
Tow-starting (emergency engine

starting)
Roadside Assistance
Vehicles with automatic transmission

! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-
age the automatic transmission.
You can find information on jump-starting under
"Jump-starting“ (Y page 242).
Electrical fuses
The fuse allocation chart and further information

on the electric fuses and relays can be found in
the "Fuse allocation chart" supplement.
Operation 247
Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and inquire about:
well as standard and optional equipment of your Rsuitability
vehicle that were available at the time of going Rlegal stipulations
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- Rfactory recommendations
Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer if you
require information on tested and recommen-
ded wheels and tires for summer and winter
safety.
driving. Advice on purchasing and caring for
Read the information on qualified specialist tires is also available there.
Information on tire and wheel dimensions and
types as well as the recommended tire pressure
for your vehicle can be found in the "Tire pres-
Important safety notes sure" section (Y page 257).
This data can also be found on the Tire and
G Warning Loading Information placard on the B-pillar.
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- Modifications to the brake system or wheels are
not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
brake dust shields is not permitted. This inva-
There is a risk of an accident. lidates the general operating permit for the vehi-
do not drive with a flat tire. Immediately cle.
replace the flat tire with your spare wheel, or i Further information on wheels and tires can
consult a qualified specialist workshop. be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
Wheels and tires

shop.
G WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components Operation
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
Information for a journey
dent.
Always replace wheels and tires with those If the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire
pressures, and correct them, if necessary
that fulfill the specifications of the original
(Y page 250).
part.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
correct: ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
Rdesignation
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
Rmodel ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
When replacing tires, make sure to use the check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
correct: tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Rdesignation damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rmanufacturer qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
Rmodel
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, the
rectly can impair operating safety. tires, particularly the sidewalls, can get dam-
aged.
Z
248 Operation
Regular wheel and tire checks speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
G WARNING
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. should regularly check the tread depth and
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage the condition of the tread across the entire
and replace any damaged tires immediately. width of all tires.
Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for Minimum tire tread depth for:
damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
as well as after driving off-road or on rough RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire
pressure. Pay particular attention to damage For safety reasons, replace the tires before
such as: the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rcuts in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
Rpunctures
Rtears in the tires
Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 248). If necessary, turn the
Wheels and tires
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the

inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not install
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved for your Bar marking : for tread wear is integrated into
vehicle by dealers listed on the inside of the the tire tread.
front cover. Do not install any other valve caps Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required by
or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitor systems. law. Six indicators are positioned over the tire
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires, tread. They are visible once the tread depth is
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the case,
pressure if necessary (Y page 250). the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.
The service life of tires depends on various fac-
tors, including the following:
Rdriving style Selecting, mounting and renewing
Rtire pressure tires
Rmileage ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
Tire tread wheels.
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
G WARNING first 65 miles (100 km).
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Operation in winter 249
RDo not drive with tires which have too little Rdo not deactivate ESP®.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the
RReplace the tires after 6 years at the latest, wheel that has been changed replaced at
regardless of wear. This also applies to the the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
spare wheel. You must observe the correct wheel and
tire dimensions as well as the wheel type.
Operation in winter G WARNING

General notes M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. a risk of an accident.
Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snow
chains are stowed in the vehicle (Y page 249). M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
Also observe the notes in the "Changing a (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
wheel" section (Y page 266).
Use winter tires or all-season tires at tempera-
tures below 45 ‡ (+7 †). Both types of tire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Driving with summer tires Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
Wheels and tires

to M+S tire. Using summer tires at very cold such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
temperatures could cause tears to form, winter. These tires have been developed specif-
thereby damaging the tires permanently. We ically for driving in snow.
cannot accept responsibility for this type of For safe driving, use M+S tires of the same make
damage. and tread pattern on all wheels.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
M+S tires mounted.
If you mount M+S tires that have a lower maxi-
G WARNING mum permissible speed than that of the vehicle,
Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type affix a corresponding warning label in the driv-
of tire can vary between the spare wheel and er's field of vision. You can obtain this at a quali-
the wheel to be replaced. When the spare fied specialist workshop.
wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may Once you have mounted the winter tires:
be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci- X Check the tire pressure (Y page 250).
dent. X Reactivate the tire pressure moni-
In order to reduce risks: tor* (Y page 255).
Ryou should therefore adapt your driving
style and drive carefully.
Snow chains
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel
that differs from the wheel to be replaced. G WARNING
Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the If you drive too fast with snow chains moun-
wheel to be replaced for a short time. ted, they may snap. As a result, you could
injure others and damage the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
* optional Z
250 Tire pressure
Observe the maximum permissible speed for chains as soon as possible when you come to
operation with snow chains. a road that is not snow-covered.
RThe use of snow chains may be restricted by
When driving with snow chains installed, do not local regulations. Observe the appropriate
exceed the maximum permissible speed of regulations before mounting snow chains.
30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the country-spe- RActivate all-wheel drive before driving off with
cific laws and regulations for operation with snow chains (Y page 148).
snow chains. RWhen driving with snow chains installed, do
not exceed the maximum permissible speed
! Check the snow chains for damage before of 30 mph (50 km/h).
mounting them. Damaged or worn snow
chains may snap and damage the following RCheck the tension of the chains after a dis-
components: tance of approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km).
Rwheel
You can deactivate ASR (Y page 53) when pull-
ing away with snow chains mounted. This allows
Rwheel housing
the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
Rwheel suspension ieving an increased driving force (cutting
For this reason, you must use only snow action).
chains that are free of defects. Observe the
manufacturer's mounting instructions.
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount Tire pressure
snow chains on steel wheels, you may dam- Tire pressure specifications
age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from
the relevant wheels before mounting the Important safety notes
snow chains.
Wheels and tires
Snow chains increase traction on roads in wintry G WARNING

conditions. Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
For reasons of safety we only recommend using following risks:
snow chains or traction aids that are approved
for the Sprinter. The snow chains or traction aids Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
must be of class U or meet the SAE type U and vehicle speed increase.
specification. Information on snow chains is Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
available at any qualified specialist workshop.
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
When mounting snow chains, please bear the traction.
following points in mind:
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
RSnow chains cannot be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. When mounting the ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
snow chains, note the permissible tire and There is a risk of an accident.
snow chain dimensions. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
RMount snow chains only in pairs and only to and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
the rear wheels. On vehicles with twin tires, ing the spare wheel:
mount the snow chains to the outer wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's mounting Rmonthly, at least
instructions. Rif the load changes
RVehicles with all-wheel-drive: snow chains
Rbefore beginning a long journey
are not permitted on the front axle. There is
not sufficient space for commercially-availa- Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
ble snow chains. Information about snow off-road driving
chains for all-wheel-drive vehicles can be If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
obtained from an authorized Sprinter Dealer.
ROnly use snow chains when the road is cov- i The specifications shown on the sample Tire
ered by a layer of snow. Remove the snow and Loading Information placard and tire
Tire pressure 251
pressure plate are examples. Tire pressure Tire pressure plate

data are vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data illustrated here. The tire pres-
sure data applicable to your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard or tire pressure plate of your vehicle.
Check the tire pressure regularly, at least
every 14 days.
General notes
You will find information on tire pressure for the
vehicle's factory-mounted tires on the plates Tire pressure plate
described here. The tire pressure plate is located on the B-pillar
The recommended tire pressure can be found on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 258).
on the Tire and Loading Information placard4 or The tire pressure plate contains recommended
the tire pressure plate on the B-pillar on the tire pressures : for cold tires. Recommended
driver's side of your vehicle. tire pressures : apply to the maximum per-
Further information on tire pressure can be missible load and up to the maximum permissi-
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. ble speed of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information placard

Important notes on tire pressure
Wheels and tires

G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
Example: Tire and Loading Information placard4 tact a qualified specialist workshop.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on Use a suitable pressure gage to check the tire
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
(Y page 258). not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-
tains recommended tire pressures : for cold tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
tires. Recommended tire pressures : are valid can be checked using the on-board computer.
for the maximum permissible load and up to the The tire temperature and pressure increase
maximum permissible speed of the vehicle. when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressure
when the tires are cold.
4 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).
Z
252 Tire pressure
The tires are cold: Overinflated tires

Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours without direct sunlight on the G WARNING
tires, and Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than because they are damaged more easily by
1 mile (1.6 km) road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Tire temperature changes depending on the also suffer from irregular wear, which can
ambient temperature, driving speed and tire severely impair the braking properties and the
load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
(10 †), the tire pressure changes by approx-
accident.
imately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into
account when checking the pressure of warm Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low tires, including the spare wheel.
for the current operating conditions. If you
check the tire pressures when the tires are Overinflated tires can:
warm, the resulting values will be higher than if Rincrease the braking distance
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not under
any circumstances release the air in order to Radversely affect handling
adjust the pressure to the prescribed value for Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be Radversely affect ride comfort
too low. Rbe more susceptible to damage
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires: Maximum tire pressures
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard5
Wheels and tires
on the B-pillar on the driver's side, or

Ron the tire pressure plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side of the vehicle
R
Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires:
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over- : Maximum permitted tire pressure (example)
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg- inflation pressure. When adjusting the tire pres-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak- sures always observe the recommended tire
ing properties and the driving characteristics. pressure for your vehicle (Y page 250).
There is a risk of an accident. i The actual values for tires are specific to
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the each vehicle and may deviate from the values
tires, including the spare wheel. in the illustration.
Underinflated tires can:

Rfail
from being overheated
Radverselyaffect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
5 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).
Tire pressure 253
Tire valve Tire pressure monitor

G WARNING Important safety notes
Tire valve that are not approved for your vehi-
G WARNING
cle by the distributor named on the inside
cover page may result in a loss of tire pres- Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
sure. This may affect road safety. There is a should be checked at least once a month
risk of an accident. when cold and inflated to the pressure rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
Only use tire valve that are approved for your
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
vehicle by the distributor named on the inside
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure
cover page. Always make sure you have the
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your
correct tire valve type for the tires on your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the
vehicle.
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-
! Do not screw additional weights (check mation placard or the tire pressure label, you
valves, etc.) onto the tire valves. The elec- should determine the proper tire pressure for
tronic components could thus be damaged. those tires.
Only for vehicles without a tire pressure moni- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
tor: been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
mends that you only use tire valves that have sure telltale when one or more of your tires
been tested for use on your vehicle. are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
Wheels and tires

when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
Checking the tire pressure manually as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
In order to determine and adjust the tire pres-
sures, proceed as follows: flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
X Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish to
check. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop-
the valve. ping ability.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
recommended value on the loading informa- for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
tion table or the tire pressure table er's responsibility to maintain correct tire
(Y page 250). pressure, even if underinflation has not
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to the reached the level to trigger illumination of the
recommended value. TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by
pressing down the metal pin in the valve. Use USA only:
the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
tire pressure again using the tire pressure TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
gauge. system is not operating properly. The TPMS
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. malfunction indicator is combined with the
X Repeat the steps for the other tires. low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
Z
254 Tire pressure
cle is started as long as the malfunction nificantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
exists. not malfunctioning.
RUSA only: if the h warning lamp flashes for
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, 60 seconds and then remains lit constantly,
the system may not be able to detect or signal the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- Only vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
tions may occur for a variety of reasons, on-board computer displays information on tire
including the mounting of incompatible pressure. After a few minutes of driving, the cur-
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on rent tire pressure of each tire is shown in the on-
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- board computer.
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal- USA only: if the tire pressure monitor is mal-
function telltale after replacing one or more functioning, it may be more than 10 minutes
before the malfunction is shown. The h tire
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that pressure warning lamp flashes for 60 seconds
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels and then remains lit. When the malfunction has
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- been rectified, the h tire pressure warning
erly. lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor are equip- board computer may differ from those meas-
ped with sensors in the wheels that monitor the ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The
tire pressure of all four tires. The tire pressure tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
monitor monitors the pressure in all four tires; refer to those measured at sea level. At high
you set this pressure when you activate the tire altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure monitor. The tire pressure monitor pressure gage are higher than those shown by
warns you when the pressure drops in one or the on-board computer. In this case, do not
Wheels and tires
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only reduce the tire pressures.
functions if the corresponding sensors are If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. wireless
installed on all wheels. headphones, two-way radios) is operated inside
You should always adjust the tire pressure the vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehicle, this
according to the vehicle load. Restart the tire can interfere with the operation of the tire pres-
pressure monitor if you change the tire pressure monitor.
sure.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you if a Checking the tire pressure electroni-
tire pressure is incorrect. Observe the notes on cally (vehicles with steering wheel but-
the recommended tire pressure (Y page 250).
tons)
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. following pen-
etration by a foreign object. In this event, brake
the vehicle until it comes to a standstill. Do not
carry out any sudden steering maneuvers.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow h
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indi-
cating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or
pressure loss (Canada). Depending on how the
warning lamp flashes or lights up, an underin- Tire pressure display
flated tire or a malfunction in the tire pressure
monitor is displayed:
Rif the h warning lamp is lit continuously,
the tire pressure on one or more tires is sig-
Tire pressure 255
Using the steering wheel buttons In most cases, the tire pressure monitor detects
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition the new reference values automatically, e.g.
lock. after you have:
X Press the V or U button repeatedly Rchanged the tire pressure
until the standard display is shown Rchanged wheels or tires
(Y page 167). Rinstalled new wheels or tires
X Press the 9 or : button repeatedly However, you can also define reference values
until the current pressure of the individual manually as described here.
tires is shown in the display. Before restarting the tire pressure monitor:
If the vehicle is parked for longer than X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
20 minutes or you then drive at less than 18 mph ded on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
(30 km/h), the Tire pres. displayed ard or the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on
after driving for several minutes mes- the driver's side (Y page 250).
sage appears.
Observe the notes on tire pressure when
i The tire pressure value shown in the display doing so (Y page 250).
may differ from those measured at a gas sta- X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
tion using a pressure gage. The on-board all four wheels.
computer will generally give you a more exact
value. Restarting the tire pressure monitor (vehi-
cles without steering wheel buttons):
Tire pressure loss warning system X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons X Press the 4 menu button on the instrument
Wheels and tires

If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure cluster repeatedly until the display shows the
loss in one or more tires, the on-board computer following message:
displays the yellow Tire pres. Adjust pres. +CAL- TPMS
warning message. The h tire pressure loss X Press the f button on the instrument clus-
warning lamp in the instrument cluster ter.
(Y page 202) flashes for about 60 seconds and The display shows:
then remains lit. OK TPMS
The pressure of the affected tire is highlighted in The tire pressure monitor activation process
yellow in the on-board computer (Y page 176). has begun. The tire pressures measured for
If the tire pressure monitor detects a significant the individual wheels are stored as the new
pressure loss in one or more tires, the on-board reference values, provided that the tire pres-
computer displays the red Tire pres. Warn‐ sure monitor considers them to be plausible.
ing Tire defect warning message. The h If you wish to cancel the restart:
tire pressure loss warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster (Y page 202) flashes for about 60 X Press the g button or the 4 menu button on
seconds and then remains lit. An additional the instrument cluster.
warning tone sounds. The activation process is canceled automati-
The pressure of the affected tire is highlighted in cally if 30 seconds elapse without input.
yellow in the on-board computer (Y page 176). Restarting the tire pressure monitor (vehi-
cles with steering wheel buttons):
Restarting the tire pressure monitor X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, the X Press the V or U button on the steering
currently set tire pressure are taken as refer- wheel until the standard display (Y page 167)
ence values for monitoring. appears in the display.
X Press the 9 or : button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the current pressure of
Z
256 Tire pressure
the individual tires is displayed or the display

shows the following message:
Tire pres. displayed after driving
for several minutes
X Press the 9 reset button on the instrument
cluster.
The display shows the following message:
Monitor current tire pressure?
X Press the W button on the steering wheel.
The display shows the following message:
Tire pres. monitor reactivated
The tire pressure monitor activation process
has begun. The tire pressures measured for
the individual wheels are stored as the new
reference values, provided that the tire pres-
sure monitor considers them to be plausible.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Press the X button on the steering wheel.
Wheels and tires
Tire pressure 257
Tire pressure table

Front axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with a
permissible front axle load of 3970 lbs (1801 kg), 4080 lbs (1851 kg) or 4410 lbs (2000 kg).
Tires/disc wheel Front axle load
3970 lbs 4080 lbs 4410 lbs
(1801 kg) (1851 kg) (2000 kg)
205/75 R 16 C 110/108R — 400 kPa 420 kPa
6.5Jx16 ET626 (4.0 bar/58 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa

5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Half distance between centers: 4.94 in
(125.5 mm)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
(125.5 mm)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 320 kPa — —
6.5J x 16 (3.2 bar/47 psi)
Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)
Wheels and tires

235/65 R 16 C 121N (118 R) — 380 kPa 420 kPa
6.5J x 16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Spare wheel for vehicles with
Super Single tires
Rear axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with a
permissible rear axle load of 5360 lbs (2431 kg), 7060 lbs (3202 kg) or 7720 lbs (3502 kg).
Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load
5360 lbs 7060 lbs 7720 lbs
(2431 kg) (3202 kg) (3502 kg)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
(125.5 mm)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
(125.5 mm)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 480 kPa — —
6.5J x 16 (4.8 bar/70 psi)
Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)
6 Vehicles with Super Single tires
Z
258 Loading the vehicle
Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load

5360 lbs 7060 lbs 7720 lbs
(2431 kg) (3202 kg) (3502 kg)
285/65 R 16 C 128/126N (121 R) — 450 kPa —
285/65 R 16 C 128/126 N (123 R)7 (4.5 bar/65 psi)
8.5J x 16 ET 63
235/65 R 16 C 121N (118 R) — 520 kPa —
6.5J x 16 (5.2 bar/75 psi)
Spare wheel for vehicles with
Super Single tires
Loading the vehicle Loading Information placard : shows the

permissible number of occupants and the
Instruction labels for tires and loads maximum permissible load of the vehicle. It
also contains details of the tire sizes and
G WARNING corresponding pressures for tires mounted
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a at the factory.
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the (2) The vehicle identification plate is located on
the base of the driver's seat. The vehicle
steering and driving characteristics and lead identification plate informs you of the gross
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
Wheels and tires
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by mation about the maximum Gross Axle
Weight Rating on the front and rear axle.
exceeding the maximum load.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceed
the maximum gross vehicle weight or the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
Tire and Loading Information placard

General notes
Only vehicles with a gross weight of less than
10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading
The Tire and Loading Information placard on the Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv-
driver’s door B-pillar er's side.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less
than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg):
Tire and Loading Information placard : is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Tire and
7 Super Single tires.

Loading the vehicle 259
Maximum permissible gross vehicle Maximum number of seats : determines the

weight rating maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard illustration are only an exam-
ple. The number of seats is vehicle-specific
and can differ from the details shown. The
number of seats in your vehicle can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Determining the maximum load
: Maximum number of seats Individual steps

; Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight The following steps have been developed as
rating required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in
accordance with the "National Traffic and Motor
weight ; is listed in the Tire and Loading
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
Information placard: "The gross weight of
occupants and luggage must not exceed XXX X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
kilograms or XXX lbs." weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo, Tire and Loading Information placard.
luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-
Wheels and tires

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
ble) must not exceed the specified value.
the driver and passengers that will be travel-
i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor- ing in your vehicle.
mation placard illustration are only an exam- X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
ple. The maximum permissible gross vehicle driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
weight rating is vehicle-specific and may dif- XXX lbs.
fer from that which is illustrated. You can find
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
Loading Information placard. city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 pound
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
Number of seats available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. For reasons of safety, that weight must
not exceed the available cargo and luggage
cargo capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to tow a
trailer behind your vehicle, the load on the
trailer is transferred to your vehicle. Please
consult the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard, to determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of your
: Maximum number of seats vehicle.
; Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
rating
Z
260 Loading the vehicle
Example: Steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum
load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the
actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard .
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Wheels and tires
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants

Step 3 Permissible cargo and 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
trailer load/nose- (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs
weight (maximum (340 kg) = (245 kg) = (68 kg) =
gross vehicle weight 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs
rating from the Tire (612 kg)
and Loading Informa-
tion placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 159).
What you should know about wheels and tires 261
Vehicle identification plate What you should know about wheels

Even if you have calculated the total cargo care-
and tires
fully, you should still make sure that the gross Tire labeling
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details about this can Overview
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the driver seat frame of your vehicle
(Y page 276).
Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the
vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer load/
noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the
permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-
missible load that can be carried by one axle
(front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight : DOT, Tire Identification Number
Wheels and tires

The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross (Y page 263)
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the ; Maximum tire load (Y page 263)
trailer load/noseweight is included in the load = Maximum tire pressure (Y page 252)
along with occupants and luggage. The trailer ? Manufacturer
load/noseweight is usually approximately 10% A Tire material (Y page 264)
of the gross weight of the trailer and its load. B Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed index (Y page 261)
C Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load bearing index

and speed index
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Z
262 What you should know about wheels and tires
tire load rating and speed rating required for Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
your vehicle. the driver's side (Y page 258).
Example:
The load-bearing index 120 indicates a maxi-
mum load of 3,042 lb (1,380 kg) for the tire. If
two load-bearing capacity indices are specified
(as shown above), the first number states the
load-bearing capacity for single tires, the sec-
ond number the load-bearing capacity for twin
tires. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and pounds, see
(Y page 263).
For further information on the load-bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 263).
Speed rating: speed rating C specifies the
: Design standard approved maximum speed of the tire.
; Tire width Regardless of the speed index always observe
= Nominal aspect ratio in % the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
? Tire code driving style to the traffic conditions.
A Rim diameter i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
B Load bearing index from the data in the example.
C Speed index
Index Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may F up to 50 mph (80 km/h)
Wheels and tires
not contain any letters or may contain one let-

ter : that precedes the size description G up to 56 mph (90 km/h)
If "LT" precedes the size description (as shown J up to 62 mph (100 km/h)
above): these are light truck tires according to
U.S. manufacturing standards. K up to 68 mph (110 km/h)
If "C" precedes the size description: these are L up to 74 mph (120 km/h)
commercial motor vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards. M up to 80 mph (130 km/h)
Tire width: tire width ; shows the nominal tire
N up to 87 mph (140 km/h)
width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio = is the size ratio P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
by dividing the tire width by the tire height. R over 106 mph (170 km/h)
Tire code: tire code ? specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires. "D" represents diag-
onal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial tires. i Not all tires that have the M+S identification
offer the driving characteristics of winter
Rim diameter: rim diameter A is the diameter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim tires also have the i snowflake symbol on
flange. The rim diameter is specified in the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the
inches (in). requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index B is a Association (RMA) and the Rubber Associa-
numerical code that specifies the maximum tion of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire trac-
load-bearing capacity of a tire. tion on snow. They have been especially
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the developed for driving on snow.
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Further information on the reading of tire infor- Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
mation can be obtained at any qualified special- the driver's side (Y page 258).
ist workshop.
i The actual values for tires are specific to
each vehicle and may deviate from the values
Load index in the illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in
or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
In addition to the load-bearing index, load rat-

ing : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire
(Y page 261).
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire The TIN is a unique identification number. The
Wheels and tires

RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
a certain pressure tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate manufacturing date A.
from the data in the example. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies with
Maximum tire load the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
Further information about retreaded tires
(Y page 247).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
sible weight for which the tire is approved. provides information about the age of a tire. The
first and second positions represent the week of
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
endar week. Positions three and four represent
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
Z
264 What you should know about wheels and tires
is marked with "3208", was manufactured in lowing specifications from the U.S government.
week 32 in 2008. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the
sidewall of the tire.
from the data in the example. Recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressures are the pres-
Tire characteristics sures specified for the tires mounted on the
vehicle at the factory.
The tire and load information table8 contains the
recommended tire pressures for cold tires, the
maximum permissible load and the maximum
permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded tire pressure for cold tires under various
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed
of the vehicle.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
This information describes the type of tire cord The combined weight of all standard and
and the number of layers in sidewall : and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
under tire tread ;. regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
from the data in the example. Wheel rim
Wheels and tires
The part of the wheel on which the tire is moun-

Definitions for tires and loading ted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Tire structure and characteristics
GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating.
Describes the number of layers or the number of
The actual load on an axle must never exceed
rubber-coated belts in the tire tread and the tire
the gross axle weight rating. The Gross Axle
wall. These consist of steel, nylon, polyester,
Weight Rating can be found on the vehicle iden-
and other materials.
tification plate on the driver seat frame
Bar (Y page 276).
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds Speed index
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
The speed index is part of the tire identification.
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
DOT (Department of Transportation) approved.
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
United States Department of Transportation.
GTW is the total of weight of a trailer and the
Average weight of vehicle occupants weight of the load, accessories etc. on the
trailer.
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
with regard to tread quality, traction and tem- the drawbar noseweight if applicable. The gross
perature characteristics. The quality grading vehicle weight may never exceed the gross vehi-
assessment is made by the manufacturer fol-
8 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).
cle weight rating (GVWR) specified on the vehi- PSI (Pounds per square inch)
cle identification plate at the base of the driver's Standard unit of measurement for tire pressure.
seat (Y page 276).
Aspect ratio
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Relationship between tire height and width in
The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross percent.
weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants, tire pressure
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight if Pressure inside the tire applying an outward
applicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is force to every square inch of the tire's surface.
specified on the vehicle identification plate on Tire pressure is specified in pounds per square
the driver seat frame (Y page 276). inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. Tire pres-
Maximum weight of the laden vehicle sure should only be corrected when the tires are
cold.
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Cold tire pressure
Rthe weight of the accessories The tires are cold:
Rthe load limit Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional three hours without direct sunlight on the
equipment tires, and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
Kilopascal (kPa) 1 mile (1.6 km)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are the
equivalent of 1 psi. Another tire pressure unit is Tire tread
Wheels and tires

bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of The part of the tire that comes into contact with
1 bar. the road.
Load index Tire bead
In addition to the load bearing index, a load The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
index can be stamped onto the sidewall of the on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
tire. It specifies the load-bearing capacity of the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
tire more precisely. the wheel rim.
Curb weight Sidewall
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment The part of the tire between the tread and the
including the maximum filling capacity of fuel, tire bead.
oil, and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if these Weight of optional extras
are installed on the vehicle, but does not include The combined weight of those optional extras
passengers or luggage. that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
Maximum tire load optional extras, such as high-performance
The maximum tire load in kilograms or pounds is brakes, a roof rack or a high-performance bat-
the maximum weight for which a tire is tery, are not included in the curb weight and the
approved. weight of the accessories.
Maximum permissible tire pressure TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. A unique identification number which can be
used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
Maximum load on one tire example for a product recall, and thus identify
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by the purchasers. The TIN is composed of the
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by manufacturer identification code, tire size, tire
two. model code and manufacturing date.
Z
266 Changing wheels
Load bearing index Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code and tires are of the same dimensions.
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
city of a tire. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
Traction in the wheel.
Traction is the result of friction between the tires Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
and the road surface. the valve. This could damage the electronic
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar load) components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
The TWR is the maximum permissible weight cialist workshop.
that may act on the ball coupling of the trailer
tow hitch. Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
Wear indicator (Y page 267).
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level differ, depending on the operating conditions.
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has been reached. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
Distribution of the vehicle occupants the center.
The distribution of vehicle occupants over des- If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
ignated seat positions in a vehicle. can rotate the wheels according to the intervals
in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your
Maximum permissible payload weight vehicle documents. If no warranty book is avail-
Wheels and tires
Nominal load and goods/luggage load plus able, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to
68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if
seats in the vehicle. tire wear requires. Do not change the direction
of rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
Flat tire brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
ted.
General notes Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire
pressure monitor if necessary.
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel,
the spare wheel is under the rear of the vehicle
(Y page 272).
Information about installing a wheel can be
found in the "Wheel change" section
(Y page 267).
Changing wheels
Rotating the wheels
G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may Diagram showing tire rotation for single and dual
tires
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. Single tires: if the tires are of identical dimen-
The wheel brakes or suspension components sions, you can rotate both wheels on both the
front and rear axles so that the tires' original
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- direction of rotation is maintained. On unidirec-
dent.
Changing wheels 267
tional tires, an arrow on the sidewall shows the change should, for example, stand behind the
prescribed direction of rotation of the tire. barrier.
Twin rear tires: if the tires are of identical X Place the warning triangle or warning lamp at
dimensions, you can rotate the wheels on the a suitable distance.
front axle and the inner wheels on the rear axle Observe legal requirements.
in pairs such that the original direction of tire X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
rotation is retained. With unidirectional tires, away.
you may rotate the outside wheels at the rear
axle from one side to the other. i Observe the safety notes on parking in the
section on "Driving and parking"
(Y page 130).
Direction of rotation X On level terrain: place chocks or other suit-
able objects under the front and rear of the
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel to
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- be changed.
planing. You will only gain these benefits if the X On slight inclines: place chocks or other
correct direction of rotation is observed. suitable objects under the wheels on the front
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its and rear axles opposite the wheel to be
correct direction of rotation. changed.
You may mount a spare wheel against the direc- X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack from the
tion of rotation. Observe the time restriction on footwell on the front-passenger side
use as well as the speed limitation specified on (Y page 240).
the spare wheel. X Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel
bracket (Y page 273). Observe the safety
notes in the "Spare wheel" section
Wheels and tires

Storing wheels (Y page 272).
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove the hub
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires caps.
from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
Mounting a wheel
Vehicle preparation
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from
traffic and on a level, firm and non-slip sur-
face.
X If your vehicle poses a risk to approaching
traffic, switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Turn the front wheels to the straight-ahead
X Assemble the lug wrench extension using the
position. middle rod and the rod with the largest diam-
eter from the three-piece jack pump lever.
X Move the selector lever of the automatic
X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug
transmission to position P.
wrench extension as far as it will go onto the
X Switch off the engine. lug wrench.
X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Make X Using lug wrench :, loosen the wheel bolts/
sure that the passengers are not endangered wheel nuts on the wheel to be changed by
as they do so. about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel
X Make sure that no one is near the danger area bolts/nuts completely.
while the wheel is being changed. Anyone
who is not directly assisting in the wheel
Z
268 Changing wheels
Raising the vehicle RNever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
G WARNING RNever open or close a door when the vehicle
If you do not position the jack correctly at the is raised.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the RMake sure that no persons are present in the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
There is a risk of injury. ! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod and
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- the rod with the largest diameter as a lug
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack wrench extension. Only slide the middle rod
as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. The
must be positioned vertically, directly under
rods may otherwise bend and be distorted to
the jacking point of the vehicle. such an extent that they can no longer be
used as a pump lever for the jack.
G WARNING
! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring or
On uphill and downhill slopes, the jack could the differential case.
tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk
of injury.
Do not change wheels on uphill or downhill
gradients. Notify a qualified specialist work-
shop.
! Only position the jack on the jacking points

intended for this purpose. You could other-
Wheels and tires
wise damage the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
RWhen raising the vehicle, only use the jack
which Mercedes-Benz has specifically Hydraulic jack
approved for your vehicle.
Preparing the hydraulic jack
RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise the
vehicle for a short time when changing a X Insert the third rod of jack pump lever : into
wheel. It is not suited for performing mainte- the lug wrench extension.
nance work under the vehicle. Jack pump lever : is assembled.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down- X Close pressure release screw ;.
hill slopes. X To do this, use the flattened section on pump
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll- lever : to turn pressure release screw ;
ing away by applying the parking brake and clockwise to the stop.
inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the i Do not turn pressure release screw ; more
parking brake while the vehicle is raised. than 1 or 2 full turns. Hydraulic fluid could
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and otherwise escape.
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
X Insert pump lever : into the recess on the
load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be jack and secure by turning it clockwise.
used, e.g. rubber mats. X Place the jack vertically beneath the jacking
RMake sure that the distance between the
points described below.
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in(3 cm).
RNever place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
RNever lie under the raised vehicle.
Changing wheels 269
Jacking point, front axle Jacking point, rear axle (example: Cab Chassis)
X Place the jack under the jacking point in front Jacking point at the rear axle on chassis ver-
of the front axle. sions
X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: unscrew jack X Place the jack next to the front leaf spring
spindle = counter-clockwise as far as it will support beneath the jacking point.
go.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheel
nuts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel
bolts and wheel nuts could otherwise be dam-
aged when being tightened.
Wheels and tires

X Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts.
X On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove the
wheel nut cover.
X Remove the wheel.
Installing the adapter

Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type
2500) G WARNING
If you tighten the adapter bolts when the vehi-
cle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a
risk of injury.
Make sure that the vehicle is properly pre-
pared for a wheel change. Tighten the adapter
bolts with particular care and attention.
Always observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 266).
G WARNING
Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type If you do not tighten the bolts of the adapter to
3500) the specified tightening torque, the adapter
X Place the jack under the jacking point in front may come loose with the spare wheel. There
of the rear axle. is a risk of an accident.
Tighten the bolts of the adapter to the speci-
fied tightening torque. Have the spare wheel
replaced with a complete wheel and an extra-
Z
270 Changing wheels
wide tire at a qualified specialist workshop G WARNING

immediately. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you over. There is a risk of injury.
install the spare wheel, do not exceed the
maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and do Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
not drive further than 65 miles(100 km). when the vehicle is on the ground.
The transmission could otherwise be dam-
aged by the difference in wheel rotation Always observe the instructions and safety
speeds. notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 266).
Only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts that have
On vehicles with Super Single tires, you must been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For
attach the narrow spare wheel to the rear axle by safety reasons, we recommend that you only
means of an adapter. The adapter is bolted to use wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have been
the spare wheel using the adapter bolts for approved for Sprinter vehicles and the respec-
transportation. tive wheel.
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
affected when driving with a spare wheel instal- ! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheel
led. After changing a wheel, drive to the nearest bolts to mount the steel spare wheel. Using
specialist workshop and have the spare wheel other wheel bolts to mount the steel spare
replaced with a wheel and tire assembly that has wheel could damage the brake system.
a Super Single tire.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- monitor, electronic components are located
faces. in the wheel.
X Unscrew the six adapter bolts on the spare Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
Wheels and tires
wheel and remove the adapter. the valve. This could damage the electronic
X Tighten the adapter with the six adapter bolts components.
evenly in a crosswise pattern through the Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
outer holes on the wheel hub. cialist workshop.
X Tighten the six adapter bolts on the wheel hub
to a tightening torque of 177 lb-ft (240 Nm).
X Push the wheel onto the adapter and attach it.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident. : Wheel bolt for alloy wheel
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of ; Wheel bolt for steel wheel
damage to the threads, contact a qualified X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
specialist workshop immediately. Have the faces.
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads X Vehicles with Super Single tires: first attach
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. the adapter for the narrow spare wheel to the
wheel hub (Y page 269).
Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub or
onto the adapter for the spare wheel and push
it on.
Changing wheels 271
Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub and

push it on.
Wheels with centering by wheel bolts:
X Vehicles with alloy wheels: take the short
wheel bolts that secure the steel spare wheel
out of the vehicle tool kit.
X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them
lightly.
For wheels with wheel nuts:
X Front wheels with wheel nut covers: press the
wheel nut covers onto the wheel nuts. Tightening torque pattern
X Screw in the three wheel nuts over the fixing :—B Wheel bolts or wheel nuts
discs of the wheel nut cover.
X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are in
X Using the pump lever, slowly turn the lowering
screw on the jack through approximately one
the middle of the holes.
revolution and carefully lower the vehicle
X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts. (Y page 268).
X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts. X Put the jack aside.
X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off the
Lowering the vehicle pump lever.
The shortened pump lever serves as a lug
G WARNING wrench extension.
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug
Wheels and tires

and bolts are not tightened to the specified wrench extension as far as it will go onto the
lug wrench.
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
X Using the extended lug wrench, tighten the
Have the tightening torque immediately wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in
checked at a qualified specialist workshop the sequence indicated (: to B).
after a wheel is changed. Tighten the wheel bolts to the following tight-
ening torques:
! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod and RSteel wheel 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)
the rod with the largest diameter as a lug
wrench extension. Only slide the middle rod RAlloy wheel 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)
as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. The Tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening torque
rods may otherwise bend and be distorted to of 133 lb-ft (180 Nm).
such an extent that they can no longer be X Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in again
used as a pump lever for the jack. and close the pressure release screw.
! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn the jack
install the spare wheel, do not exceed the spindle clockwise as far as it will go
maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and do (Y page 268).
not drive further than 65 miles(100 km). X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
The transmission could otherwise be dam- in the vehicle again.
aged by the difference in wheel rotation i You can now install the hub caps on steel
speeds. wheels with wheel bolts. The installing proce-
dure depends on whether the hub cap acts as
a trim that covers the whole wheel, or just
covers the center.
X Wheel with hub cap: position the opening for
the tire valve in the hub cap over the tire valve.
X Push the edge of the hub cap with both hands
against the wheel until it clicks into place.
Z
272 Spare wheel
Make sure the hub cap retaining catches the tire pressure table. Further information on
engage on the steel wheel. wheel/tire combination can be obtained at any
X Wheel with central hub cap: position the qualified specialist workshop.
retaining lugs of the central hub cap over the Check tire pressures regularly and only when
wheel bolts. the tires are cold. Observe the notes on the rec-
X Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on ommended tire pressure (Y page 250).
the wheel. Follow the maintenance recommendations in
the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your
X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel
vehicle documents.
bracket (Y page 273).
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
X Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport the
the vehicle:
defective rear wheel in the load area. The rear
wheel is too large for the spare wheel bracket. Rwith tires of the same size across an axle (left
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted and right)
wheel and adjust it if necessary. Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at a
Observe the recommended tire pressure given time (summer tires, winter tires)
(Y page 250). Tires that have been specially designed and
X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the approved for your vehicle are marked with MO
specified tightening torque after the vehicle (Mercedes-Benz Original). You can find this
has been driven for 30 miles (50 km). identification on the tires themselves and in the
following table.
When using a wheel or spare wheel with a new or
newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel bolts or i Not all wheel/tire combinations can be
nuts retightened again after approximately 600 installed at the factory in all countries.
to 3,000 miles (1,000 to 5,000 km). Observe the
specified tightening torque.
Wheels and tires
i Vehicles with the tire pressure monitor sys- Spare wheel

tem: all mounted wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors.
G WARNING
Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type
Wheel and tire combination
of tire can vary between the spare wheel and
General notes the wheel to be replaced. When the spare
wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-
ommended for Sprinter vehicles, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on dent.
retreaded tires. We can therefore not guar- In order to reduce risks:
antee driving safety. Do not mount used tires
Ryou should therefore adapt your driving
if you have no information about their previ-
ous usage. style and drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel
The recommended tire pressures can be found:
that differs from the wheel to be replaced.
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard9
Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Ron the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on the wheel to be replaced for a short time.
driver's side Rdo not deactivate ESP®.
The recommended tire pressure can also be Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the
found in the "Tire pressure table" section in this wheel that has been changed replaced at
Operator's Manual (Y page 257). The wheel/tire
combination for your vehicle can be found on the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
9 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).
Spare wheel 273
You must observe the correct wheel and Removing

tire dimensions as well as the wheel type. X Open the rear doors.
X Place a screwdriver into recesses ; and then
When using a spare wheel of a different size, do pry off covers :.
not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 240), unscrew the now visible bolts
counter-clockwise by approximately 20 turns.
General notes
! Check the spare wheel regularly to see that
it is secure and has the prescribed tire pres-
sure.
The procedure for mounting the spare wheel is
described in "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 267).
The following should be checked regularly, par-
ticularly prior to long journeys:
Rthe tire pressure of the spare wheel, which
should then be corrected if necessary
(Y page 250).
Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracket. Spare wheel carrier under the vehicle
The spare wheel is located in a spare wheel X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and
bracket under the rear of the vehicle. unhook left-hand retaining hook =.
Replace the tires after 6 years at the latest, X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and
regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare
Wheels and tires

slide it into sleeve ? on spare wheel bracket
wheel. A.
i If you have mounted a spare wheel, the tire X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the pump
pressure monitor (Y page 253) will not func- lever and unhook right-hand retaining hook
tion for this wheel. The spare wheel is not =.
equipped with a sensor for monitoring tire X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket A down to
pressure. the ground.
X Lift spare wheel bracket A slightly and pull
the pump lever out of sleeve ?.
Removing and installing the spare
wheel
Cargo Van/Passenger Van
Spare wheel in the spare wheel carrier
Bolt covers for the safety catches (example: Cargo

Van)
Z
274 Spare wheel
X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and
beyond the rear edge of the spare wheel car- slide it into the sleeve on the right-hand side
rier. of spare wheel bracket ?.
X Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the pump
wheel bracket A. lever and unhook right-hand retaining
The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare hook :.
wheel is removed, the center of gravity X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket ? down to
changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. the ground.
The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. X Lift spare wheel bracket ? slightly and pull
Installing the pump lever out of the sleeve.
X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel bracket A.
The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the
spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket A, the
center of gravity changes due to the weight of
the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or
tip over.
X Slide the pump lever for the jack into
sleeve ? on spare wheel bracket A.
X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the pump
lever and attach right-hand retaining hook =.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and
attach left-hand retaining hook =. X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel
X Pull the pump lever out of sleeve ?. beyond the rear edge of spare wheel
Wheels and tires
X Using the lug wrench, tighten the retaining bracket ?.

hook bolts by turning them clockwise. X Carefully remove the spare wheel from the
X Replace and engage covers :. bracket.
The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare
X Close the rear doors.
wheel is removed, the center of gravity
changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel.
Cab Chassis version The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
Installing
X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel bracket ?.
The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the
spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket ?, the
center of gravity changes due to the weight of
the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or
tip over.
X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the pump
lever and attach right-hand retaining hook :.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and
attach left-hand retaining hook :.
Removing X Pull the pump lever out.
X Loosen fender nuts = manually and then X Tighten nuts ;.
remove them. X Put fender nuts = in place and tighten them.
X Loosen nuts ; as far as the thread end.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and
unhook left-hand retaining hook :.
Vehicle electronics 275
Useful information Electrical and electronic devices may have a

detrimental effect on both the comfort and the
operating safety of the vehicle. If equipment of
this kind is installed, its electromagnetic com-
patibility must be checked and verified.
to print. Country-specific variations are possi- If these devices are linked to functions associ-
ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped ated with resistance to interference, they must
with all of the described functions. This also have type approval. This applies to the device or
applies to systems and functions relevant to its interfaces to the vehicle electronics, e.g.
safety. charging brackets.
Read the information on qualified specialist A telephone or two-way radio to be installed in
workshops (Y page 26). the vehicle must be approved. Further informa-
tion can be obtained from any Sprinter Dealer.
For operation of mobile phones and two-way
Vehicle electronics radios, Mercedes-Benz recommends connec-
tion to an approved exterior antenna. This is the
Tampering with the engine electron- only way to ensure optimum reception quality
inside the vehicle and to minimize mutual inter-
ics ference between the vehicle electronics, mobile
G WARNING phones and two-way radios.
The transmission output of the mobile phone or
Always have work on the engine electronics two-way radio may not exceed the following
and related components carried out at a quali- maximum transmission output (PEAK):
fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's operating safety could be affected. Frequency range Maximum trans-
mission output
! Only have engine electronics and the corre- (PEAK)
sponding parts, such as control units, sensors Shortwave 100 W
or connector leads, serviced in a qualified (f < 50 MHz)
Technical data
specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle
parts may wear more quickly. This can lead to 4 m waveband 30 W
loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2 m waveband 50 W
Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
Installing electrical or electronic
equipment 70 cm waveband 35 W
GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W
G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You and others can suffer health-related dam-

age through electromagnetic radiation. By using
an exterior antenna, a possible health risk
caused by electromagnetic fields, as discussed
have the exterior antenna installed by a qualified
Z
276 Identification plates
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
Example: chassis identification plate (vehicles for

Canada)
; VIN
= Paint code
Vehicle identification plate for vehicles or chassis
on the base of the driver's seat
X Open the driver’s door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :
with the vehicle identification number (VIN),
the paint code and the permissible weight
data.
Engine compartment
Technical data
? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the engine

compartment)
A Engine number (stamped on the crankcase)
B Emission Control Information and engine
oil10 instruction labels
Example: vehicle identification plate (US vehicles)
Example: Emission Control Information label

Example: chassis identification plate (US vehicles)
10 Also observe the notes on engine oil for diesel engines in the "Technical data" section.
Service products and capacities 277
i Such data is vehicle-specific and may differ to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5). They
from that shown. Always observe the specifi- are therefore not necessarily approved.
cations on your vehicle's identification plate. Further information can be obtained at any
Additives for approved service products are nei-
Engine number ther required nor permitted. Approved fuel addi-
tives are the exception. Additives can cause
The engine number is stamped on the crank- engine damage and must therefore not be
case. More information may be obtained at any added to the service products.
The use of additives is always the responsibility
of the vehicle operator. The use of additives may
result in the restriction or loss of your Limited
Service products and capacities Warranty entitlements.
G WARNING Fuel
Service products may be poisonous and haz- Important safety notes
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage G WARNING
and disposal of service products on the labels Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
of the respective original containers. Always fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
store service products sealed in their original Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
containers. Always keep service products out sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
of the reach of children. engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
before refueling.
Dispose of service products in an environ- G WARNING
Technical data
mentally responsible manner. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Service products include the following:
You must make sure that fuel does not come
RFuels, e.g. diesel into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
RAdditives for the exhaust gas aftertreatment, and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
e.g. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oil
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
RCoolant
observe the following:
RBrake fluid
RWasher fluid RWash away fuel from skin immediately
RClimate control system refrigerants using soap and water.
Approved service products comply with the RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
highest quality standards and are listed in the immediately rinse them thoroughly with
MB Specifications for Service Products. Only clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
use service products approved for the vehicle. out delay.
This is an important condition for the warranty.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
You will recognize the approved service prod-
ucts by the inscription on the container: MB tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 228.5) ing.
Other identifications and recommendations RImmediately change out of clothing which
refer to quality level or a specification according has come into contact with fuel.
Z
278 Service products and capacities
When handling, storing and disposing of fuels, Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do
please observe the relevant regulations. not use any special additives. This can other-
wise lead to engine damage. This does not
Tank contents include flow improver additives. For further
information, see "Flow improvers".
Depending on equipment, the total capacity of You will generally find information about the fuel
the fuel tank may vary. grade on the filling pump. If there is no identifi-
Vehicle type Total capa- of which cation on the filling pump, consult a gas station
city reserve fuel attendant.
For more information about refueling
2500 Approx- Approx- (Y page 127).
3500 imately imately
26.4 US gal 5.0 US gal Diesel at very low outside temperatures
(100 l) (19 l) G WARNING
All-wheel- Approx- If you heat fuel system components, e.g. with
drive vehicle imately a hot-air gun or open flame, these compo-
24.6 US gal nents could be damaged. This can cause fuel
(93 l)
to escape and ignite. Depending on the type
of damage, fuel may also not escape until the
Diesel engine is running. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Fuel grade
Never heat fuel system components. Contact
G WARNING a qualified specialist workshop to rectify the
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash malfunction.
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system Refill only with commercially available ULTRA-
components could overheat without being LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfur
Technical data
noticed. There is a risk of fire. content 15 ppm), which fulfills the ASTM D975
standard.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline The flow properties of diesel may be inadequate
with diesel fuel. at low outside temperatures due to paraffin sep-
aration.
! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the
vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from i Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sepa-
barrels or containers. ration can only be rectified by heating the
This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys- entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a
tem due to contaminated fuel. heated garage, for example.
To prevent operating problems, diesel with bet-
! You will damage the diesel engine if you do ter flow qualities is available during the winter
not refuel with ULSD or a diesel fuel with a months. You can obtain information at the gas
sulfur content of more than 15 ppm. station or from your fuel supplier.
! Do not use the following: Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating
RMarine
system. This improves the flow properties of the
diesel
diesel by approximately 46 ‡ (8 †). ULTRA-
RHeating oil LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without risk
RBio-diesel of malfunction down to an outside temperature
RVegetable oil of approximately 14 ‡ (Ò10 †).
RGasoline
RParaffin
RKerosene
Fuel additives Rtransmission ratios for the drive assemblies

! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to diesel Radditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioning
fuel to improve its flow characteristics. Gas- system, auxiliary heating system)
oline or kerosene impairs the lubricating For these reasons, the actual consumption fig-
properties of the diesel fuel. This can result in ures for your vehicle may deviate from the con-
damage to the fuel injection system, for sumption figures determined according to EU
example. Directive 80/1268/EEC.
Data concerning fuel consumption are recorded
Information on fuel consumption in the on-board computer; use the steering
wheel buttons to call up the Trip computer
H Environmental note menu (Y page 174).
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
tists believe to be principally responsible for Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to
General notes
fuel consumption and therefore depend on: H Environmental note
Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Dispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-
Rdriving style sible manner.
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- When opening the DEF tank filler cap at high
ronmental influences, road conditions or outside temperatures, ammonia vapors may
traffic flow escape.
You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis- Ammonia vapors have a pungent smell and pri-
sions by driving carefully and having it serv- marily cause irritation of the:
iced regularly. Rskin
Rmucous membranes
Fuel consumption depends on: Reyes
Technical data
Rthe vehicle version You may experience a burning sensation in your
Rthe style of driving eyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing and
Rthe operating conditions
watering of the eyes.
Rthe type or quality of the fuel used
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Avoid contact
with DEF.
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the
following situations: Do not allow DEF to come into direct contact
with your skin; it is hazardous to your health.
Rat very low outside temperatures Rinse any affected areas off with plenty of clean
Rin city traffic water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
Rduring short journeys If DEF heats up, e.g. in direct sunlight, in the DEF
Ron mountainous terrain supply reservoir for some time to over 122 ‡
Rwhen towing a trailer
(50 †), ammonia vapor will develop.
To conform to emission regulations, you must
To keep fuel consumption low, observe the
operate the vehicle with DEF and refill the supply
advice in the "Protection of the environment"
regularly. The engine management recognizes
attempts to operate the vehicle without DEF,
The following components of the different vehi- with thinned DEF or with another reducing
cle versions influence fuel consumption: agent. After previous warning messages, the
Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire condi- engine management then prevents a further
tion engine start.
Rbody When the number of remaining engine starts is 0
the engine management prevents the vehicle
from being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph
Z
(8 km/h). The multifunction display shows the Purity

Idle Mode message. ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by other ser-
DEF consumption vice products, cleaning agents, dust, etc.)
result in increased emissions, malfunctions,
DEF consumption depends on operational and catalytic converter damage or engine dam-
driving conditions and it is not necessary to wait age.
until the next scheduled service to replenish the
fluid. Fluid should be added regularly to the DEF The purity of DEF is essential to prevent mal-
supply reservoir during vehicle operation or, at functions in the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
the latest, after receiving the first warning mes- If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during
sage via the on-board computer. repair work, the same liquid must not be used to
refill the tank. Its purity is no longer guaranteed.
Low ambient temperatures
DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately Disposal
12 ‡ (Ò11 †). The vehicle is equipped with a DEF Observe country-specific laws and regulations
preheating system at the factory. Winter oper- when disposing of DEF.
ation is therefore also guaranteed at tempera- % Environmental note
tures under 12 ‡ (Ò11 †).
Dispose of DEF in an environmentally responsi-
i If you add DEF at temperatures below 12 ‡ ble manner.
(Ò11 †) it is possible that the level is not
shown correctly due to the frozen DEF. DEF supply reservoir content
Drive for at least 20 minutes (heating phase in
the tank activated) and then stop the vehicle Tank contents
for at least 30 seconds. The level is then Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)11
shown correctly.
Approximately 4.7 US gal (18.0 l)
Additives
! Do not mix DEF with any additives and do
not dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise, the Engine oil
Technical data
exhaust gas aftertreatment may be damaged.

Observe the MB Specifications for Service General notes
Products, Sheet No. 352.0.
Damage that arises through the use of addi-
tives or tap water will invalidate the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
Storage
! Containers made of aluminum, copper, cop-
per alloys as well as unalloyed or galvanized
steel are not suitable for storing DEF. If stored
in these types of containers, DEF could cause
constituents of these metals to dissolve and
cause irreparable damage to the exhaust gas
aftertreatment.
Damage caused by such impurities in the DEF ! The bottles of the various engine oil types
will invalidate the New Vehicle Limited War- are marked with ACEA (Association des Con-
ranty. structeurs Européens d'Automobiles) and/or
API (American Petroleum Institute) classifica-
Only store DEF in containers made of high-alloy tions. Only use approved engine oils that con-
Cr‑Ni steel or Mo‑Cr‑Ni steel in accordance with form to the following MB Specifications for
DIN EN 10 088‑1/2/3 or plastic containers Service Products and the prescribed ACEA
made of polypropylene or polyethylene. and/or API classifications. Using engine oils
11 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0.
of another quality is not permitted and may

invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The use of other, non-approved engine oils for
diesel engines can cause damage to the die-
sel particle filter (DPF).
Use only engine oils that have been approved for
your vehicle according to the MB Specifications
for Service Products.
The MB Specifications for Service Products are
valid for your vehicle12
R228.51
R229.31 Engine oil SAE classification
R229.51 Viscosity indicates the flow characteristics of a
These are high quality engine oils which have a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this
positive effect on: means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that
it is thin.
Rengine wear
Depending on the respective outside tempera-
Rfuel consumption
tures, select an engine oil according to SAE
Rexhaust gas emissions classification (viscosity). The table displays the
Multi-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAE SAE classification to be used. The low temper-
class (viscosity) may be used all year round, tak- ature characteristics of engine oils can notice-
ing the outside temperatures into account. ably deteriorate during operation, e.g. from
aging, soot and fuel accretion. For this reason,
Engine oil viscosity regular oil changes using an approved engine oil
from the suitable SAE classification are urgently
! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oil recommended.
used does not cover the outside temperature
range in which you are operating the vehicle, Additives
Technical data
it must be changed in good time, in particular
before the cold season commences. Using an ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
engine oil that does not have adequate tem- This could damage the engine.
perature characteristics can lead to engine
damage. Miscibility of engine oils
The temperature range information of the SAE
classification always refers to that of fresh oil. ! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of using
The temperature characteristics of the engine high grade engine oils.
oil may deteriorate significantly due to aging We recommend that you only add engine oil of
in use, especially at low outside tempera- the same quality grade and SAE class as used
tures. when the engine oil was last changed.
We recommend that you change the engine If, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in the
oil before the cold season commences. Use engine is not available, top up using another
an approved engine oil of the specified SAE approved mineral or synthetic engine oil.
class.
If the quality grade is not available for diesel
engines, you may also add engine oils meeting
the requirements in MB Sheet Number 228.5,
229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then
limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).
12 If the quality grade is not available for diesel engines, you may also add engine oils meeting the requirements
of MB Sheet No. 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).
Z
Engine oils are differentiated according to: (500 km). This ensures sufficient regenera-
Rengine oil brand tion of the diesel particle filter.
Rquality grade (sheet number) Depending on the driving style, the vehicle con-
RSAE class (viscosity) sumes a maximum of 1.0 qt (1.0 l) of engine oil
over a distance of 620 miles (1000 km).
Subsequently have the engine oil changed at the
earliest possible opportunity. Oil consumption may be higher if:
Rthe vehicle is new.
Interval for oil change Ryou mainly operate the vehicle under arduous
operating conditions.
The on-board computer automatically shows Ryou frequently drive at high engine speeds.
the date for the next oil change as an event
message in the display. Regular maintenance is one of the preconditions
for moderate rates of consumption.
Only by using engine oil with a particularly high
quality grade, e.g. according to Sheet Number You can only estimate the oil consumption after
228.51 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for you have driven a considerable distance.
Service Products, can the maximum interval for Check the engine oil level on a regular basis, e.g.
oil change be achieved. weekly or each time you refuel (Y page 220).
We recommend having the oil changed at a
Engine oil for diesel engines Transmission and power steering oil
Product name/number Automatic transmission
See the Maintenance Booklet. Service product: automatic transmission
MB Sheet Number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 fluid
Product name/number Maintenance
Capacities interval
Shell ATF 3403/M-115 —
Technical data
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much

engine oil can result in damage to the engine MB Sheet No. 236.10
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off. Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353
Oil change including oil filter MB Sheet No. 236.12
Vehicles Engine oil Further information can be obtained at any

4-cylinder Approximately
3 US gal (11.5 l)
Rear axle
6-cylinder Approximately
3.3 US gal (12.5 l) Service product: transmission oil
Product name/number Maintenance
Information about oil consumption interval
! If the vehicle is predominantly used for BP Energear Hypo DC —
short-distance driving, this could lead to a 80W-90
malfunction in the automatic cleaning func- MB Sheet No. 235.20
tion for the diesel particle filter. As a result,
fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and Mobil Delvac Synthetic
cause engine failure. Gear Oil 75W-90
Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances, MB Sheet No. 235.8
you should drive on a highway or on rural
roads for 20 minutes every 310 miles
Further information can be obtained at any Service product:

qualified specialist workshop. brake fluid
Steering Product descrip- Intac B026E

tion and number RBoiling point: 500 ‡
Service product: power steering fluid
(260 †)
Product name/number Maintenance RWet boiling point:
interval 356 ‡ (180 †)
Mobil ATF‑D, — MB Sheet No. 331.0
Exxon Mobil Corporation
or equivalent Maintenance 2 years
interval
MB Sheet No. 236.3
i Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 years

The steering is maintenance-free. Further infor- at a qualified specialist workshop.
mation can be obtained at any qualified special-
ist workshop. There is usually a notice in the engine com-
partment to remind you when the next brake
fluid change is due.
Brake fluid
G WARNING Coolant
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture Important safety notes
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake G WARNING
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
brake system when the brakes are applied ponents in the engine compartment, it may
Technical data
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
You should have the brake fluid renewed at freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
the specified intervals. next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub- the engine.
ber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come into
contact with brake fluid, rinse with water ! Take care not to spill any coolant on painted
immediately. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
Only use brake fluids approved for Sprinter vehi- paintwork.
cles. Always check for the identification DOT 4 When handling, storing and disposing of coolant
plus. and antifreeze, please observe the relevant reg-
Information about approved brake fluids can be ulations and the safety notes in the "Service
found in the Maintenance Booklet or obtained at products and capacities" section (Y page 277).
any qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant additive with antifreeze
requirements
! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor that complies with MB Specification
for Service Products, Sheet Number 325.
Using other, non-approved antifreeze/corro-
sion inhibitors may cause damage to the cool-
Z
ant system and reduce the engine's service Service product: coolant
life.
Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/ Product name/number
corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze,
tasks:
OLD WORLD INDUSTRIES
Rcorrosion protection
MB Sheet No. 325.0
Rantifreeze protection
Rraises the boiling point Zerex G05, The Valvoline Company
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with MB Sheet No. 325.0
a coolant mixture that ensures adequate anti- Zerex G48, The Valvoline Company
freeze and corrosion protection. Coolant must
be used in the system all year round to ensure MB Sheet No. 325.0
anti-corrosion protection and a raised boiling Glysantin G05, BASF AG
point – even in countries with high outside tem-
MB Sheet No. 325.0
peratures.
To prevent damage to the engine cooling sys-
tem, use only approved corrosion inhibitor/anti- Capacities
freeze that comply with the Mercedes-Benz
Engine cooling system
Specifications for Service Products.
We recommend corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze Coolant Approx. 10.75 qt
that meets the requirements in MB Specifica- (10.0 l)
tions for Service Products Sheet Number 325.
Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-
centration in the coolant every six months.
Refrigerant
The percentage of corrosion inhibitor/anti-
freeze additive in the engine cooling system The air-conditioning system uses the refrigerant
should: R‑134a. This refrigerant does not damage the
ozone layer.
Technical data
Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine cooling

system is protected against freezing down to Product name/number Maintenance
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). interval
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be Refrigerant R‑134a —
dissipated as effectively. MB Sheet No. 361.0
If there has been coolant loss, do not refill only
with water. If the vehicle has lost coolant, add Further information can be obtained at any
equal parts water and corrosion inhibitor/anti- qualified specialist workshop.
freeze additive. The water used as part of the
coolant mixture must fulfill certain require-
ments; these are usually fulfilled by drinking
water. If the water quality is not sufficient, you Washer fluid
must treat the water.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Vehicle data 285
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for Cargo tie-down points and carrier sys-
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB tems
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Cargo tie-down points
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products General notes
(Y page 277). ! Observe the information on the maximum
loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-
Mixing ratio down points.
If you use several cargo tie-down points to
Add windshield washer concentrate to the
secure a load, you must always take the max-
washer fluid all year round. Adapt the mixing
imum loading capacity of the weakest cargo
ratio to the ambient temperature.
tie-down point into account.
At temperatures above freezing: If you brake hard, for example, the forces act-
X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mixing could be up to several times the weight
ture of water and windshield washer concen- force of the load. Always use multiple cargo
trate, e.g. Summerwash to prevent smearing. tie-down points in order to distribute the force
absorption. Load the anchorages evenly.
At temperatures below freezing:
You will find further information about cargo tie
X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- down points and cargo tie-down rings in the
ture of water and windshield washer concen- "Transporting" section (Y page 214).
trate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a danger of
frost. Cargo tie-down rings
This prevents washer fluid from freezing on
The maximum tensile load of the cargo tie-down
the windshield.
rings is:
Capacities Cargo tie-down Permissible nomi-

rings nal tensile load
Windshield washer system with/without
Technical data
headlamp cleaning system Passenger Vans 786.5 lbf
(3500 N)
Washer fluid Approx. 6.3 qt (6.0 l)
Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf
(5000 N)
Vehicle data Load rails
General notes The maximum tensile loads of the cargo tie-
down points in the cargo compartment are:
The following section contains important tech-
nical data for your vehicle. Your vehicle regis- Cargo tie-down Permissible nomi-
tration documents contain vehicle-specific and point nal tensile load
equipment-dependent technical data such as
vehicle dimensions and vehicle weights. Load rails on cargo 1124.0 lbf
compartment floor (5000 N)
Lower load rail on 562.0 lbf
sidewall (2500 N)
Upper load rail on 337.0 lbf
sidewall (1500 N)
Z
286 Vehicle data
The values specified apply only to loads placed The data is valid for a load distributed evenly
on the cargo compartment floor if: over the entire roof area. Maximum roof load
Rthe load is secured to 2 cargo tie-down points and minimum number of pairs of roof carrier
on the rail and supports on vehicles with:
Rthe distance to the nearest load-securing Maximum Minimum
point on the same rail is approximately 3 ft roof load number of
(1 m). pairs of sup-
ports
Roof carrier
Standard 660 lbs 6
G WARNING roof (300 kg)
When you load the roof, the center of gravity High roof 330 lbs 3
of the vehicle rises and the driving character- (150 kg)
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro-
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. portionately. The maximum load per pair of roof
There is a risk of an accident. carrier supports is 110 lbs (50 kg).
Loading directions and other information con-
Never exceed the maximum roof load and cerning load distribution and load securing can
adjust your driving style. be found in the "Transporting" section
(Y page 212).
G WARNING
If you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-
cle, the handling as well as the steering and Trailer tow hitch
braking characteristics are severely affected.
General notes
Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle. We recommend that you have the trailer tow
Technical data
Secure the load to prevent it from slipping. hitch mounted at an authorized Sprinter Dealer.
Use only a trailer tow hitch that has been tested
! The weight of any load carried on the roof, and approved specially for your vehicle by the
including the roof carrier, must not exceed distributor named on the inside of the front
the maximum permissible roof load. cover. Only use a ball coupling that is approved
for your vehicle and Sprinter trailer tow hitch.
The roof carrier supports must be mounted at You can also find information on the permitted
equal distances. dimensions of the ball coupling on the identifi-
We recommend that you have a stabilizer cation plate of the trailer tow hitch.
installed on the front axle. You can obtain advice from a qualified specialist
! For safety reasons, we recommend that you workshop. Also observe the information on tow-
only use roof carrier systems that have been ing a trailer in the "Driving and parking" section
tested and approved for the Sprinter. This will (Y page 155).
help to avoid damage.
Vehicle data 287
Maximum permitted weights and loads

! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible
gross combination weight is less than the total of the permissible gross vehicle weight and the
permissible trailer load. Exceeding the permissible gross combination weight can lead to damage
to the drivetrain, to the transmission or to the trailer tow hitch.
If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the relevant value for the permissible gross vehicle weight
or the permissible trailer load is therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the vehicle may only
be partially loaded.
The permissible weights and loads which cannot be exceeded can also be found:
Rin your vehicle documents and
Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle (Y page 276).
You will find the basic values approved by the manufacturer in the following table. If the values differ,
the lowest value applies.
Make sure that you adhere to the weight restrictions by having the weight checked on a calibrated
weighbridge.
Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross rear Maximum Trailer Maximum
type ble gross front axle axle load permissi- load14 GTW permissi-
weight load GAWR ble gross ble nose
GVWR GAWR (RA) weight of weight
(FA) vehicle/ TWR
trailer com-
bination13
GCWR
2500 8550 lbs 3970 lbs 5360 lbs 13550 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(3878 kg) (1801 kg) (2431 kg) (6146 kg) (2268 kg) (227 kg)
3500
Technical data
9900 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14900 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(4490 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6759 kg)15 (2268 kg)15 (227 kg)15
Canada only
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)16 (3402 kg)16 (340 kg)16
(4531 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)15 (2268 kg)15 (227 kg)15
USA only
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)16 (3402 kg)16 (340 kg)16
(4600 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)15 (2268 kg)15 (227 kg)15
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)16 (3402 kg)16 (340 kg)16
13 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer

14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer
15 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).
16 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).
Z
288 Vehicle data
Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross rear Maximum Trailer Maximum

type ble gross front axle axle load permissi- load14 GTW permissi-
weight load GAWR ble gross ble nose
GVWR GAWR (RA) weight of weight
(FA) vehicle/ TWR
trailer com-
bination13
GCWR
(5003 kg) (1851 kg) (3502 kg) (6917 kg) (2268 kg)15 (227 kg)15
4410 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (3402 kg)16 (340 kg)16
Technical data
13 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer

14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer
15 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).
16 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

2016 Sprinter Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2016 Sprinter Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Sprinter Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sprinter

X This symbol designates an instruc- © Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Index ....................................................... 3 At a glance ........................................... 31

Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 59

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 72

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 79

Climate control .................................... 97

Driving and parking .......................... 118

On-board computer and displays .... 161

Stowing and features ....................... 204

Transporting loads ............................ 212

Maintenance and care ...................... 218

Roadside Assistance ........................ 240

Wheels and tires ............................... 247

Technical data ................................... 275

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 105

Overview ........................................ 124 Indicator lamp ................................ 195

Brake force distribution, elec- C

Central locking Warning and indicator lamps ......... 203

Reheat function (air dehumidifica- Cornering lamps

Dealership Display messages

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Electrical fuses

Checking the oil level (on-board Flat tire

Key positions ..................................... 119 Setting the exterior lighting

Menu (vehicles with steering Odometer

Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 25 Passenger compartment air-condi-

Rain and light sensor Important safety notes (Diesel

Correct usage .................................. 41 Setting the air distribution ............... 102

Removing/mounting ...................... 273 Stowage space under the rear

Setting the unit (vehicles with Tires

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 265 Trailer loads ................................... 287

Twin front-passenger seat Vents

Wheels Winter tires

Operator's Manual Service and vehicle operation

Maintenance Operating the vehicle outside of the

Proper use Do not store or transport any substances in

Operating conditions: Operating safety and vehicle approval

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. authorized Sprinter Dealer

Reporting malfunctions relevant to

Further information can be obtained at any Notes on the radiator

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

? Fuel gage with fuel filler flap D Service button Ë

Indicator and warning lamps

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

Function Page Function Page

cleaning system 202 m Fuel filter dirty 202

å DEF supply low or contami- # Battery charging malfunction 198

+ LOW RANGE active 148 å DEF supply low or contami-

i Corresponding messages may also be

Steering wheel buttons Center console

1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

Function Page Overhead control panel

Ã Central locking, interior/rear

B Cup holder with: 208 ; Switches the right-hand